GE Healthcare Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM

GE Healthcare Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
GE Healthcare
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Technical Reference Manual
Conformity according to the Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning Medical Devices amended by 2007/47/EC
CAUTION: U.S. Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a licensed medical practitioner.
Outside the USA, check local laws for any restriction that may apply.
All specifications subject to change without notice.
Order code M1181261
3rd edition
10 February, 2012
GE Healthcare Finland Oy
Kuortaneenkatu 2
FI-00510 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: +358 10 39411
Fax: +358 9 1463310
www.gehealthcare.com
Copyright 2010, 2012 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Indications for use
The S/5 FM with L-FICU06 and L-FICU06A and N-FCREC Module are intended for multiparameter patient
monitoring.
The S/5 FM with L-FICU06 or L-FICU06A software is indicated for monitoring of hemodynamics (including
arrhythmia and ST-segment analysis) and respiratory status of all hospital patients.
Extension module N-FCREC (option N-FCREC or N-FC) is indicated for monitoring CO2 and respiration rate
of all hospital patients.
CO2 measurements are indicated for patients weighing over 5kg (11lbs).
The S/5 FM Monitor and N-F(C)(REC) Extension Module are indicated for use by qualified medical personnel
only.
The Datex-Ohmeda S/5 PSM module (consisting of E-PSM, E-PSMP and E-INTPSM Modules) and
accessories is intended for monitoring hemodynamic parameters of hospitalized patients.
The Datex-Ohmeda S/5 PSM module (consisting of E-PSM, E-PSMP and E-INTPSM Modules) and
accessories are indicated for monitoring of hemodynamic parameters of all hospital patients. The
hemodynamic parameters of the module comprise ECG (including ST-segment and arrhythmia),
Impedance respiration, NIBP, Temperature, SpO2 (including monitoring during conditions of clinical
patient motion), and invasive blood pressure.
Impedance Respiration measurement is indicated for patients ages 3 and up.
The NIBP measurement is indicated for patients who weigh 5 kg (11 lbs.) and up.
The device is indicated for use by qualified medical personnel only.
NOTE: E-INTPSM Module is not in use with the S/5 FM.
Classifications
In accordance with IEC 60601-1
CLASS I AND INTERNALLY POWERED EQUIPMENT – the type of protection against electric shock.
TYPE BF or CF equipment. The degree of protection against electric shock is indicated by a symbol on
each parameter module.
EQUIPMENT not suitable for use in the presence of a FLAMMABLE ANESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR OR
WITH OXYGEN OR NITROUS OXIDE.
CONTINUOUS OPERATION according to the mode of operation.
In accordance with IEC 60529
IPX1 - degree of protection against harmful ingress of water.
In accordance with EU Medical Device Directive
The Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM is classified as IIb.
In accordance with CISPR 11: Group 1, Class A
• Group 1 contains all ISM (Industrial, scientific and medical) equipment in which there is intentionally
generated and/or used conductively coupled radio-frequency energy which is necessary for the
internal functioning of the equipment itself.
• Class A equipment is suitable for use in all establishments other than domestic and those directly
connected to the public low-voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic
purposes.
Responsibility of the manufacturer
GE Healthcare Finland Oy (GE) is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability and performance of the
equipment only if:
• assembly, extensions, readjustments, modifications, servicing and repairs are carried out by
personnel authorized by GE.
• the electrical installation of the monitor room complies with appropriate requirements.
• the equipment is used in accordance with the “User's Guide.”
Trademarks
S/5, D-lite, D-lite+, Pedi-lite, Pedi-lite+, Mini D-fend, D-fend, D-fend+, MemCard, ComBar, ComWheel,
EarSat, FingerSat, FlexSat, PatientO2, Entropy and Patient Spirometry are trademarks of GE Healthcare
Finland Oy.
Datex, Ohmeda, and OxyTip+ are trademarks of GE Healthcare Finland Oy and Datex-Ohmeda, Inc.
All other product and company names are property of their respective owners.
Product availability
Some of the products mentioned in this manual may not be available in all countries.
Please, consult your local representative for the availability.
Master Table of Contents
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Technical Reference Manual, Order code: M1181261
3rd edition
Part I, General Service Guide
Document No.
Updated
Description
M1187317-009
Introduction, System description, Installation,
Interfacing, Functional check, General
troubleshooting
1
M1187318-003
Planned Maintenance Instructions
2
Part II, Product Service Guide
Document No.
Updated
Description
M1187329-003
S/5 FM Service Menu
1
M1187335-004
Frame for FM
2
M1215098-002
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP
3
M1187338-003
S/5 Extension Module for FM, N-FC, N-FCREC, N-FREC
4
M1187342-004
S/5 Remote Controller, K-REMCO, K-CREMCO
5
M1187344-003
Device Interfacing Solution, N-DIS
6
M1187346-007
S/5 FM Spare Parts
7
1
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
2
Document no. M1187317-009
Table of contents
Table of contents
Table of contents
i
Table of figures
iii
List of tables
iv
About this manual
1
1
3
Introduction
1.1
1.2
2
System description
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
3
1.0.1 Compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.1.1 Symbols on transport packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.1.2 Symbols on equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.1.3 Equipment safety symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.1.4 Other symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.2.1 Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.2.2 ESD precautionary procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Bus structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Distributed processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Module communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Software loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Parameter modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
System installation
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
14
18
Unpacking instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Choosing location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Mounting the S/5 FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.3.1 E-PSM(P) Mounting Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.3.2 Monitor connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.3.3 Connection to mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.3.4 Connection to Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.3.5 Connection to Wireless Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.3.6 Inserting and removing the parameter modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.3.7 Downloading Monitor Software F-FM(W)-00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.3.8 Downloading Monitor Software, F-FM(W)-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.3.9 Performing Factory Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.3.10 Installing the Datex-Ohmeda Wireless Network Upgrade, U-FMW (F-FM-00). . . . . . 25
3.3.11 Installing the Datex-Ohmeda Wireless Network Service Option,
N-FMWS (F-FM-00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.3.12 Installing the S/5 Wireless Network Upgrade, U-FMW-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Remote Controller, K-CREMCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Visual indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
i
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
4
Interfacing
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
5
Interfacing external bedside devices via Device Interfacing Solutions, N-DISxxx. . . . . . . . . 32
4.1.1 Device Interfacing Solution components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.1.2 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.1.3 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.1.4 Selecting the external device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.1.5 Functional check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4.1.6 Selecting the parameter data source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Interfacing printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.2.1 Setting S/5 FM interface for printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.2.2 Connection to serial printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.2.3 Connection to parallel printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.2.4 Installing the Serial-to-Parallel Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.2.5 Connection to printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Interfacing computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4.4.1 Digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4.4.2 Analog outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Functional check
5.1
5.2
5.3
6
32
40
Recommended tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Visual inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Functional inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
5.3.2 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.3.3 Keyboard(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.3.4 Frame unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.3.5 Extension Module with CO2 measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.3.6 Multiparameter Hemodynamic Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
5.3.7 Data Card and Menu Card function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.3.8 Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.3.9 Network connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.3.10 Wireless Network Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.3.11 Device Interfacing Solution, N-DISxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.3.12 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
General troubleshooting
47
Appendix A:
Functional check form, Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
A-1
Appendix B:
ElectroMagnetic Compatibility
B-1
Appendix C:
Channel Mask Selections for S/5 FM
C-1
ii
Document no. M1187317-009
Table of figures
Table of figures
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
Figure 4
Figure 5
Figure 6
Figure 7
Figure 8
Figure 9
Figure 10
Figure 11
S/5 FM with N-FCREC (1) and E-PSM (2) modules .......................................................................................................... 3
General bus structure of S/5 FM ........................................................................................................................................14
Principle of UPI section operation ......................................................................................................................................15
General structure of parameter modules with patient isolation.........................................................................17
E-PSM(P) mounting accessories ..........................................................................................................................................19
S/5 FM front panel .....................................................................................................................................................................20
Rear panel connections ..........................................................................................................................................................21
Connection cables and LED indicators ............................................................................................................................33
An example of interfacing external devices with Device Interfacing Solution..............................................34
Connecting S/5 FM monitor to printer, converter model PI130-R2 ....................................................................37
S/5 FM general troubleshooting flowchart ....................................................................................................................47
iii
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
List of tables
Table 1
Table 2
Table 3
Table 4
Table 5
Table 6
Table 7
Table 8
Table 9
DIS modules and interfaced devices............................................................................................................. 32
NET ID connector, X8 on Multi I/O adapter ............................................................................................... 38
Defib & IABP sync connector, X5 .................................................................................................................... 38
Patient simulators’ compatibility with each hemodynamic module.............................................. 41
Adapter cables for hemodynamic patient simulators .......................................................................... 42
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic emissions................................ B-1
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity................................. B-2
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity................................. B-3
Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile
RF communications equipment and the S/5 FM .................................................................................. B-4
iv
Document no. M1187317-009
About this manual
Intended audience
This Technical reference manual is meant for service representatives and technical personnel
who install, configure, maintain, administer, troubleshoot or repair Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM.
Notes to the reader
As the monitor setup may vary, some functions described may not be available in the monitor
you are using.
•
The order code for the entire printed manual is M1181261. The manual includes Technical
Reference Manual Slots and every slot has an individual document number.
•
Part I gives the reader an overview of the S/5 FM. It contains the information needed to
install, interface and troubleshoot the monitors. Instructions for functional check and
planned maintenance are also included. Read the manual through and make sure that
you understand the procedures described before the installation of the monitor. To avoid
risks concerning safety or health, strictly observe the warning indications. If you need any
assistance concerning the installation, please do not hesitate to contact your authorized
distributor.
•
Part II contains detailed descriptions of each component of the S/5 FM, such as frame
unit, parameter modules Remote Controller and Device Interfacing Solution. Service
check for each product, service menus and all the spare parts information for the Monitor
is included.
The manufacturer reserves the right to change product specifications without prior notice.
Although the information in this manual is believed to be accurate and reliable, the
manufacturer assumes no responsibility for its use.
Installation and service are allowed by authorized service personnel only.
GE Healthcare Finland Oy (GE) assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software
in equipment that is not furnished by GE.
Ordering manuals
A paper copy of this manual will be provided upon request. Contact your local GE
representative and request the part number on the cover page of the manual.
Related documentation
S/5 FM Monitor
For instructions for daily use including cleaning and daily maintenance, clinical aspects and
basic methods of measurement see:
S/5 FM Monitor, User’s Guide
S/5 FM Monitor, User’s Reference Manual
For more information about the iCentral, S/5 Arrhythmia Workstation and anesthesia record
keeping solution, see the “Technical Reference Manuals” and ”User’s Reference Manuals” for
these products.”
Software options and default settings are described in the “Default Configuration Worksheet”
delivered with each monitor.
Available accessories are described in the “Supplies and Accessories” catalog.
1
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Conventions used
To help you find and interpret information easily, the manual uses consistent text formats:

Sign the check form after performing the procedure.
Hard Keys
Names of the hard keys on the Remote Controller, Command Board, side panel and modules
are written in the following way: Others.
Menu Items
Software terms that identify window parts or menu items are written in bold italic: ECG Setup.
Menu access is described from top to bottom. For example, the selection of the Monitor
Setup hard key, the Screen 1 Setup menu item and the Waveform Fields menu item would be
shown as Monitor Setup - Screen 1 Setup - Waveform Fields.
‘Messages’
Messages (alarm messages, informative messages) displayed on the screen are written inside
single quotes: ‘Please wait’.
“Sections”
When referring to different sections in this manual or to other manuals, manual names and
section names are enclosed in double quotes:
See section "Cleaning and care."
Please refer to "User's Reference Manual: Alarms."
Hypertext links Hypertext links on PDF versions are written in blue color.
WARNING
Warnings are written in the following way:
WARNING
This is a WARNING.
CAUTION
Cautions are written in the following way:
CAUTION
This is a CAUTION.
NOTE
Notes are written in the following way:
NOTE: This is a NOTE.
In this manual, the word “select” means choosing and confirming.
Illustrations and names
All illustrations in this manual are only examples, and may not necessarily reflect your system
settings or data displayed in your system. If a particular selection is not available in your
system, the selection is shown grayed.
2
Document no. M1187317-009
Introduction
1
Introduction
The Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM is a modular multiparameter patient monitor. The monitor is
especially designed for monitoring in intensive care units. It can also be used during
transportation within the hospital.
The modular design makes the system flexible and easy to upgrade. In addition to patient
parameter modularity and easy upgrades, the monitor can be upgraded to wireless
networking. External devices can be interfaced to the monitor with interface modules.
NOTE: Your system may not include all these components. Consult your local representative for
the available components.
1
2
Figure 1
S/5 FM with N-FCREC (1) and E-PSM (2) modules
1.0.1 Compatibility
S/5 FM is compatible with:
S/5 L-FICU04/A
S/5 L-FICU06/A
Patient Side Modules,
S/5 E-PSM and E-PSMP
x
x
Extension Module S/5 F-FC
x
x
Extension Modules,
S/5 N-FCREC, and N-FREC
x
x
Device Interfacing Solution
S/5 N-DISxxx, rev. 01 and later
x
x
S/5 Network and iCentral
x
x
Wireless LAN is available with
WLAN option F-FMW
x
x
3
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
1.1 Symbols
1.1.1 Symbols on transport packaging
The contents of the transport package are fragile and must be handled with
care.
Indicates the correct upright position of the transport package.
The transport package must be kept in a dry environment.
Indicates the temperature limitations within which the transport package
should be stored.
This package can be recycled.
1.1.2 Symbols on equipment
This battery contains lead and can be recycled.
Pb
Dangerous voltage.
Pb/Cd/Hg
4
Document no. M1187317-009
The separate collection symbol is affixed to a battery, or its packaging, to advise
you that the battery must be recycled or disposed of in accordance with local or
country laws. The letters below the separate collection symbol indicate whether
certain elements (Pb=Lead, Cd=Cadmium, Hg=Mercury) are contained in the
battery. To minimize potential effects on the environment and human health, it is
important that all marked batteries that you remove from the product are properly
recycled or disposed. For information on how the battery may be safely removed
from the device, please consult the technical or service manual, or equipment
instructions. Information on the potential effects on the environment and human
health of the substances used in batteries is available at this url:
http://www.gehealthcare.com/euen/weee-recycling/index.html
Introduction
1.1.3 Equipment safety symbols
-
Attention, consult accompanying documents.
-
When displayed next to the HR value, indicates that the pacer is set on R.
-
On the N-FC(REC) module indicates that the airway gases should be
calibrated every 6 months in normal use and every two months in
continuous use to ensure that the measurement accuracy remains within
specifications.
-
On the E-PSM(P) module:
WARNING
-
On the rear or bottom panel:
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
CAUTION
-
Protection against cardiac defibrillator discharge is
due in part to the accessories for pulse oximetry
(SpO2), temperature (T) and invasive pressure (P)
measurement.
Electric shock hazard. Do not open the cover or the
back. Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.
Do not touch the monitor during defibrillation
procedure.
Disconnect from the power supply before servicing.
When using the monitor with mounting attached,
make sure that the mounting is manufacturer
approved.
For continued protection against fire hazard, replace the
fuse only with one of the same type and rating.
Lithium battery on the CPU board. Dispose of the battery
in accordance with local environmental and waste
disposal regulations.
On top of the monitor beside the battery cover:
WARNING
Use manufacturer recommended batteries only.
Dispose of the batteries in accordance with local
environmental and waste disposal regulations.
Type BF (IEC 60601-1) protection against electric shock.
Type BF (IEC 60601-1) defibrillator-proof protection against electric shock.
Type CF (IEC 60601-1) protection against electric shock.
5
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Type CF (IEC 60601-1) defibrillator-proof protection against electric shock.
When displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, indicates that the alarms
are silenced. When displayed in the menu or digit fields, indicates that the alarm
source has been turned off or alarm does not meet the alarm-specific activation
criteria.
ESD warning symbol for electrostatic sensitive devices. Pins of connectors
identified with the ESD warning symbol should not be touched. Connections
should not be made to these connectors unless ESD precautionary procedures
are used. For details, see section “1.2.2. ESD precautionary procedures”.
Symbol for non-ionizing electromagnetic radiation. Interference may occur in
the vicinity of equipment marked with this symbol.
1.1.4 Other symbols
Equipotentiality. Monitor can be connected to potential equalization
conductor.
Alternating current
Fuse. Replace the fuse only with one of the same type and rating.
SN, S/N
Serial Number
Submenu. Selecting an alternative marked with this symbol in a menu opens a
new menu.
A
B
B
B
B
Battery operation and remaining capacity. The height of the green bar
indicates the charging level.
Battery (A) charging (white bar)
Battery (A) failure
Both batteries have failed
6
Document no. M1187317-009
Introduction
B
Battery (A) is missing
In the front panel: mains or external DC power. (External DC power for future
use.)
The monitor is connected to the Datex-Ohmeda Network (Local Area Network,
LAN).
The monitor is connected to the Datex-Ohmeda S/5 Network (Wireless Local
Area Network, WLAN).
Data Card (green) or Menu Card (white) is inserted.
WLAN signal strength. The number of segments corresponds to the signal
strength: four segments indicate strong signal, one segment weak signal.
When connection to access point is being searched, the segments scroll from
zero to four and back.
Ethernet connector
A blinking heart next to the heart rate or pulse rate value indicates the beats
detected.
A lung next to the respiration rate value indicates that respiration rate is
calculated from the impedance respiration measurement.
Gas inlet
Gas outlet
Do not reuse.
Use by. Indicates the last use day.
7
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Date of manufacturer
Manufacturer name and address
Does not contain Latex.
Do not immerse the sensor in liquids.
IPX class:
Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water as detailed in the
IEC 60529:
IPX0
IPX1
IPX2
IPX3
IPX4
IPX7
IPX8
- Ordinary equipment
- Protection against vertically falling water drops.
- Protection against vertically falling water drops when enclosure tilted
up to 15 °.
- Protected against spraying water.
- Protected against splashing water.
- Protected against the effects of temporary immersion in water.
- Protected against the effects of continuous immersion in water.
This symbol indicates that the waste of electrical and electronic equipment
must not be disposed as unsorted municipal waste and must be collected
separately. Please contact an authorized representative of the manufacturer
for information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment.
8
Document no. M1187317-009
Introduction
1.2 Safety
The following list contains general warnings and cautions you should know before installing,
maintaining or servicing the system. Warnings and cautions specific to the use of the system
can be found in the User’s Guide and User’s Reference Manual.
1.2.1 Safety precautions
Warnings
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in which the user or the patient may be in
danger of injury or death.
•
The device is not able to withstand unpacked drops from a height of 1 m. If the device is
dropped, please service the device before taking it back into use.
Power connection
•
•
•
Always check that the power cord and plug are intact and undamaged.
•
Use only an intact and undamaged power cord. Replace the power cord if it is cracked,
frayed, broken or otherwise damaged.
•
•
•
•
All system devices must be connected to the same power supply circuit.
•
When detaching modules, be careful not to drop them. Always support with one hand
while pulling out with the other.
•
If the integrity of the external protective earth conductor arrangement is in doubt, use the
monitor with battery operation.
•
To avoid the risk of electric shock, this equipment must only be connected to a supply
mains with protective earth.
Do not use the power cord delivered with this product for any other product or purpose.
Use only hospital-grade grounded power outlets and power cord. Do not remove the
grounding pin from the power plug.
Do not apply tension to the power cord otherwise the cord may get damaged.
Do not use an additional multiple socket outlet, extension cord or adapters of any kind.
Before starting to use the system, ensure that the whole combination complies with the
international standard IEC 60601-1-1 and with the requirements of the local authorities.
Do not connect any external devices to the system other than those specified.
Installation
•
•
Do not incinerate a battery or store at high temperatures as it will explode.
•
Pins of connectors identified with the ESD warning symbol should not be touched.
Connections should not be made to these connectors unless ESD precautionary
procedures are used. For details, see section “1.2.2. ESD precautionary procedures.”
•
After transferring or reinstalling the monitor, always check that it is properly connected
and all parts are securely attached. Pay special attention to this in case of stacked
mounting.
The monitor or its components should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other
equipment. If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the monitor and its components
should be observed to verify normal operation in the configuration in which it will be
used.
9
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
•
•
Do not use the monitor in high electromagnetic fields (for example, during MRI.)
•
If you accidentally drop the monitor, modules or frames, have them checked by
authorized service personnel prior to clinical use.
•
•
•
To avoid explosion hazard, do not use the monitor in presence of flammable anesthetics.
A printer or computer must be supplied from an additional transformer providing at least
basic isolation (isolating or separating transformer).
Do not touch the patient, table, instruments, modules or the monitor during defibrillation.
Other transmitting radio devices using the same radio frequency band (Industrial
Scientific and Medical 2.45 GHz band) may degrade or disturb the wireless network
communication.
External connection
•
Do not connect any external devices to the monitor other than those specified.
Explosion hazard
•
To avoid explosion hazard do not use the monitor in the presence of flammable
anesthetics.
•
Do not incinerate a battery or store at high temperatures as it will explode.
Patient safety
•
Do not perform any testing or maintenance on the monitor while it is being used on a
patient.
•
PACEMAKER PATIENTS: The impedance respiration measurement may cause rate
changes in Minute Ventilation Rate Responsive Pacemakers. In this case, set the
pacemaker rate responsive mode off or turn the monitor impedance respiration
measurement off.
•
•
Never install the monitor so that it is above the patient.
•
Operation of the monitor outside the specified values may cause inaccurate results.
When using the monitor with mounting attached, make sure that the mounting is
manufacturer approved.
Autoclaving and sterilizing
•
Do not autoclave any part of the system with steam or sterilize with ethylene oxide.
Cleaning and service
•
Only trained personnel with proper tools and test equipment should perform the tests
and repairs described in this manual. Unauthorized service may void the monitor
warranty.
•
Always unplug the monitor before cleaning or service. After cleaning or service ensure
that every part of the monitor is dry before reconnecting it to the power supply.
•
Do not touch any exposed wire or conductive surface while any cover is removed and the
monitor is energized. The voltages present can cause injury or death.
•
Pins of connectors identified with the ESD warning symbol should not be touched.
Connections should not be made to these connectors unless ESD precautionary
procedures are used. For details, see section “1.2.2. ESD precautionary procedures”.
•
NOTE! The monitor is always internally powered when the batteries are connected.
10
Document no. M1187317-009
Introduction
•
Electrostatic discharge through the PC boards may damage the components. Before
handling PC boards, wear a grounded antistatic wristband. Handle all PC boards by their
non-conductive edges and use antistatic containers when transporting them.
•
•
Do not break or bypass the patient isolation barrier when testing PC boards.
•
Handle the water trap and its contents as you would any body fluid. Infectious hazard
may be present.
•
Do not immerse any part of the device in any liquid, or allow liquid to enter the monitor or
modules.
•
If liquid has accidentally entered the system or its parts, disconnect the power cord from
the power supply, remove the batteries from the monitor and have the equipment
serviced by authorized service personnel.
•
Since calibration gas contains anesthetic agents, always ensure sufficient ventilation of
the room during calibration.
Always perform an electrical safety check and a leakage current test on the monitor after
service.
Accessories
•
Use only accessories, including mounts, and batteries, and defibrillator-proof cables and
invasive pressure transducers approved by GE Healthcare. For a list of approved supplies
and accessories, see the “Supplies and Accessories” catalog. Other cables, batteries,
transducers and accessories may cause a safety hazard, damage the equipment or the
system, result in increased emissions or decreased immunity of the equipment or system
or interfere with the measurement. (Protection against cardiac defibrillator discharge is
due in part to the accessories for pulse oximetry (SpO2), temperature (T) and invasive
pressure (P) measurement.)
•
Single-use products are not designed to be reused. Reuse may cause a risk of
cross-contamination, affect the measurement accuracy and/or system performance, or
cause a malfunction as a result of the product being physically damaged due to cleaning,
disinfection, re-sterilization and/or reuse.
Special components
Special components are used in these monitors that are vital to assure reliability and safety. GE
Healthcare assumes no responsibility for damage, if replacement components not approved
by GE Healthcare are used.
Batteries
The Lithium Ion batteries are recyclable. Follow your local recycling guidelines.
Refresh the batteries completely every six months.
To replace the batteries safely, please refer to the service instructions in this manual.
•
Do not short-circuit the battery terminals, this may produce a very high current, which will
damage the battery.
•
Do not dispose of the battery into open flame, nor put the battery near fire, as it may
explode.
•
•
Do not dismantle the battery.
After replacing a battery, always make sure to close the battery compartment by sliding
the lid back to the right until it clicks.
See also section “Symbols”.
11
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Storage and transport
Do not store or transport the monitor outside the specified temperature, pressure and humidity
ranges:
Temperature
Atmospheric pressure
Relative humidity
-20...+60 °C/-4...140 °F
670...1060 hPa/500...800 mmHg/670...1060 mbar
10...90% noncondensing
Disposal
•
Dispose of the whole device, parts of it and its packing material and manuals in
accordance with local environmental and waste disposal regulations.
•
Dispose the calibration gas container in accordance with local environmental and waste
disposal regulations.
Cautions
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a condition that may lead to equipment damage or
malfunction.
Installation
•
•
Leave space for air circulation to prevent the monitor from overheating.
•
Turn off the power before making any rear panel connections.
Before connecting the power cord to the power supply, check that the local voltage and
frequency correspond with the rating stated on the device plate.
Before use
•
Allow two minutes for warm-up and note any error messages or deviations from normal
operation.
Fuse replacement
Replace a fuse only with one of the same type and rating.
Cleaning and service
•
Do not use hypochlorite-, acetone-, phenol- or ammonia -based cleaners, abrasive
material or harsh chemicals as they may damage the surfaces of the device.
•
Do not use abrasive cleaning compounds, instruments, brushes or rough-surface
materials.
•
Do not apply pressurized air to any outlet or tubing connected to the monitor.
Special components
•
Lithium battery on the CPU board. Dispose of the battery in accordance with local
environmental and waste disposal regulations.
12
Document no. M1187317-009
Introduction
1.2.2 ESD precautionary procedures
•
To avoid electrostatic charges building up, it is recommended to store, maintain and use
the equipment at a relative humidity of 30% or greater. Floors should be covered by ESD
dissipative carpets or similar. Non-synthetic clothing should be used when working with
the component.
•
To prevent applying a possible electrostatic discharge to the ESD sensitive parts of the
equipment, one should touch the metallic frame of the component or a large metal object
located close to the equipment. When working with the equipment and specifically when
the ESD sensitive parts of the equipment may be touched, a grounded antistatic
wristband intended for use with ESD sensitive equipment should be worn. Refer to the
documentation provided with the wristbands for details of proper use.
ESD precautionary procedure training
It is recommended that all potential users receive an explanation of the ESD warning symbol
and training in ESD precautionary procedures.
The minimum contents of an ESD precautionary procedure training should include an
introduction to the physics of electrostatic charge, the voltage levels that can occur in normal
practice and the damage that can be done to electronic components if they are touched by an
operator who is electrostatically charged. Further, an explanation should be given of methods
to prevent build-up of electrostatic charge and how and why to discharge one’s body to earth
or to the frame of the equipment or bond oneself by means of a wristband to the equipment or
the earth prior to making a connection.
13
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
2
System description
2.1 Introduction
Datex-Ohmeda monitors build up a freely configurable modular system. The architecture is
designed to enable different module combinations so that the user is able to get the desirable
parameter and feature set. This modular approach makes it possible to add new features
when they are needed.
2.2 Bus structure
The operation of Datex-Ohmeda FM is based on two communication channels, the CPU bus
and module bus. All units, including the modules, receive power from the same power supply,
which is an integral part of the monitor frame.
Patient
Modules
MODULE-BUS
PCMCIA
Serial
Ethernet
Sound
UPI
Code
Memory
Chipset
DRAM
Display
Controller
486 LOCAL BUS
NonVolatile
Memory
Reset
Logic
Figure 2
Boot
Memory
486
Processor
Fm_p1_gnrl_bus_strctr_cm.vsd
ISA-BUS
General bus structure of S/5 FM
The CPU bus is a communication channel used only for internal data transfer. It is based on the
ISA bus used in IBM PC computers. Data is transferred on this 16 bit wide bus using the CPU
clock frequency.
The module bus is for the parameter modules. The bus is based on the industry standard
RS-485, which uses a differential serial method to transfer data. This type of bus is robust and it
allows parameter modules to be inserted or removed while the power is on. The module bus
uses a 500 kbps data transfer rate.
14
Document no. M1187317-009
System description
The RS-485 type of serial communication supports so-called multidrop or party line
connections. This means that all parameter modules connected to the module bus use exactly
the same lines for communication. The advantage of this is that all bus connectors are
identical and the modules can be connected in any order and position.
2.3 Distributed processing
A system assembled from Datex-Ohmeda products is a multiprocessor system. All parameter
modules have their own microprocessor, which performs functions such as module key
control, waveform filtering, parameter related computing and pneumatic control, etc. At the
same time the main CPU performs higher level tasks such as trending and alarm control. While
the parameter modules and CPU are performing their tasks, the UPI (Universal Peripheral
Interface) microprocessor handles all functions needed to transfer data between the
parameter modules and the CPU.
This kind of parallel processing gives one major advantage to centralized processing. When
new parameter modules are added to the system, the processing power is increased. As a
result, the system does not slow down when new features are added.
2.4 Module communication
The communication master controlling data transfers between the CPU and parameter
modules is called UPI processor. It sends data to each connected module 100 times a second.
Modules respond to each data request immediately by sending a data package, whose length
depends on the type of the module. This communication protocol ensures that each module
receives and sends data every 10 ms. If a module does not respond to data requests, the UPI
processor presumes that the module is disconnected.
Parameter modules may hold a static (fixed) or dynamic address, which the UPI processor uses
when sending out data. Two parameter modules of the same type must not be fitted onto the
same monitor since they might reply to a data request simultaneously, thus causing
communication errors.
Temp
Meas
ISA-BUS
Shared
SRAM
Control
Logic
Analog & Digital outputs
UPI
Processor
Module Bus
ComWheel Interface
Keypad Interface
Figure 3
cam_p1_prncpl_UPI_operation.vsd
Voltage
Meas
Principle of UPI section operation
15
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
The UPI processor collects and stores all data that is received from the parameter modules into
a shared SRAM, which is mapped directly to the address space of the main CPU. The main CPU
reads data from the memory while the UPI processor guarantees that the data is up to date.
This operation also works in the other direction. In this the main CPU fills the shared SRAM with
data and the UPI processor distributes it to the parameter modules.
2.5 Software loading
The program memory on the CPU board is loaded with monitor software at the factory. The
software is used for running all the functions that are integrated into the PC board.
F-FM(W)-00
For service and upgrade procedures, the software loading is done by using a PCMCIA card or
the SWDL Tool.
F-FM(W)-01
For service and upgrade procedures, the software loading is done by using the SWDL Tool only.
16
Document no. M1187317-009
System description
2.6 Parameter modules
CPU
RAM
EEPROM
Peripheral
drivers
Figure 4
Opto
isolation
+13...16 V
VMOD
Data
RS485
drivers
General structure of parameter modules with patient isolation
general_struct_of_parm_mod.vsd
A/D
converter
Isolation
transformer
Module Bus
Analog
electronics
+5 V
+12 V
Patient isolation
PATIENT
Module
keys
The detailed structure of a parameter module depends on the specific needs for each
individual parameter. However, some common parts are used in the parameter modules. The
electronics inside the module is usually divided into isolated (floating) and non-isolated
sections. Typically, the non-isolated section consists of buffers to interface the parameter
module to the module bus while the rest of the electronics is located in the isolated section. The
isolated section includes the microcontroller together with memory components, the front-end
analog electronics (amplifiers, etc.) and sensor drivers.
17
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
3
System installation
3.1 Unpacking instructions
1.
Confirm that the packing box is undamaged. If the box is damaged, contact the shipper.
2.
Open the top of the box and carefully unpack all components.
3.
Confirm that all components are undamaged. If any of the components is damaged,
contact the shipper.
4.
Confirm that all components are included. If any of the components is missing, contact
your GE Healthcare distributor.
3.2 Choosing location
Consider the following aspects:
•
•
•
•
•
WARNING
CAUTION
lighting
space
connections
electromagnetic and radio frequency interference. For details see Appendix B.
ElectroMagnetic Compatibility
environment
The monitor or its components should not be used adjacent to or stacked
with other equipment. If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the monitor
and its components should be observed to verify normal operation in the
configuration in which it will be used.
The monitor display is fragile. Ensure that it is not placed near a heat source or
exposed to mechanical shocks, pressure, moisture or direct sunlight.
3.3 Mounting the S/5 FM
Mounting of S/5 FM to the Wall Mount, Rollstand, Wall Mount with standard arm or Counter Top
Mount is described in a separate instruction sheet delivered with each mount.
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
After transferring or reinstalling the monitor, always check that it is
properly connected and all parts are securely attached. Pay special
attention to this in case of stacked mounting.
The monitor must not be used without a manufacturer approved mounting
attached.
Never install the monitor so that it is above the patient.
3.3.1 E-PSM(P) Mounting Accessories
Intended use
The Module Bus Adapter for PSM is intended for connecting the Pole Mount for PSM to the
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM monitor.
With Module Bus Adapter, the Pole Mount for PSM, short or long, can be connected to the
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM monitor. The E-PSM(P) module can be removed from the FM monitor
and docked to the Pole Mount for PSM, short or long.
18
Document no. M1187317-009
System installation
1
2
3
Figure 5
WARNING
E-PSM(P) mounting accessories
1.
M1051025 Module Bus Adapter for PSM
2.
M1049197 Pole Mount for PSM, short
3.
M1051023 Pole Mount for PSM, long
Make sure that the Pole Mount for PSM is always used in vertical position to
prevent water from entering the E-PSM(P) module.
Pole Mount for PSM – Instructions for connecting to an IV pole, vertical
position
Fasten the Pole Mount for PSM
with the fastening screw of the
clamp and tighten properly to an
IV pole.
Pole Mount for PSM - Instructions for installing in horizontal position.
Remove the 2 screws from the clamp, turn the clamp and insert and tighten the screws back.
Fasten the Pole Mount for PSM with the fastening screw of the clamp and tighten properly to a
horizontal tube or rail with a diameter of 10 mm*25 mm.
Pole mount for PSM – Instructions for connecting to monitor
1. Attach the E-PSM(P) module to the Pole Mount.
2. Connect the cable of the Pole Mount for PSM to the S/5 FM
monitor with the Module Bus adapter for PSM
(M1031025).
3. Check the module communication of the E-PSM(P)
module.
19
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
3.3.2 Monitor connections
2
1
3
4
5
14
13
6
12
10
11
Figure 6
(1)
9
8
7
S/5 FM front panel
Battery compartment
(2)
Transportation handle
(3)
Alarm light
(4)
Alarm LED indicators
(5)
Side panel keys
(6)
The ComWheel
(7)
Command Board keys
(8)
Guide rail for GCX mounting
(9)
Mains power and battery LEDs
(10) ON/standby key
(11) Connector for the Device Interfacing Solution (X6)
(12) Connector for defibrillator synchronization (X5)
(13) Measurement modules
(14) Slot for Data Card or Menu Card
You can use one E-PSM(P) and/or one N-F(C)(REC) module in the monitor at a time.
20
Document no. M1187317-009
System installation
1
12
4
5
2
13
10
14
8
Figure 7
7
6
3
Rear panel connections
(1)
Slot for infusion pole mounting
(2)
Module connector
(3)
Guide rail for GCX mounting
(4)
Receptacle for power cord
(5)
Fuse holder
(6)
Serial port X9
(7)
Network ID X8
(8)
Connector for K-CREMCO X7
(9)
Optional: Multi I/O adapter incorporating connectors 6 - 8 mentioned above
(10) Network connector X1
(11) Equipotential connector
(12) Slot for Data Card or Menu Card
(13) Defibrillator & IABP sync connector X5
(14) Connector for the Device Interfacing Solution (X6)
21
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
3.3.3 Connection to mains
Connect the power cord to the mains power inlet (4) at the back of the monitor and to the wall
socket.
NOTE: Before taking the monitor into use for the first time, the batteries should be fully charged.
Keep the monitor connected to the mains until the Battery charging symbol disappears, or in
STBY mode the Orange Battery condition LED is off (may take up to 5 hours if the batteries are
fully discharged).
B
WARNING
Battery charging
The power cord may only be connected to a three-wire, grounded, hospital
grade receptacle.
3.3.4 Connection to Network
Use the Monitor-Network cable to connect the monitor to the network.
1.
Make sure that the power is switched off.
2.
Connect the Identification Plug and one RJ-45 connector to the connectors X8 and X1 at
the back of the monitor.
3.
Connect the other RJ-45 connector to the corresponding connector on the wallbox.
4.
Switch on the power. Confirm that the network connection is indicated in the upper
part of the screen.
3.3.5 Connection to Wireless Network
Wireless LAN is available only with S/5 FM Wireless LAN option F-FMW.
1.
Disconnect the network cable.
2.
The monitor will automatically connect to the Wireless LAN.
3.
Confirm that the wireless LAN network symbol and the wireless LAN signal strength
symbol are displayed in the upper part of the screen.
NOTE: The WLAN configuration in the monitor has to be set to correspond to the hospital
WLAN.
22
Document no. M1187317-009
System installation
3.3.6 Inserting and removing the parameter modules
1
WARNING
2
3
1.
Align the module with the insertion guides
2.
Push the module into the monitor frame until it stops.
3.
Pull the module outwards. Make sure not to drop it when it comes out.
When detaching modules, be careful not to drop them. Always support with
one hand while pulling out with the other.
NOTE: Only one E-PSM(P) module and one N-F(C)(REC) module can be attached to S/5 FM.
NOTE: If you want to install both modules, you must install the FM Extension Module,
(N-F(C)(REC) first and attach the E-PSM(P) module to it.
3.3.7 Downloading Monitor Software F-FM(W)-00
The following instructions apply to downloading of new monitor software in case of upgrade or
service. Detailed instructions for downloading software are supplied with software PCMCIA
cards.
NOTE: All user settings will be lost after downloading of new monitor software.
NOTE: During the downloading of software, the serial number of the monitor is written on the
software card. The software can then be downloaded again to the same monitor, but not to
any other monitor.
1.
Make sure the monitor is switched to standby.
.
21
2.
30
sec
Open the cover for card drive slot. Insert the software card into the card drive slot and
press the software card firmly into its place.
23
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
3.
Switch the monitor on.
4.
Wait for approximately 80 seconds. After the normal screen appears, enter the service
menu and make sure that the information regarding monitor software has been updated.
Memorize the serial number of new software.
52
80
sec
5.
Remove the software card.
6.
Replace the original device plate for monitor software by the new one supplied with the
software card.
7.
Perform Factory Reset. Make sure that the monitor functions normally after the restart.
8.
Set the time and date (Monitor Setup - Time And Date).
9.
Set the monitor’s network communication according to the used network software, if
necessary.
The communication is set in the monitor’s Network service menu:
Monitor Setup - Install/Service (password 16-4-34) - Service (password 26-23-8) - Frame –
Network
Network software S-CNET01 -> DRI Level = 2001
Network software S-CNET02 -> DRI Level = 2001 or 2002 (WLAN)
Network software L-NET03 -> DRI Level = 2003
Network software L-NET05 -> DRI Level = 2003
NOTE: If the DRI level is changed, the monitor will restart automatically.
10.
Fill out all necessary documentation regarding the new monitor software.
NOTE: The license agreement of monitor software needs to be in accordance with the monitor
software serial number. Make sure you archive the license agreement in a secure location.
NOTE: The first start-up after software loading takes considerably longer.
3.3.8 Downloading Monitor Software, F-FM(W)-01
See “Software Download Tool - User Instructions.”
Software Download Tool, L-SWDL, is the only way to download/replace software on
F-FM(W)-01 frame by a field engineer. SWDL is a service tool that enables the installation of
monitor service software from personal computer into legacy Datex-Ohmeda patient monitor.
24
Document no. M1187317-009
System installation
3.3.9 Performing Factory Reset
NOTE: The Factory Reset is necessary after downloading of monitor software and after
replacing the CPU board or SRAM/Timekeeper battery.
NOTE: The Factory Reset will restore all your customized defaults, including language selection,
to factory defaults.
1.
Press the Monitor Setup key.
2.
Select Install/Service and password (16-4-34).
3.
Select Service and password (26-23-8).
4.
Select Set/Test and perform Factory Reset.
5.
The monitor will perform an automatic restart. After the restart is completed, restart the
monitor also manually by the On/Standby switch.
3.3.10 Installing the Datex-Ohmeda Wireless Network Upgrade, U-FMW (F-FM-00)
The following instructions apply to upgrading the monitor with the Wireless Network Upgrade.
Detailed upgrade instructions are supplied with the corresponding product.
NOTE: You can download the option software only to one monitor. During the downloading of
the option software, the serial number of the monitor is written on the software card, and if the
downloading for some reason would fail, the software can be downloaded again.
1.
Make sure that the monitor is switched to STANDBY.
2.
Open the cover for the card drive slot (on the left side of the monitor). Insert the option
software card into the card drive slot and press the software card firmly in position.
3.
Switch the monitor ON.
4.
Wait until the normal screen appears and check that the message 'Field upgrade OK' is
displayed as a note of successful upgrade.
5.
Remove the option software card.
6.
Switch the monitor to STANDBY.
7.
Disassemble the monitor in order to access the second PC card drive slot on the monitor
CPU board.
NOTE: Follow instructions in the S/5 Frame for FM slot for disassembling the monitor.
8.
Insert the WLAN interface card into the PC card drive slot.
9.
Connect the WLAN antennas to the handle guide.
25
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
10.
Connect the WLAN antennas to the WLAN interface card. Secure the antennas to the PC
card drive slot with the holder included in the upgrade kit.
11.
Reassemble the monitor.
NOTE: When reassembling the monitor make sure that the tips of the WLAN halfwave antennas
do not get pinched between the monitor covers.
12.
Switch the monitor ON.
13.
Enter the service menu and make sure that the option software was downloaded
successfully (Monitor Setup –Install/Service (16-4-34) – Service (26-23-8) – Frame):
Options = ”WLAN”
14.
Enter the WLAN Configuration service menu (Monitor Setup –Install/Service (16-4-34) –
Service (26-23-8) – Frame - Network – WLAN – WLAN Config).
Enter the appropriate Network ID, WEP Algorithm, Key ID and Encryption Key using the
corresponding menu selections.
For selecting allowed communication channels, enter the appropriate Channel Mask
using the corresponding menu selection.
See Appendix C. Channel Mask Selections for S/5 FM.
Save the monitor’s wireless LAN configuration by selecting Save Configuration - Save.
NOTE: The settings must match up with the ones that are defined in the Access Point
configuration. Refer to the related site configuration documentation for correct settings, if
necessary.
15.
Attach the RLAN card sticker above the device plate at the monitor rear panel.
If the monitor is located in Czech Rebublic, Hong Kong, Poland, Singapore, Taiwan, South
Africa or South Korea, attach also the corresponding country sticker (delivered with the
WLAN interface card) to the place that is indicated with a dashed line on the RLAN card
sticker.
26
Document no. M1187317-009
System installation
16.
Enter the Network Status service menu (Monitor Setup –Install/Service (16-4-34) –
Service (26-23-8) – Frame - Network – Network Status).
Check that the Virtual ID sticker that is supplied with the Wireless Network upgrade,
U-FMW corresponds with the Location ID that is displayed in the menu.
NOTE: The Location ID is the monitor’s ID on the Datex-Ohmeda Network and cannot be
changed.
17.
Attach the Virtual ID sticker above the RLAN card sticker at the monitor rear panel.
18.
Configure the monitor’s Location ID in the S/5 Central Network setup.
NOTE: Refer to the Datex-Ohmeda S/5 Central, ViewStation and Network Technical Reference
Manual for information about the configuration, if necessary.
19.
Check that the monitor connects to the Datex-Ohmeda Wireless Network:
- the wireless LAN network symbol is displayed on the monitor screen
- the S/5 Central is listed in the monitor’s Network Status service menu
- monitor data can be displayed on the S/5 Central
Wireless LAN network symbol on the S/5 FM monitor
20.
Fill out all necessary documentation regarding the upgrade.
3.3.11 Installing the Datex-Ohmeda Wireless Network Service Option, N-FMWS
(F-FM-00)
The following instructions apply to upgrading the monitor with the Wireless Network Service
Option. Detailed upgrade instructions are supplied with the corresponding product.
NOTE: You can download the option software only to one monitor. During the downloading of
the option software, the serial number of the monitor is written on the software card, and if the
downloading for some reason would fail, the software can be downloaded again.
1.
Make sure that the monitor is switched to STANDBY.
2.
Open the cover for the card drive slot (on the left side of the monitor). Insert the option
software card into the card drive slot and press the software card firmly in position.
3.
Switch the monitor ON.
4.
Wait until the normal screen appears and check that a message 'Field upgrade OK' is
displayed as a note of successful upgrade.
5.
Remove the option software card.
6.
Enter the service menu and make sure that the option software was downloaded
successfully (Monitor Setup –Install/Service (16-4-34) – Service (26-23-8) – Frame):
Options = ”WLAN”
7.
Enter the WLAN Configuration service menu (Monitor Setup –Install/Service (16-4-34) –
Service (26-23-8) – Frame - Network – WLAN – WLAN Config).
Enter the appropriate Network ID, WEP Algorithm, Key ID and Encryption Key using the
corresponding menu selections.
For selecting allowed communication channels, enter the appropriate Channel Mask
using the corresponding menu selection.
27
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
See Appendix C. Channel Mask Selections for S/5 FM.
Save the monitor’s wireless LAN configuration by selecting Save Configuration - Save.
NOTE: The settings must match up with the ones that are defined in the Access Point
configuration. Refer to the related site configuration documentation for correct settings, if
necessary.
8.
Enter the Network Status service menu (Monitor Setup –Install/Service (16-4-34) –
Service (26-23-8) – Frame - Network – Network Status).
Check that the Virtual ID -sticker that is supplied with the Wireless Network upgrade,
U-FMW corresponds with the Location ID that is displayed in the menu.
NOTE: The Location ID is the monitor’s ID on the Datex-Ohmeda Network and cannot be
changed.
9.
Attach the Virtual ID sticker above the RLAN card sticker at the monitor rear panel.
10.
Configure the monitor’s Location ID in the S/5 Central Network setup.
NOTE: Refer to the Datex-Ohmeda S/5 Central, ViewStation and Network Technical Reference
Manual for information about the configuration, if necessary.
11.
Check that the monitor connects to the Datex-Ohmeda Wireless Network:
- the wireless LAN network symbol is displayed on the monitor screen
- the S/5 Central is listed in the monitor’s Network Status service menu
- monitor data can be displayed on the S/5 Central
12.
Fill out all necessary documentation regarding the upgrade.
Wireless LAN network symbol on the S/5 FM monitor
3.3.12 Installing the S/5 Wireless Network Upgrade, U-FMW-01
The following instructions apply to upgrading the monitor with the Wireless Network Upgrade.
Detailed upgrade instructions are supplied with the corresponding product.
1.
Perform main software upload to the monitor using Software Download Tool.
NOTE: Follow Software Download Tool User Instructions, if necessary.

When generating the license key use N-FMW as an option.

Use the Virtual ID number that is supplied with the Wireless Network Upgrade,
U-FMW-01 package to avoid ID conflict in the network.
28
Document no. M1187317-009
System installation

After the patient monitor has restarted for the first time after monitor software
reinstallation, perform a factory reset to the patient monitor.
2.
Enter the service menu and make sure that the WLAN option was activated successfully
(Monitor Setup -Install/Service (16-4-34) - Service (26-23-8) - Frame):
Options = "WLAN"
3.
Switch the monitor to STANDBY.
4.
Disassemble the monitor in order to access the Compact Flash card drive slot on the
monitor CPU board.
NOTE: Follow instructions in the S/5 Frame for FM slot for disassembling the monitor, if
necessary.
5.
Insert the WLAN interface card into the Compact Flash card drive slot.
6.
Connect the WLAN antennas to the handle guide.
7.
Connect the WLAN antennas to the WLAN interface card. Secure the antennas to the
Compact Flash card drive slot with the holder included in the upgrade kit.
8.
Reassemble the monitor.
NOTE: When reassembling the monitor make sure that the tips of the WLAN halfwave antennas
do not pinch between the monitor covers.
9.
Switch the monitor ON.
29
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
10.
Enter the WLAN Configuration service menu (Monitor Setup -Install/Service (16-4-34) Service (26-23-8) - Frame - Network - WLAN - WLAN Config).
Enter the appropriate Network ID, WEP Algorithm, Key ID and Encryption Key using the
corresponding menu selections.
For selecting allowed communication channels, enter the appropriate Channel Mask
using the corresponding menu selection. See Appendix C. Channel Mask Selections for S/5
FM.
Save the monitor's wireless LAN configuration by selecting Save Configuration - Save.
NOTE: The settings must match up with the ones that are defined in the Access Point
configuration. Refer to the related site configuration documentation for correct settings, if
necessary.
11.
Attach the RLAN card sticker above the device plate at the monitor rear panel.
If the monitor is located in Czech Rebublic, Hong Kong, Poland, Singapore, Taiwan, South
Africa or South Korea, attach also the corresponding country sticker (delivered with the
upgrade package) to the place that is indicated with a dashed line on the RLAN card
sticker.
12.
Enter the Network Status service menu (Monitor Setup -Install/Service (16-4-34) Service (26-23-8) - Frame - Network - Network Status).
Check that the Virtual ID -sticker that is supplied with the Wireless Network upgrade,
U-FMW corresponds with the Location ID that is displayed in the menu.
NOTE: The Location ID is the monitor's ID on the S/5 Network and cannot be changed.
13.
Attach the Virtual ID -sticker above the RLAN card sticker at the monitor rear panel.
14.
Configure the monitor's Location ID in the S/5 Central Network setup.
NOTE: Refer to the Datex-Ohmeda S/5 Central, ViewStation and Network Technical Reference
Manual for information about the configuration, if necessary.
15.
Check that the monitor connects onto the S/5 Network wireless:

the wireless LAN network symbol is displayed on the monitor screen

the S/5 Central is listed in the monitor's Network Status service menu

monitor data can be displayed on the S/5 Central
Wireless LAN network symbol on the S/5 FM monitor
16.
Fill out all necessary documentation regarding the upgrade.
30
Document no. M1187317-009
System installation
3.4 Remote Controller, K-CREMCO
To connect a Remote Controller, K-CREMCO to S/5 FM plug the connector to the 5-pin DIN
connector X7 in Multi I/O adapter at the back of the monitor.
3.5 Visual indicators
Function
External power supply
Specification
Green LED
Battery operation
Green LED
Battery condition
Orange LED
Alarm LEDs
Red LED
Yellow LED
Alarm Light
Highly visible Red/
Yellow light
Explanation
Indicates when monitor is powered from
mains or ext. DC (External DC power for
future use)
Indicates when monitor is powered from
internal batteries
Indicates when monitor is charging
batteries (solid) or battery failure, one or
both batteries missing (flashing).
Indicates a life threatening situation
Indicates serious but not life threatening
problems
Ease alarm detection from distance.
Brightness of the light and enabling the
alarm light function are user configurable.
3.6 Troubleshooting
If a problem occurs during the functional examination, check the components of the monitor
according to the following troubleshooting chart. If the problem persists, please refer to the
part II.
Problem
What to do
Nothing functions
Unplug and re-plug Remote Controller Cable. Also confirm that the cable is intact.
Unplug and re-plug the Power Cord. Also confirm that the cable is intact.
Confirm that the fuses are intact.
E-PSM(P) module does
not function
Remove and replace the module.
N-F(C)(REC) module does
not function
Confirm that ‘Occlusion’ or ‘Calibrating Gas Sensor’ messages are not displayed.
Confirm that the desired parameters are configured to be displayed.
Confirm that a D-fend water trap and a sample tube are attached.
Confirm that the desired parameters are configured to be displayed.
Remove and replace the module.
31
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
4
Interfacing
External devices can be interfaced with the S/5 FM via the monitor's serial port and via the
Device Interfacing Solution, N-DISxxx.
Printers and computers can be interfaced via the monitor’s serial port.
Device specific N-DISxxx modules can be used with:
•
•
Monitors
Blood-gas analyzers
NOTE: The Device Interfacing Solution, N-DISxxx that is used on the S/5 FM must be of revision
01 or later.
4.1 Interfacing external bedside devices via Device
Interfacing Solutions, N-DISxxx
The Device Interfacing Solution, N-DISxxx provides means for transferring physiological,
waveform and event data from various bedside patient care devices to the Datex-Ohmeda
monitoring system. The real-time and trended data can be displayed on the monitor screen
and used for record keeping purposes. The interfacing module reads the data coming from the
external device, converts it to a suitable format and sends it to the monitor.
See the following table of DIS modules and devices that you can interface with the Device
Interfacing Solution.
Table 4
DIS modules and interfaced devices
Device Monitors
N-DISOXIM3
Oximetrix 31
N-DISQVUE
QVue /Q21
N-DISVIGIL
Baxter-Vigilance2
1
2
Trademark of Hospira Inc. (previously trademark of Abbott Laboratories)
Trademark of Edwards Lifesciences Corporation
Device Blood gas analyzers
N-DISOPT
1
Osmetech Opti CCA1
Trademark of Osmetech plc
For specific information on parameters transferred from the interfaced device to the
Datex-Ohmeda monitor and the applicable software versions of the device refer to the
Installation guide accompanying each DIS module.
32
Document no. M1187317-009
Interfacing
4.1.1 Device Interfacing Solution components
The Device Interfacing Solution consists of:

a device specific interfacing module

a device specific cable

a bus cable

a connector for another bus cable

label specifying the external device
4.1.2 Connections
Connect the device specific cable to the external device and the bus cable to the monitor's DIS
connector or to another interfacing module.
Figure 8
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
(1)
label specifying the external device
(2)
LED indicators
(3)
black bus cable from another
interfacing module, if needed
(4)
gray device specific cable to the
communication port of the external
device
(5)
black bus cable to the monitor’s DIS
connector (or to another interfacing
module)
Connection cables and LED indicators
The monitor, interfacing modules and interfaced devices must be situated
in the same patient environment (as defined in IEC 60601-1-1).
Connecting electrical equipment together or using the same extension cord
for more than one device may cause their leakage currents to exceed the
limits specified in relevant safety standards. Always make sure that the
combination complies with the international safety standard IEC 60601-1-1
for medical electrical systems and with the requirements of local
authorities.
The manufacturer guarantees a reliable functioning of the devices with
tested software versions only. Always refer to the Installation guide
accompanying the DIS module and verify the compatibility before use.
33
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
4.1.3 Mounting
The DIS module can be mounted on the side panel of the external device. Also IV pole
placement is possible.
NOTE: As the Device Interfacing Solution works only with the device specified in the label of the
interfacing module, it is recommended that the interfacing module always travels along with
the external device.
For mounting accessories, please refer to the “Supplies and Accessories” catalog. See the
following figure for an example of a device interfacing.
1
3
2
2
4
Figure 9
An example of interfacing external devices with Device Interfacing
Solution
(1)
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
(2)
Interfacing module
(3)
Monitor
(4)
Blood gas analyzer
NOTE: Only N-DISxxx version 01 or later is compatible with the S/5 FM.
NOTE: You can connect up to four (4) interfacing modules to one system simultaneously.
Check the maximum number of modules: one meter cable = max. four ten modules, three
meter cable = max. three modules, six meter cable = one module.
WARNING
WARNING
Make sure that the interfacing module is always used in vertical position to
prevent water from entering the module.
Make sure that you are connecting the interfacing module to the device
specified in the label. Always verify the compatibility of the software
versions before use.
4.1.4 Selecting the external device
1.
Turn off the monitor.
2.
Turn off the external device.
3.
Connect the interfacing module to the monitor’s connector for N-DIS or to another
interfacing module.
4.
Connect the device specific cable to the external device and turn the external device on.
5.
Turn the monitor on. The monitor identifies the connected device automatically.
34
Document no. M1187317-009
Interfacing
4.1.5 Functional check
There are two ways to check the function of the Device Interfacing Solution:
1.
Press the Monitor Setup key.
2.
Select Interfacing and open the Status Page menu. The status page shows you the
current communication status of the interfacing module (1 - 4).
NOTE: The status message ‘Connected’ appears on the Status Page after you have connected
the external device to the interfacing module and turned it on. Note also that the monitor and
the interfacing module must be operational.
•
Check the LED indicators on the interfacing module (the green LED indicates physical
connections, the yellow LED software selections)
:
GREEN
YELLOW
INDICATION
lit
dark
Physical connections between the monitor, interfacing
module and external device are in order and the device has
been selected in the menu.
dark
lit
There is something wrong with the physical connections
between the monitor, interfacing module and external
device. The external device has not been selected in the
menu.
lit
lit
Physical connections between the monitor, interfacing
module and external device are in order but the external
device has not been selected in the menu.
dark
dark
The interfacing module is not connected to the monitor.
4.1.6 Selecting the parameter data source
Select the external device via Monitor Setup - Interfacing menu:
•
•
Select the desired measurement parameter (e.g., SvO2).
Select the desired source by name (e.g., Oxim3).
NOTE: The name of the device is visible on the list only if the device is correctly connected.
NOTE: Detailed information about interfacing module related mountings, connections and
settings is included in the installation guides that are delivered with the interfacing modules.
35
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
4.2 Interfacing printer
It is possible to interface a laser printer (serial or parallel) with the S/5 FM via the monitors’ serial
port. The printer should be PCL5 compatible and should contain at least 2 MB of memory.
Parallel printers require the use of Serial-to-Parallel Converter, order code 78030, model PI
130-R2.
WARNING
WARNING
Always make sure that the combination complies with the international
safety standard IEC 60601-1-1 for medical electrical systems and with the
requirements of local authorities.
Connecting the power supply cord of the printer to the wall power outlet
may cause the printer leakage current to exceed the limit specified for
medical equipment. A printer must be supplied from an additional
transformer providing at least basic isolation (isolating or separating
transformer).
4.2.1 Setting S/5 FM interface for printers
1.
Press the Print/Record key.
2.
Select Printer Connection.
3.
Select Serial.
4.
Press the Normal Screen key.
4.2.2 Connection to serial printers
A serial printer is connected to the serial port connector X9 in the Multi I/O adapter at the back
of the frame unit.
Contact your authorized GE Healthcare distributor for advice on suitable serial printers.
4.2.3 Connection to parallel printers
A parallel printer is connected to the serial interface port connector X9 on the frame unit via the
Serial-to-Parallel Converter, order code 78030, model PI130-R2.
Contact your authorized GE Healthcare distributor for advice on suitable parallel printers.
4.2.4 Installing the Serial-to-Parallel Converter
Order code 78030, model PI130-R2
A common serial modem cable, gender changer and parallel printer cable are required when
connecting the serial to parallel converter between the monitor and a parallel printer. The
converter gets power from the connected devices.
1.
Make sure that power is switched off on both devices.
2.
Connect a standard PC-to-parallel-printer cable (order code 713701) to the parallel
printer.
36
Document no. M1187317-009
Interfacing
3.
Check the DIP-switch settings on the converter (order code 78030, model PI130-R2):
Position
1
Flow Control:
hardware
3
2
4
5
8
ON
Parity/D, Bits/S, Bit:
None/8/1
OFF OFF OFF
D.Rate (kbps):
115,2
OFF ON OFF
Connect a DB25 female-to-female gender changer (order code 78032) between the
printer cable and converter.
DB9F end
plugs into FM
DB25M end
plugs into
gender changer
DB25M end
plugs into
gender changer
Gender changer
plugs into
converter
Standard Async.Modem Cable
Figure 10
Centronics
end plugs
into printer
Gender changer
Serial to Parallel
Converter
5.
7
OFF
LED: Enabled
4.
6
Standard Parallel Printer
plugs into FM
Connecting S/5 FM monitor to printer, converter model PI130-R2
Connect a common RS-232 modem cable’s (order code 78031) DB9 connector to the
serial port connector X9 on the monitor, and the DB25 connector to the converter.
The new Serial to Parallel Converter, PI1115A, is not compatible with the FM monitor.
4.2.5 Connection to printer
Setting the printing parameters
Refer to the documentation provided with the printer.
4.3 Interfacing computer
A computer is connected to the serial port connector on the Multi I/O connector.
Contact your authorized GE Healthcare distributor for further advice on computer interface.
WARNING
WARNING
Always make sure that the combination complies with the international
safety standard IEC 60601-1-1 for medical electrical systems and with the
requirements of local authorities.
Connecting the power supply cord of the computer to the wall power outlet
may cause the computer leakage current to exceed the limit specified for
medical equipment. A computer must be supplied from an additional
transformer providing at least basic isolation (isolating or separating
transformer).
37
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
4.4 Output signals
Analog/digital output signals on the connectors X5 and X8 can be used for interface with other
devices. The pin assignments are illustrated in tables/pictures below.
Table 5
NET ID connector, X8 on Multi I/O adapter
9 pin female D-connector
5
1
9
6
Table 6
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NET_ID_CS (chip delect)
NET_ID_CLK (clock)
NET_ID_DO (data out)
NET_ID_DI (data in)
GND
+5V_out
GND
Nurse call
GND
Defib & IABP sync connector, X5
Mini DIN7 connector
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
Defib_sync_out
Reserved
Analog GND
5
6
7
8
Digital GND
Reserved
Pressure_out
Direct_ECG_out
4.4.1 Digital outputs
The digital output signals are as follows:
Defibrillation Sync (X5 pin 1)
Defibrillation Sync indication is generated by ECG. When active, the signal is state 1. After 10
ms the signal is reset to state 0. New Defibrillation Sync is not generated before the indication is
deactivated. The delay from the R wave peak to the start of the signal is maximally 35 ms.
Nurse Call (X8 pin 8)
Nurse Call indication is generated by red and yellow alarms. When activated, it is set to state 1
and remains at that state until the alarm situation is over or SILENCE ALARM key is pressed.
The range of state 0 is from 0 to 0.5 V, and range of the state 1 is from 3.5 to 5 V.
4.4.2 Analog outputs
S/5 FM produces two analog real-time signals. The Direct ECG signal is available in Defib&IABP
sync connector X5 pin 8. The other signal is Invasive pressure output. It is available in
Synchronization connector X5 pin 7.
NOTE: When source of the selected analog output is invalid (e.g. invasive pressure channel is
not zeroed), or becomes invalid (e.g. ECG lead is disconnected), the signal on the output is
shown as flat line (0 VDC).
38
Document no. M1187317-009
Interfacing
The pacemaker pulses have been replaced with 2 ms/5 V fixed digital pulses at the ECG analog
output for IABP or defibrillator equipment. A device that fulfils the requirements of the IEC
60601-1 standard can be connected to the defibrillator & IABP synchronization connector.
There are no other limitations, because the signals of the connector are galvanically isolated
from patient applied part of the ECG and invasive blood pressure measurements.
Direct ECG (X5 pin 8)
From first user lead (ECG1)
Gain:
Delay:
DC offset:
Output range:
Noise:
Frequency response:
1 V/1mV ±20%
< 15 ms
±100 mV max.
±4 V
50 mVpp max.
0.05 Hz to 40 Hz
The signal requires input impedance of 100 k
Pressure out (X5 pin 7)
Invasive pressure signal: From pressure channel P1
Gain:
Delay:
DC offset:
Output range:
Noise:
10 mV/1 mmHg ±20%
< 35 ms
±100 mV
-0.4 V to +3.2 V
50 mVpp max.
The signal requires input impedance of 100 k
39
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
5
Functional check
These instructions include procedures for a functional check for Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM. The
functional check is mandatory after monitor installation.
These instructions include a “Functional check form, Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM” which may be
used when performing the procedures. The symbol

in the instructions indicates that the
check form contains space to record the results of the particular procedure. The procedures
should be performed in ascending order, bypassing those that are not applicable for a
particular monitor.
All menu selections related to Datex-Ohmeda products are written in following typeface:
e.g. Parameters - Gas Unit.
As you enter the service menus, you need the following passwords:
Monitor Setup - Install/Service (password 16-4-34) - Service (password 26-23-8)
In case you evaluate the measurement accuracy with a patient simulator, add simulator’s
accuracy specification to the one of the monitor.
An electrical safety check and a leakage current test are recommended to be performed prior
to the monitor installation.
40
Document no. M1187317-009
Functional check
5.1 Recommended tools
NOTE: Use only properly maintained, calibrated and traceable measurement equipment for the
specified calibrations and adjustments to ensure accuracy.
For product(s)
Tool
Order No.
Calibration gas
755580
Regulator
755534-HEL
CO2 Sampling line 3m/10 ft
733163
Airway modules
N-FC(REC)
N-FC(REC)
Hemodynamic modules
Multi-Link ECG accessories, IEC
E-PSM(P)
-
Multi-link 3-leadwire set
412682-003
-
Multi-link 5-leadwire set
412681-003
-
Multi-link 5-leadwire set, C2-C6
416467-004
or
Multi-Link ECG accessories, AHA
E-PSM(P)
-
Multi-link 3-leadwire set
412682-001
-
Multi-link 5-leadwire set
416681-001
-
Multi-link 5-leadwire set, V2-V6
416467-003
E-PSM(P)
SpO2 finger probe
OXY-F-UN
SpO2 Interconnect Cable
OXY-ES3
Temperature test set
884515-HEL
Adult NIBP cuff hose with cuff ID
2021285-001
NIBP cuff
2753E
Infant cuff hose without cuff ID
414874-001
MemCard – Data or Menu
For details on recommended accessories see the “Supplies and Accessories” catalog.
Table 7
Patient simulators’ compatibility with each hemodynamic module
Patient simulator
Module
Parameter
M1010831
MedSim
Lionheart & MPS450
E-PSM(P)
ECG
Cable included
Multilink ECG acc.
Multilink ECG acc.
T
2016998-001
2016998-001 and
M1010832
2016998-001 and
M1010846
InvBP
Cable included
M1010858 and
2005772-001
M1010862 and
2005772-001
41
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Table 8
Adapter cables for hemodynamic patient simulators
Patient simulator
Adapter cables for simulators
Hemodynamic patient simulator
-
Dual temperature adapter cable 2016998-001
Hemodynamic patient simulator
-
Dual Inv.BP adapter cable
2005772-001
Medsim
-
Temperature adapter cable
M1010832
Medsim
-
Inv.BP adapter cable
M1010858
Lionheart & MPS450
-
Temperature adapter cable
M1010846
Lionheart & MPS450
-
Inv.BP adapter cable
M1010862
5.2 Visual inspection
Make sure that the monitor is switched to standby.
Disconnect the mains power cord from the monitor.
If the monitor is connected to the Datex-Ohmeda Network, disconnect the Mon-Net cable
from the monitor.
1.
Check all units visually.
Check that all parts are intact and that the cables and screws are connected and
tightened properly. Especially check the following parts:

sampling line is connected to the extension module.
Check that modules go in smoothly and lock up properly.

5.3 Functional inspection
WARNING
Handle the water trap and its contents as you would any body fluid.
Infectious hazard may be present.
5.3.1 General
1.
Connect the mains power cord.
Check that the Mains power LED is lit.
2.
Switch the monitor on.
Check that the monitor starts up properly, i.e. a normal start-up sound is heard from the
loudspeaker, the alarm LEDs turn on and off, and the monitoring screen appears.
No error messages should appear on the screen.
3.
Configure the screen for the parameters that are connected.
4.
Enter the Service Menu.
5.
When applicable, check from the corresponding Parameters submenu that the Timeouts,
Bad checksums and Bad c-s by mod values of inserted modules are not increasing faster
than by 5 per second. Check also that the module memories have passed the internal
memory test, i.e. RAM, ROM and EEPROM all state OK.
If connected, the recorder should record two lines of start-up information.

42
Document no. M1187317-009
Functional check
Preset the measurement settings for those parameters that are connected, for example:
Print/Recorder - Record Waveforms - Waveform 1 - ECG1
- Waveform 2 - P1
- Waveform 3 - P2
Invasive Pressures - P1 ‘ART’ Setup -- Label – ART
- P2 ‘CVP’ Setup -- Label – CVP
Others -SPO2 Setup - Pleth Scale –AUTO
Airway Gas - CO2 Setup - Resp Rate Source – AUTO
- Measurement – ON
- Detection Limit – AUTO
5.3.2 Display
1.
Check that the picture on the screen is displayed properly.

5.3.3 Keyboard(s)
Tests with the Command Bar:

Press the Monitor Setup key. Turn the ComWheel in both directions and check that
the cursor in the menu moves correspondingly. Select Normal Screen and check
that the menu disappears from the screen.
Check the rest of the menu keys by pressing them one by one.
Tests with the Remote Controller:

Enter the Keyboard service menu.

Check the function of the ComWheel.

Press all keys. Check that each key produces a sound from the loudspeaker, or the
Message count value in the service menu increases.

5.3.4 Frame unit
1.
Check that the clock on the screen shows correct time. Readjust the time and date, if
necessary.

5.3.5 Extension Module with CO2 measurement
Wait until the message ‘Calibrating gas sensor’ disappears from the screen.
1.
Block the tip of the sampling line with your finger and check that the message ‘Sample
line blocked’ appears on the monitor screen within 30 seconds.
2.
Detach the Mini D-fend and check that the message ‘Check D-fend’ appears on the
monitor screen within 30 seconds.
43
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Breathe to the sampling line briefly. Check that the CO2 information is updated on the
screen.

5.3.6 Multiparameter Hemodynamic Modules
ECG and RESP measurements
1.
Connect an ECG cable to the module. Connect the cable leads to a patient simulator.
Check that all ECG and impedance respiration information is shown on the monitor
screen as configured on the simulator.
Turn the simulator off. Check that the ‘Asystole’ and ‘Apnea’ messages appear on the screen.

Temperature measurement
2.
Check the temperature channels with a patient simulator.
Check that temperature measurement information is shown on the monitor screen as
configured on the simulator.

Invasive blood pressure measurement
3.
Check the function of the module and side panel membrane keys.
4.
Check the InvBP channels with a patient simulator.
5.
Zero the InvBP channels and check that the values and waveforms correspond to the
simulator settings.

SpO2 measurement
6.
Connect an SpO2 finger probe to the module. Check that the message ‘Probe off’ is shown
when the probe is not connected to a finger.
7.
Attach the SpO2 probe to your finger. Check that a reading of 95-99 and a pleth
waveform appear on the screen

Non invasive blood pressure measurement
8.
Check the function of the module and side panel membrane keys.
9.
Attach an adult NIBP cuff onto your arm and check that the module identifies the cuff, i.e.
the text ‘Adult’ appears in the NIBP digit field for a short time.
Perform a NIBP measurement and check that the module gives a reasonable measured
result.

44
Document no. M1187317-009
Functional check
5.3.7 Data Card and Menu Card function
1.
Insert a Data card or a Menu card to the slot.
Check that the corresponding symbol appears on the monitor screen.

5.3.8 Recorder
1.
Press the Start/Stop sidepanel key and check that the module starts recording the
selected waveforms. Press the Start/Stop sidepanel key again to stop recording.
2.
Check that the quality of the recordings is acceptable.

5.3.9 Network connection
1.
Check that the Mon-Net cable connector is clean and intact, then connect it to the
Network connector on the backside of the monitor.
Check that the monitor connects to the network, i.e. the network symbol appears on the
upper right-hand corner of the screen. Also a message regarding the connected Central
should appear in the message field on the screen.

5.3.10 Wireless Network Option
1.
Check that the WLAN signal strength symbol scrolls between zero and full or stays fixed
on the monitor screen.
2.
Check that the wireless LAN network symbol appears on the upper right-hand corner of
the screen when the monitor connects to the Datex-Ohmeda Network.
NOTE: If the monitor does not connect to the Datex-Ohmeda Network, check the WLAN
configuration on the monitor and on the network.

5.3.11 Device Interfacing Solution, N-DISxxx
1.
Make sure that the monitor receives all necessary parameter data from the connected
devices. Check the screen configuration and the related interfacing settings, if necessary.
Check also via the Interfacing menu that the connected DIS module status is correct:
Monitor Setup - Interfacing - Status Page

45
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
5.3.12 General
•
•
•
Switch the monitor to standby
Perform final cleaning
Fill in all necessary documents

46
Document no. M1187317-009
General troubleshooting
General troubleshooting
Disconnect the mains power cord and
remove the batteries to make a cold start.
No picture on screen
Check the batteries charging levels
by pressing the test buttons on the
batteries.
Connect the mains
power cord
Insert only one battery with 2 or
more capacity leds illuminating.
Press the ON/Standby key.
Front
panel green mains
power LED lit?
No
Replace fuses
Yes
Yes
With only one
battery inserted
orange battery led
flashing?
Yes
Front panel green
battery LED lit?
Mains
power LED lit?
No
Yes
No
DC/DC SW functioning.
Yes
Disconnect the mains
power cord and batteries.
Reconnect and press the
ON/Standby key
Possible AC/DC unit failure.
Replace the AC/DC unit.
Mains
power LED lit?
No
DC/DC board failure
No
Normal start-up
sound and the alarm
LEDs turn on
and off?
No
Yes
Wait for about 1 minute and
press the NIBP Auto ON/
OFF key. NOTE: NIBP cuff
must be connected
NIBP pump starts
pumping and SpO2
probe's red LED lit?
No
Yes
Possible keyboard or CPU
failure. See Troubleshooting
in S/5 FM frame slot
Figure 11
Display failure. See
Troubleshooting in S/5 FM
frame slot
Main CPU board may be
faulty.
FM_general_trbl_flowchart.vsd
6
S/5 FM general troubleshooting flowchart
47
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
For your notes:
48
Document no. M1187317-009
Appendix A Functional check form, Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
APPENDIX A: Functional check form,
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Customer
Service
Service engineer
Date
Measuring equipment / test gases used:
Equipment / tool / gas:
Manufacturer:
Model/Type/Part
Number:
Serial Number /
ID:
Calibration
Date:
Monitor Installation
L-
E-
OK = Test OK
N-
N.A. = Test not applicable
Visual Inspection
F-
Fail = Test failed
OK
N.A.
Fail
OK
N.A.
Fail
1. Check all units visually.
Functional Inspection
5.3.1. General
5.3.2. Display
S/N
5.3.3. Keyboard(s)
S/N
5.3.4. Frame unit
S/N
5.3.5. Extension Module with CO2 measurement
S/N
A-1(2)
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Functional Inspection
5.3.6. Multiparameter Hemodynamic Modules
OK
S/N
. ECG and RESP measurements
. Temperature measurement
. Invasive blood pressure measurement
. SpO2 measurement
. Non invasive blood pressure measurement
5.3.7. Data Card and Menu Card function
5.3.8. Recorder
5.3.9. Network connection
5.3.10. Wireless Network Option
5.3.11. Device Interfacing Solution, N-DISxxx
5.3.12. General
Notes
Signature
A-2(2)
Document no. M1187317-009
S/N
N.A.
Fail
Appendix B ElectroMagnetic Compatibility
APPENDIX B: ElectroMagnetic Compatibility
Table 1
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic
emissions
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic emissions
The S/5 FM is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the
user of the S/5 FM should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test
Compliance
Electromagnetic environment - guidance
RF emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1
The S/5 FM(1 uses RF energy only for its internal function.
Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not likely to
cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment.
Group 2
The S/5 FM(2 must emit electromagnetic energy in order to
perform its intended function. Nearby electronic equipment may
be affected.
RF emissions
CISPR 11
Class A
Harmonic emissions
IEC 61000-3-2
Class A
The S/5 FM is suitable for use in all establishments other than
domestic and those directly connected to the public low-voltage
power supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic
purposes.
Voltage fluctuations/
flicker emissions
Complies
IEC 61000-3-3
(1
S/5 FM equipped with S/5 Frame for FM, F-FM
(2
S/5 FM equipped with S/5 Frame for FM with WLAN, F-FMW
B-1(4)
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Table 2
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic
immunity
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity
The S/5 FM is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of
the S/5 FM should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test
IEC 60601 test level
Compliance level
Electromagnetic environment guidance
Electrostatic
discharge (ESD)
IEC 61000-4-2
±6 kV contact
±6 kV contact
±8 kV air
±8 kV air
Floors should be wood, concrete or
ceramic tile. If floors are covered with
synthetic material, the relative humidity
should be at least 30%.
Electrical fast
transients/bursts
IEC 61000-4-4
±2 kV for power
supply lines
±1 kV for input/output
lines
±2 kV for power
Mains power quality should be that of a
supply lines
typical commercial or hospital
±1 kV for input/output environment.
lines
Surge
IEC 61000-4-5
±1 kV differential
mode
±2 kV common mode
±1 kV differential
mode
±2 kV common mode
Mains power quality should be that of a
typical commercial or hospital
environment.
Voltage dips, short
interruptions and
voltage variations on
power supply lines
IEC 61000-4-11
<5% UT
(>95% dip in UT)
for 0.5 cycle
<5% UT
(>95% dip in UT)
for 0.5 cycle
40% UT
(60% dip in UT)
for 5 cycles
40% UT
(60% dip in UT)
for 5 cycles
Mains power quality should be that of a
typical commercial or hospital
environment. If user of the S/5 FM
requires continued operation during
power mains interruptions, it is
recommended that the S/5 FM be
powered from an uninterruptible power
supply or a battery.
70% UT
(30% dip in UT)
for 25 cycles
70% UT
(30% dip in UT)
for 25 cycles
<5% UT
(>95% dip in UT)
for 5 sec
<5% UT
(>95% dip in UT)
for 5 sec
3 A/m
3 A/m
Power frequency
(50/60 Hz) magnetic
field
IEC 61000-4-8
NOTE UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
B-2(4)
Document no. M1187317-009
Power frequency magnetic field should
be at levels characteristic of a typical
location in a typical commercial or
hospital environment.
Appendix B ElectroMagnetic Compatibility
Table 3
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic
immunity
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity
The S/5 FM is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the
S/5 FM should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment
should be used no closer to any part of the S/5 FM,
including cables, than the recommended separation
distance calculated from the equation applicable to the
frequency of the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
Conducted RF 3 Vrms
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 MHz
3 Vrms
150 kHz to 80 MHz
Radiated RF
3 V/m
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz
3 Vrms
d = 1.2 P
1 Vrms (1
d = 3.5 P
3 V/m
d = 1.2 P
80 MHz to 800 MHz
d = 2.3 P
800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
where P is the maximum output power rating of the
transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter
manufacturer and d is the recommended separation
distance in metres (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as determined
by an electromagnetic site survey, a should be less than
the compliance level in each frequency range. b
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment
marked with the following symbol:
NOTE 1
At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2
These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land
mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicated theoretically
with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic
site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the S/5 FM is used
exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the S/5 FMshould be observed to verify normal operation. If
abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating
the S/5 FM.
b
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m or 1 V/m (1.
(1
For impedance RESP measurement
B-3(4)
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Table 4
Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF
communications equipment and the S/5 FM
Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF
communications equipment and the S/5 FM.
The S/5 FM is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are
controlled. The customer or the user of the S/5 FM can help prevent electromagnetic interference by
maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment
(transmitters) and the S/5 FM as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the
communications equipment.
Rated maximum
output power of
transmitter
W
Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter
m
150 kHz to 80 MHz
d = 1.2 P
d = 3.5 P
80 MHz to 800 MHz
d = 1.2 P
800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
d = 2.3 P
(1
0.01
0.12
0.35 (1
0.12
0.23
0.1
0.38
1.1 (1
0.38
0.73
1
1.2
3.5 (1
1.2
2.3
10
3.8
11 (1
3.8
7.3
100
12
35 (1
12
23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation
distance d in meters (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1
At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2
These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by
absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
(1
For impedance RESP measurement.
B-4(4)
Document no. M1187317-009
Appendix C, Channel Mask Selections for S/5 FM
APPENDIX C: Channel Mask Selections for S/5 FM
NOTE: The selections are country specific. Make sure that you are using the correct selection.
Selection
Allowed Band
DS Channels
07FF
2.400 - 2.4835
01 - 11
1FFF
2.400 - 2.4835
01 - 13
1C00
2.4465 - 2.4835
11 - 13
00F0
2.418 - 2.457
05-08
C-1(2)
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
C-2(2)
Document no. M1187317-009
Datex-Ohmeda
S/5TM FM
Planned Maintenance Instructions
Conformity according to the Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning Medical Devices amended by 2007/47/EC
CAUTION: U.S. Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a licensed medical practitioner.
Outside the USA, check local laws for any restriction that may apply.
All specifications subject to change without notice.
Document number M1187318-003
2 February, 2010
GE Healthcare Finland Oy
Kuortaneenkatu 2
FI-00510 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: +358 10 39411
Fax: +358 9 1463310
www.gehealthcare.com
Copyright © 2010 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Table of contents
Table of contents
1
Planned maintenance instructions
1
1.1
1.2
1
2
3
3
4
4
4
1.3
1.4
2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1 Hemodynamic patient simulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Planned maintenance parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.1 PM parts for Airway Module, N-FC(REC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.2 PM parts for S/5 FM frame, F-FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Planned maintenance check list
2.1
2.2
5
Visual inspection/preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1.2 Extension module, N-F(C)(REC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1.3 Recorder unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.1.4 E-PSM(P) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Functional inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.2.2 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.2.3 Keyboard(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.2.4 N-FC(REC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.2.5 Multiparameter Hemodynamic Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.2.6 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2.7 Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2.8 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2.9 Wireless Network Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2.10 Device Interfacing Solution, N-DISxxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2.11 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Appendix A:
Planned maintenance check form, Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
A-1
i
Document no. M1187318-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
ii
Document no. M1187318-003
Planned maintenance instructions
1
Planned maintenance instructions
1.1 Introduction
These instructions include procedures for planned maintenance (PM) for the Datex-Ohmeda
S/5 FM. The Planned maintenance should be performed once a year.
These instructions include “Planned maintenance check form, Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM” which
may be used when performing the procedures.
The symbol
"
in the instructions means that the procedure performed should be signed in
the check form.
The procedures should be performed in ascending order, bypassing those that are not
applicable for a particular monitor.
If you need further information on how to perform a certain planned maintenance procedure,
please refer to the corresponding slot in the Technical Reference Manual.
All menu selections related to the Datex-Ohmeda monitors are written in the following
typeface:
e.g. Parameters - Gas Unit
As you enter the service menus, you need following passwords:
Monitor Setup - Install/Service (password 16-4-34) - Service (password 26-23-8)
In case you evaluate the measurement accuracy with a patient simulator, add the simulator’s
accuracy specification to the one for the monitor.
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
Handle the water trap and its contents as you would any body fluid.
Infectious hazard may be present.
Only trained personnel with appropriate equipment should perform the
tests and repairs outlined in this section. Unauthorized service may void
warranty of the unit.
Wear a grounded antistatic wristband when handling PC boards.
Electrostatic discharge may damage components on the board.
Failure on the part of all responsible individuals, hospitals or institutions,
employing the use of this device, to implement the recommended
maintenance schedule may cause equipment failure. The manufacturer
does not, in any manner, assume the responsibility for performing the
recommended maintenance schedule, unless an equipment maintenance
agreement exists. The sole responsibility rests with the individuals,
hospitals, or institutions utilizing the device.
1
Document no. M1187318-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
1.2 Recommended tools
NOTE: Use only properly maintained, calibrated and traceable measurement equipment for the
specified calibrations and adjustments to ensure accuracy.
For product(s)
Tool
N-FC(REC)
Flowmeter
Order No.
Calibration gas (CO2, 5%, 4 cans
per package)
755580
Regulator
755534-HEL*
CO2 sampling line 3 m/10 ft
733163
Sampling line, 6 m/20 ft
73306
Adult NIBP cuff hose with cuff ID
2021285-001
Adult NIBP cuff
2753E
Infant cuff hose without cuff ID
414874-001
InvBP transducer
70077-001
Hemodynamic modules
E-PSM(P)
Pressure manometer
Multi-Link ECG accessories, IEC
E-PSM(P)
-
Multi-link 3-leadwire set
412682-003
-
Multi-link 5-leadwire set
412681-003
-
Multi-link 5-leadwire set, C2-C6
416467-004
or
Multi-Link ECG accessories, AHA
E-PSM(P)
-
Multi-link 3-leadwire set
412682-001
-
Multi-link 5-leadwire set
4162681-001
-
Multi-link 5-leadwire set, V2-V6
416467-003
E-PSM(P)
SpO2 finger probe
OXY-F-UN
SpO2 Interconnect Cable
OXY-ES3
Temperature test set
884515-HEL
Monitor / Modules
MemCard – Menu
MemCard – Data
Torx screwdrivers; T8, T10
NOTE: * Ensure that the calibration gas and regulator are functioning properly before
calibration. Perform annual maintenance on the regulator as required. For more information
see section “Adjustments and calibrations” in N-FC(REC) slot.
2
Document no. M1187318-003
Planned maintenance instructions
1.2.1 Hemodynamic patient simulators
The following tables present the patient simulators’ compatibility with each hemodynamic
module, and the accessories needed:
Table 1
Patient simulators’ compatibility with each hemodynamic module
Patient simulator
Module
Parameter
M1010831
MedSim
Lionheart &
MPS450
E-PSM(P)
ECG
Cable included
Multilink ECG acc.
Multilink ECG acc.
T
2016998-001
2016998-001 and
M1010832
2016998-001
and M1010846
InvBP
Cable included
M1010858 and
2005772-001
M1010862 and
2005772-001
Table 2
Adapter cables for hemodynamic patient simulators
Patient simulator
Hemodynamic patient simulator
Dual temperature adapter cable 2016998-001
Hemodynamic patient simulator
Dual Inv.BP adapter cable
2005772-001
Medsim
Temperature adapter cable
M1010832
Medsim
Inv.BP adapter cable
M1010858
Lionheart & MPS450
Temperature adapter cable
M1010846
Lionheart & MPS450
Inv.BP adapter cable
M1010862
1.3 Recommended parts
For product(s)
Part
Order No.
N-F(C)REC
Recorder paper
74205-HEL
3
Document no. M1187318-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
1.4 Planned maintenance parts
1.4.1 PM parts for Airway Module, N-FC(REC)
Part
Order No.
For product(s)
Special tube (Nafion 2 pcs)
733382-HEL
All Airway modules
Mini D-fend O-ring (2 pcs)
656565
N-FC(REC)
Mini D-fend
8002174 (pkg of 10 pcs)
N-FC(REC)
Zero valve air filter
M1011471
N-FC(REC), every 3 years
CO2 Sampling line 3.0 m
733163
N-FC(REC)
PM sticker
893108
All Airway modules
1.4.2 PM parts for S/5 FM frame, F-FM
Part
Order No.
For product(s)
SRAM/Timekeeper battery
197230-HEL-S
F-FM, every 8 years
For details on recommended accessories see the “Supplies and Accessories” catalog.
4
Document no. M1187318-003
Planned maintenance check list
2
Planned maintenance check list
2.1 Visual inspection/preparation
2.1.1 General
WARNING
Wear a grounded antistatic wristband when handling PC boards.
Electrostatic discharge may damage components on the board.
Make sure that the monitor is turned off.
Disconnect the mains power cord. If the monitor is connected to the Datex-Ohmeda
Network, disconnect the Mon-Net cable from the monitor. Remove any memory cards.
1.
Check all the units visually. Check that all parts are intact and that the cables and screws
are connected and tightened properly.
2.
Replace the batteries, if necessary.
The manufacturer recommendations are:
−
Replace the SRAM/Timekeeper battery on the CPU board every 8 years.
NOTE: The Factory Reset must be performed if the SRAM/Timekeeper battery is replaced.
3.
Check that the fuses are of the correct rating.
4.
Check the ventilation holes of the monitor and clean of dust if necessary.
5.
Check the battery status from Battery setup menu: If “failed”, renew the battery. If
“condition”, perform the condition cycle.
NOTE: Batteries are recommended to be conditioned every six months.
"
2.1.2 Extension module, N-F(C)(REC)
MiniC unit
1.
Remove the module cover.
2.
Check that all cables and tubes are connected properly and that there are no loose
objects inside the module.
3.
Install the PM Kit:
−
Replace the special tube (Nafion™).
−
Replace the Zero valve air filter every three years.
−
Check the D-fend body connector O-rings and replace them, if necessary.
−
Replace the Mini D-fend and the sampling line.
NOTE: Use only approved sampling lines to ensure proper functioning.
4.
Check that the tubing inside the module is not contaminated. Any contamination inside
the tubing may indicate that the valves or sensors are contaminated, too.
This can increase the risk of faulty operation in the valves or sensors. It is not possible to
clean valves or gas sensors in the field. Therefore, if you notice any contamination in the
module tubing, send the module to GE Healthcare for factory service.
5.
Reattach the module cover and connect the module to the monitor frame.
"
5
Document no. M1187318-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
2.1.3 Recorder unit
1.
Clean the recorder.
−
Open the paper compartment hatch and remove the paper roll, if installed.
−
Remove any paper chaff from the paper compartment.
−
Clean the thermal printhead and the small glass window in front of the static brush
with a cotton swab dipped in isopropyl alcohol, if necessary.
NOTE: Avoid contact with the rubber paper roller. Be careful to limit the application of alcohol to
the thermal printhead and the window.
−
Reinstall the paper roll.
"
2.1.4 E-PSM(P) Module
1.
Check the NIBP pump filter. Replace the filter, if necessary.
Plug the module back into the frame.
"
2.2 Functional inspection
2.2.1 General
1.
Connect the mains power cord. Check that the Mains power LED is lit.
2.
Switch the monitor on.
Check that the monitor starts up properly, i.e. the alarm LEDs turn on shortly, normal
start-up sound is heard from the loudspeaker and the monitoring screen appears.
No error messages should appear on the screen.
3.
Configure the screen for the parameters that are connected.
Check that all the connected modules are recognized, i.e. the required parameter
information is shown on the screen.
If connected, the recorder should record two lines of start-up information.
Preset the measurement settings for those parameters that are connected, for example:
Print/Recorder - Record Waveforms - Waveform 1 - ECG1
- Waveform 2 - P1
- Waveform 3 - P2
Invasive Pressures - P1 ‘ART’ Setup - Label - ART
- P2 ‘CVP’ Setup - Label - CVP
Others - SPO2 Setup - Pleth Scale - AUTO
Others - Resp Setup - Size - 1.0
- Resp Rate Source - AUTO
- Measurement - ON
- Detection Limit - AUTO
6
Document no. M1187318-003
Planned maintenance check list
4.
Check that the monitor goes to battery use if the main cord is disconnected.
"
2.2.2 Display
1.
Check that the picture on the screen is correct.
"
2.2.3 Keyboard(s)
1.
Tests with the Command Board:
−
Press the Monitor Setup key. Turn the ComWheel in both directions and check that
the cursor in the menu moves correspondingly. Select Normal Screen and check
that the menu disappears from the screen.
Check the rest of the menu keys by pressing them one by one.
Tests with the Remote Controller:
2.
−
Enter the Keyboard service menu.
−
Check the function of the Comwheel.
−
Press all keys. Check that each key produces a sound from the loudspeaker, or the
Message count value in the service menu increases.
Check that the clock on the screen shows correct time.
Readjust the time and date, if necessary.
3.
Enter the Service Log service menu.
Check the content of the Service Log for possible problems.
"
2.2.4 N-FC(REC)
1.
Enter the Gas Unit service menu.
2.
Enter the General service menu: Check that the Time-outs, Bad checksums and Bad c-s
by mod values are not increasing faster than by 5 per second.
3.
Enter the Gases service menu: Check that the ‘Ambient’ value displayed corresponds with
the current ambient pressure (±20 mmHg).
4.
Check that the flow measurement offset, i.e. the sample ‘Zero’ value displayed is within
±10 ml/min.
5.
Perform a sampling system leak test.
6.
Check the flow rates. Adjust the sampling flow, if necessary.
7.
Block the tip of the sampling line with your finger and check that the message ‘Sample
line blocked’ appears on the monitor screen within 30 seconds.
Remove the Mini D-fend and check that the message ‘Check D-fend’ appears on the
screen within 30 seconds.
8.
Perform a gas calibration:
NOTE: For maximum accuracy, a warm-up time of 30 minutes is recommended.
7
Document no. M1187318-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
NOTE: Noisy sampling pump might indicate possible problems with motor bearing. Replace the
noisy sampling pump by a new one if needed.
"
2.2.5 Multiparameter Hemodynamic Modules
ECG and RESP measurements
1.
Enter the ECG service menu.
Check that the Time-outs, Bad checksums and Bad c-s by mod values are not increasing
faster than by 5 per second. Check that the ECG/RESP board memories have passed the
internal memory test, i.e. RAM, ROM and EEPROM all state OK.
2.
Check that the ‘Power Freq’ value is set according to the mains power frequency. Correct
the setting, if necessary.
Connect a 12-lead ECG trunk cable without a lead set to the module. Check that the
message 'Leads off' is displayed on the screen.
3.
Connect both 5-leadwire sets to the trunk cable. Connect the cable leads to a patient
simulator. Check that the ‘Cable type’ shows 10 lead.
4.
Disconnect one of the leads and check that the corresponding electrode in the service
menu shows OFF within 10 seconds from the disconnection, then reconnect the lead.
Check the rest of the leads using the same method.
NOTE: With E-PSM module: when any of the limb leads is disconnected, the measurement will
automatically change to 3 electrode ECG measurement.
NOTE: The asystole and different leads off messages are shown using certain priority. Even
though one of the leads is disconnected, the related leads off message may not appear on the
screen.
NOTE: When RA, LA, LL or RL electrode is disconnected, all V electrodes show OFF.
5.
Check that all ECG and impedance respiration information is shown on the monitor
screen as configured on the simulator.
Check that the pacer count value in the service menu is shown according to the simulator
configuration.
Change baseline impedance on the simulator and check that appropriate RESP waveform
and RR values are shown again within 30 seconds.
Turn the simulator off. Check that the ‘Asystole’ and ‘Apnea’ messages are displayed.
"
Temperature measurement
6.
Enter the STP service menu.
Check that the Time-outs, Bad checksums and Bad c-s by mod values are not increasing
faster than by 5 per second. Check that the STP board memories have passed the internal
memory test, i.e. RAM, ROM and EEPROM all show OK.
7.
Check the temperature measurement calibration using temperature test plugs.
NOTE: Make sure that the protection for temperature calibration is set on, if calibration is
needed.
"
8
Document no. M1187318-003
Planned maintenance check list
Invasive blood pressure measurement
8.
9.
Check the function of the module front panel membrane keys.
Check the InvBP channels with a patient simulator.
Zero the InvBP channels, then check that the values and waveforms correspond to the
simulator settings.
"
SpO2 measurement
10.
Check that the message ‘No probe’ is shown, when no SpO2 sensor is connected.
Connect an SpO2 finger probe to the module. Check that the message ‘Probe off’ is shown,
when the probe is not connected to a finger.
11.
Attach the SpO2 probe to your finger. Check that a reading of 95-99 and a pleth waveform
appear on the screen.
"
Non invasive blood pressure measurement
12.
Enter the NIBP module service menu.
Check that the Time-outs, Bad checksums and Bad c-s by mod values are not increasing
faster than by 5 per second. Check that the NIBP board memories have passed the
internal memory test, i.e. RAM, ROM and EEPROM all show OK.
13.
Check the function of the front panel membrane keys.
14.
Check the NIBP tubing system for leakages by performing Calibrations - Active leak test.
15.
Perform NIBP calibration by selecting Calibration.
16.
Check the safety valve by performing Safety Valve – Adult and Infant.
17.
Attach an adult NIBP hose and cuff onto your arm and perform one NIBP measurement.
Check that the module identifies the cuff, i.e. the text ‘Adult’ appears in the NIBP digit field
for a short time.
Check that the module gives a reasonable measurement result.
"
E-PSM(P):
18.
Attach a NIBP cuff hose without cuff identification and check that the module identifies
the hose:
−
The message ‘Select inflation limits’ appears in the NIBP digit field.
−
When you try to start the measurement, the monitor automatically opens the
selections NIBP Setup - Inflation Limits.
"
2.2.6 Memory
1.
Enter the MemCards service menu:
Check that the memory unit is recognized properly, i.e. Present and Active state YES.
2.
Check that the memories and the PCMCIA controller have passed the tests. The status for
each should be OK.
9
Document no. M1187318-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
3.
Select Communication.
Check that the Interface status states Active continuously and the error counter values on
the bottom part of the menu are stable.
4.
Select Status.
Insert Data card into the slot.
Wait until the information is fully updated in the service menu, then check that the Card
types are correct and the ‘File system’ states ATA.
Check that the rest of the information is reliable and no errors have been detected.
"
2.2.7 Recorder
1.
Open the paper compartment cover. Check that the message ‘Recorder: Cover open’
appears on the screen, then close the cover.
2.
Press the Start/Stop sidepanel key and check that the module starts recording the
selected waveforms. Press the Start/Stop sidepanel key again to stop recording.
3.
Check that the quality of the recordings is acceptable.
"
2.2.8 Network
1.
Check that the Mon-Net cable connector and the Identification plug are clean and intact,
then connect them to the monitor via the Multi I/O adapter. Check that the monitor
connects to the Datex-Ohmeda Network, i.e. the network symbol appears on the upper
right-hand corner of the screen. Also a message regarding the connected Central should
appear in the message field on the screen.
NOTE: If necessary, reselect the monitor’s network communication according to the used
network software in the Network service menu.
2.
Enter the Network - Ethernet service menu:
Check that the counters for data errors (CRC, Frame, Transm.) are stable.
Check that the counters for hardware errors (Intern., Missed, FIFO, Overrun) all show 0.
"
2.2.9 Wireless Network Option
1.
Check that the WLAN signal strength symbol scrolls between zero and full or stays fixed
on the monitor screen.
2.
Check that the wireless LAN network symbol appears on the upper right-hand corner of
the screen when the monitor connects to the Datex-Ohmeda Network.
NOTE: If the monitor does not connect to the Datex-Ohmeda Network, check the WLAN
configuration on the monitor and on the network.
"
10
Document no. M1187318-003
Planned maintenance check list
2.2.10 Device Interfacing Solution, N-DISxxx
1.
Enter the DIS Interfacing service menu:
Check that the DIS module ‘tout’ and ‘cse’ values do not increase faster than by 5 per
second. Check also that the DIS module memories have passed the internal memory test,
i.e. Ram, Rom and EEPROM state all OK.
Perform the same check for all connected DIS modules.
"
2.2.11 General
1.
Storing trend data
Check that the monitor is capable of storing the trend information and temporary
settings in a short (max. 15 minutes) standby situation with no power cord.
"
2.
Service reset
Check the Service Reset. Switch off the monitor. Disconnect the power cord and remove
the batteries to reset the monitor. Wait at least for 30 seconds, insert the batteries back,
switch the monitor back on and check that the monitor performs a Cold Start, i.e. all trend
information is cleared.
"
3.
Watchdog
Enter the Set/Test service menu and perform Watchdog
Check that the monitor restarts.
"
4.
Service Log reset
Enter the Service Log service menu.
Clear the content of the Service Log by selecting Reset Log from the menu.
"
5.
Electrical safety check
Perform an Electrical safety check and a leakage current test. Check that the monitor and
all connected units function normally after the performed test.
"
6.
Save information about the performed planned maintenance into the Maintenance
service menu by performing Plan. Maint - 1 year PM - Save.
"
7.
Final cleaning
Switch the monitor to standby and perform final cleaning.
Fill in all necessary documents.
"
11
Document no. M1187318-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
For your notes:
12
Document no. M1187318-003
Appendix A Planned maintenance check form, Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
APPENDIX A: Planned maintenance check form,
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Customer
Service
Service engineer
Date
Measuring equipment / test gases used:
Equipment / tool / gas:
Manufacturer:
Model/Type/Part
Number:
Serial Number /
ID:
Calibration
Date:
Monitor Installation
L-
E-
N-
F-
N-
N-
N-
N-
KOK = Test OK
N.A. = Test not applicable
Visual Inspection
Fail = Test failed
OK
N.A.
Fail
2.1.1. General
2.1.2. Extension module, N-F(C)(REC)
S/N
. MiniC unit
2.1.3. Recorder unit
2.1.4. E-PSM(P) Module
S/N
Notes
1(4)
Document no. M1187318-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Functional Inspection
OK
2.2.1. General
2.2.2. Display
2.2.3. Keyboard(s)
2.2.4. N-FC(REC)
Notes
2.2.5. Multiparameter Hemodynamic Modules
. ECG and RESP measurements
. Temperature measurement
. Invasive blood pressure measurement
. SpO2 measurement
. Non invasive blood pressure measurement
Notes
2.2.6. Memory
2.2.7. Recorder
2.2.8. Network
2.2.9. Wireless Network Option
2.2.10. Device Interfacing Solution, N-DISxxx
S/N
S/N
S/N
S/N
Notes
2(4)
Document no. M1187318-003
N.A.
Fail
Appendix A Planned maintenance check form, Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Functional Inspection
OK
N.A.
Fail
2.2.11. General
1. Storing trend data
2. Service reset
3. Watchdog
4. Service Log reset
5. Electrical safety check
6. Save information into the Maintenance service menu
7. Final cleaning
Notes
Used Spare Parts
Notes
Signature
3(4)
Document no. M1187318-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
For your notes:
4(4)
Document no. M1187318-003
Datex-Ohmeda
S/5TM FM
Service Menu
Conformity according to the Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning Medical Devices amended by 2007/47/EC
CAUTION: U.S. Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a licensed medical practitioner.
Outside the USA, check local laws for any restriction that may apply.
All specifications subject to change without notice.
Document number M1187329-003
February 2, 2010
GE Healthcare Finland Oy
Kuortaneenkatu 2
FI-00510 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: +358 10 39411
Fax: +358 9 1463310
www.gehealthcare.com
Copyright © 2010 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Table of contents
Table of contents
Table of contents
i
Introduction
1
1
3
Frame
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
2
3
Display
19
Keyboard
20
3.1
4
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2.1 Network Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.2.2 Network Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.3 Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.4 WLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.5 Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
MemCards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.3.1 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.3.2 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.3.3 PCMCIA Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.4.1 WPM Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Keyboard Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Parameters
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
22
Gas Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
4.1.2 Gases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
ECG Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.2.1 ECG Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
PSM STP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.3.1 Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
NIBP Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.4.1 NIBP Demo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.4.2 NIBP Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.4.3 NIBP Safety Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.4.4 NIBP Pulse Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.4.5 NIBP Buttons/Leds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4.4.6 NIBP Pneumatics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.4.7 NIBP Watchdog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
DIS Interfacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4.5.1 Interfacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4.5.2 Status Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.5.3 DIS Interfacing service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.5.4 DIS Module specific page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
i
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
5
Set/Test
5.1
6
Country Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Service Log
6.1
41
43
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
6.1.1 Planned Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
6.1.2 Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
6.1.3 Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
7
Record Data
46
8
SW Download
47
8.1
Remote Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
ii
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
Introduction
The monitor has a Service Menu, which is a useful tool to examine monitor functions and to
troubleshoot in case a fault occurs.
Service Menu structure
Service Menu
Memory
Network
Config
Ethernet
WLAN
Frame
Network Status
MemCards
PCMCIA Board
Power Supply
WPM Battery
Display
Keyboard
Keyboard Log
General
Parameters
Gas Unit
Gases
ECG
ECG Setup
STP
Calibrations
NIBP
NIBP demo
Calibrations
DIS Interfacing
Safety valve
Pulse valve
Buttons/Leds
Pneumatics
Country Settings
Service Log
Maintenance
Planned Maint.
Repair
Record Data
SW Download
servmenu_struct09_FM.vsd
Watchdog
Set/Test
Remote Access
Upgrade
NOTE: The Service Menu structure can vary depending on the software version.
1
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Service Menu
NOTE: The Service Menu pictures are for reference only. Details on the menu page can vary
depending on the software version and the module type in use.
1. Press the Monitor Setup key.
2. Select Install/Service (password
16-4-34).
3. Select Service (password 26-23-8).
2
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
1
Frame
The Frame menu includes service menus
common for the frame.
1.1 Memory
A service menu to check the status of the
memory used in the CPU board of the monitor.
Test Memory tests the condition of the
EEPROM/Flash memory component of the CPU
board. If the result of the test is Fail, see section
“Error messages” in the slot.
Test SRAM tests the Static RAM memory of the
CPU board in a similar way as the EEPROM/Flash
memory. If the result of the test is Fail, see
section “Error messages” in the slot.
Real-time clock test is run at every start up and
also during the operation of the monitor. If the
result of the test is Fail, the battery for the SRAM
timekeeper should be replaced.
3
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
1.2 Network
1.2.1 Network Status
The Network Status view shows the general
status of the network
Location ID: Monitor’s location given at the
setup.
DRI level: Shows the selected level of network
communication. The network communication
is set according to the network software used
(e.g. S-CNET02)
Interfaces: The field indicates if there is a
connection to the Datex-Ohmeda Network
Current Interface: The field indicates the
active network interface
(None/Ethernet/WLAN)
Connections: Names of subnet id:s connected
The field represents the subnet status menus,
i.e. shows the connected subnets. The three
first connections are reserved permanently for
Datex-Ohmeda Central, and the fourth is
reserved for another subnet, e.g.
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 Arrhythmia Workstation.
4
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
Subnet Status
The Subnet status view gives more accurate
information of the different subnet id:s connected.
All four Subnet status menus have a similar
structure. The number of different packets
transmitted and received by the monitor are
shown in the columns below Tx and Rx. The packet
types are:
Waveforms: Waveform data
Phys. data: Physiological numerical data
Alarms:
Alarms, alarm profiles and alarm
limits
Link mgmt: Network management messages
Record K:
Record Keeper data
MonToMon: Monitor-to-monitor communication
related data
Printer:
Printing data and control messages
File Op.:
File operation messages, saving
and loading of cases
Service:
Maintenance and service
Modes:
User mode data
Indics.:
Remote indications sent to monitor
RemoteEv:
Remote events
Data server: Packets of the data server
(Arrhythmia Workstation)
Packets total: Total number of packets
sent/received
Bytes total: Total number of bytes
sent/received
T-o
InE
LenE
Dupl
Number or resendings
Received faulty packets
Erroneous packet length
Same packet received as a duplicate
5
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
1.2.2 Network Config
The DRI Level is for setting the monitor's
network communication. The network
communication is set according to the network
software used (e.g. S-CNET01).
Network software S-CNET01 ->DRI Level = 2001
Network software S-CNET02 ->DRI Level = 2001
or 2002 (WLAN)
Network software L-NET03 ->DRI Level = 2003
Network software L-NET05 ->DRI Level = 2003
Virtual Plug ID indicates the monitor’s location
(Network ID). Virtual Plug ID is automatically
defined when downloading the WLAN option to
the monitor.
1.2.3 Ethernet
The Ethernet Status view shows the general
status of the ethernet network communication.
Driver: Ethernet chip name (DP83902,
DP83907)
Cable: Indicates if the ethernet cable is
connected.
EthernetAddr: Monitor’s ethernet address.
Speed: Indicates the current ethernet
communication speed.
The service data related to the ethernet status
view is described in the following table.
6
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
1.2.4 WLAN
Driver: WLAN driver chip name.
Connection indicates the state of the WLAN
connection.
Ethernet Addr: Ethernet address of the WLAN card
used.
AP MAC: Ethernet address of the access point
where the monitor is currently connected.
Signal Quality indicates the quality of the radio
signal between the monitor and the access point
(0…100%).
Channel is the WLAN channel configured to the
access point where the monitor is currently
connected.
Speed indicates the current communication speed
with the access point.
RoamCounter Occurred roamings between
access points.
Reset Counter *
Network ID: Identifies the WLAN network used.
Firmware version: *
Firmware date: *
Statistics (Packets, Bytes, Errors, Fails, Buffer)
shows the WLAN communication related statistics.
* WLAN PCMCIA card related information
7
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
AP List
Access Points: shows the access points (max.
eight) which are visible for the monitor.
CH is the WLAN channel configured to this
particular access point.
NL indicates the noise level of the channel used
(0…100%)
SL indicates the signal level of the channel used
(0…100%)
WLAN Config
Network ID is for setting the correct WLAN
network ID name.
WEP Algorithm is for setting the level of the
encryption (width of encryption key) used for
WLAN security (40 bit or 128 bit).
Key ID is for choosing the encryption key used.
Encryption key is for setting the encryption key.
NOTE: When selecting 40 bit encryption, enter 10
Hex digit characters (divided into 2 fields).
When selecting 128 bit encryption, enter 26 Hex
digit characters (divided into 2 fields).
NOTE: Use only hexadecimal characters.
NOTE: For all the monitors and access points in
the same WLAN network, the previous
parameters must be set to be the same.
Channel Mask is for selecting allowed
communication channels, see Appendix C,
Channel Mask Selections in the first manual slot.
8
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
1.2.5 Socket
For factory use only.
9
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
1.3 MemCards
1.3.1 Status
Present and Active indicate the status of the
PCMCIA controller on the CPU board. Possible
values are YES and NO.
ROM indicates the status of the ROM memory.
Possible values are OK and ERR.
RAM indicates the status of the RAM memory.
Possible values are OK and ERR.
PCMCIA indicates the status of the PCMCIA
controller. Possible values are OK and ERR.
EEPROM indicates the status of the EEPROM
memory. Possible values are OK and ERR.
SLOT1 and SLOT2 indicate the left hand slot and
the right hand slot, respectively.
Card type
indicates whether the card is
MENU or DATA card. If a
duplicated card is inserted, type
DUPL.
File system
indicates the type of the memory card in use. The only supported file system is ATA. If a
memory card using another file system is used, the message ‘UNKNOWN’ is shown. If the card
is poorly attached, the message ‘LOOSE’ is shown.
Card size
indicates the total amount of disk space in the card in kilobytes.
Card used
indicates the total amount of used disk space in the card in kilobytes.
Card full
indicates whether all the disk space in the card is used. Possible values are YES and NO.
Card empty
indicates the lack of menu files in the MENU card or no files in the DATA card. Possible values
are YES and NO.
Read error
indicates whether the reading from the card has failed. Possible values are YES and NO.
Write error
indicates whether the writing to the card has failed. Possible values are YES and NO.
All values can be '- - -' to indicate 'No data available'.
10
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
1.3.2 Communication
Interface status indicates the status of the data
link between the monitor and memory module.
The status should always be on ACTIVE. If the
status blinks between ACTIVE and CLOSED, a
communications error has occurred.
Message types indicates the type of data packets
that have been sent (Tx) and received (Rx) since
the last monitor start. Data types are listed on the
lines below Message types text.
Record K indicates the communication between
the Monitor and Record Keeper.
File Operation indicates the operations of Patient
data.
Service indicates the memory module operations.
Modes indicates the User Mode operations.
Module status indicates the number of
sent/received data packets that relate to the
memory module status.
Packets total indicates the total amount of data
packets that have been sent/received since the
last monitor start.
Bytes total indicates the total amount of data bytes that have been sent/received since the last monitor
start.
The last four lines indicate transmission errors:
Timeouts indicates the number of timeouts that have occurred in memory module data transmission since
the last monitor start.
Chksum err indicates the number of checksum errors in data packets from the memory module since the
last monitor start.
Length err indicates the number of data packets with erroneous length from the memory module since the
last monitor start.
Duplicated indicates the number of duplicate data packets from the memory module since the last monitor
start.
11
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
1.3.3 PCMCIA Board
Chip type is the type of the PCMCIA controller
chip used.
Number of slots is the number of PCMCIA card
slots on the CPU board (0, 1 or 2).
Slot A/B State and Drv Active indicate if the
PCMCIA card slot is active.
Driver Ptr, Detect Int and PcCard Int: PCMCIA
card driver software related data.
PcCard info: General PCMCIA card related
information.
12
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
1.4 Power supply
The menu shows the voltages and temperature
measured by the DC/DC board and CPU board. The
values in the column under Mean are the mean
values of last one second, the Min column shows
the minimum mean value, and the Max column the
maximum mean value of the voltages and
temperature measured during the current power
ON.
The voltages and currents are measured by the
DC/DC Board, except the four lowest under
heading CPU Board A/D, which are measured by
the CPU Board. +5V and +3.3V values come thus
both from the DC/DC Board and CPU Board. System
power and Module power are calculated by the
DC/DC Board.
ACDC AC/DC converter’s output voltage, used as
monitor input voltage when the mains cord is
connected. Range when present: 15.25…16.55V
(Note: this includes the measurement inaccuracy).
EXTDC External DC input voltage, can be used as
monitor input voltage when present, if the mains
cord is not connected. Range when present: 10…16.5V (External DC power for future use).
Bat1 Battery A voltage measured at DC/DC Board. Range 9…12.6V for Li-ION battery
Bat2 Battery B voltage measured at DC/DC Board. Range 9…12.6V for Li-ION battery
VSYS System voltage at DC/DC Board. This is the monitor input voltage measured at the DC/DC Board
after input voltage selection. Range 9…16.5V.
VBOOST Boost converter’s output voltage at DC/DC Board. Boost converter’s input is VSYS, which is
raised to a higher level for module bus voltage and battery charging, if needed. Range 14…16V.
VMOD Supply voltage for modules. VBOOST is fed through a circuit breaker to VMOD. Range 13.8…16V.
I/O_VMOD Module bus supply voltage that can be connected to Multi I/O Connector at the rear of the
monitor. Connecting depends on the DC/DC Board software. Range when connected: 13.8…16V
+5V At DC/DC Board. Range 4.8...5.3V.
+3.3V At DC/DC Board. Range 3.15…3.45V.
Mod Current Current from module bus voltage VMOD. Depends on the module configuration.
SYS Current Current from system voltage VSYS. Depends on the system configuration and battery
charging.
Bat current Current from or to the battery selected (discharge or charge). Measured at DC/DC Board.
Depends on the system configuration and battery charging.
System power Power from VSYS, calculated by DC/DC Board software. System power = VSYS * SYS
Current
Module power Power from VMOD, calculated by DC/DC Board software. Module power = VMOD * Mod
Current
13
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Power Temp Power supply unit temperature, measured at DC/DC Board.
Therm Not CHG This is subject to change.
Dummy CHG This is subject to change.
CPU Board Temp Temperature measured at CPU Board.
VSYS_OUTVSYS that is connected to CPU Board and Backlight Inverter by a FET.
Measured at CPU Board. Range 9…16.5V.
+3.3V Measured at CPU Board. Range 3.15…3.45V.
+5V Measured at CPU Board. Range 4.75…5.25V.
14
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
1.4.1 WPM Battery
Batts
This page contains information related to the
batteries and power supplies. The power supply
part is practically the same as in Power Page.
Battery information includes also data measured
by the smart batteries themselves and
transmitted to the DC/DC Board via SMBus.
SMBus is System Management Bus, a two-wire
interface closely resembling I2C. SMBus is used
for battery communication.
Batts information section of the page has two
columns: Batt1 for battery A data and Batt2 for
battery B data.
NOTE: Text ‘SMBus’ above Current (SMBus mA) line
shows which battery is connected to the SMBus.
NOTE: When there are two batteries, the software
may read charge information only from one of
the batteries where as the other battery charge
shows -1. This is not indication of the failure and
the other battery can also be charged.
Dev. Chem.
Device chemistry. FM monitor supports only Li-ION batteries.
Full Cap.(mAh)
Full charge capacity of the battery; capacity of the battery when it is fully charged.
Rem. Cap. (mAh)
Remaining battery capacity.
Rel. St. of CHG (%)
Relative state of charge of the battery. Expressed as a percentage of Rem. Cap. (mAh)
/ Full Cap.(mAh).
Current (SMBus mA) Battery current (discharge or charge) measured by the battery, transmitted via SMBus
to DC/DC Board.
Voltage (V)
Battery voltage measured at the DC/DC Board
Voltage (SMBus mV) Battery voltage measured by the battery.
ICHG
Charging power level for charger hardware, this bit can have values high or low. High
is the normal setting, low is used when the DC/DC Board software determines to limit
the total power consumption of the monitor by limiting the charging power (i.e. due to
high temperature).
Batt Temp (°C)
Battery temperature. This is real time data for the battery connected to SMBus.
Max Batt Temp (PMC) This is subject to change.
Max Batt Temp (SMBus)Maximum battery SMBus temperature from entering the service pages. Max values
are updated in real time for the battery connected to the SMBus.
Other measurements See explanation in the previous power pages.
15
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Smart Batt1, Smart Batt2
Clear Temp Maxs
This command is useful only when the WPM Battery Batts view is selected.
The Clear Temp Maxs command clears the maximum values of Batt Temp (SMBus) and
Batt Temp (PMC).
Note: Power temp and CPU temp maxs are not cleared.
These menus give additional battery information via SMBus. Batt1 stands for Battery A, Batt2
for Battery B. If Smart Battx is selected for the battery connected to the SMBus, the menu
contains the following:
16
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
Smart Batt1
Battx information from SMBus (all this
information comes from the battery via SMBus)
Temperature
Battery temperature
Voltage
Battery voltage
Current
Battery current (discharge or
charge)
Avg. Current
Rolling average of the battery
current
Rel. State of Charge
Relative state of charge of the
battery. Expressed as a
percentage of Rem. Cap. (mAh)/
Full Cap.(mAh).
Abs. State of Charge
Absolute state of charge.
Expressed as a percentage of
Rem. Cap. (mAh)/ Design
Capacity (mAh).
Remaining Capacity
Remaining battery capacity (mAh).
Full Charge Capacity
Capacity of the battery when it is fully charged.
Cycle Count
Number of cycles the battery has experienced.
A cycle is an amount of discharge approximately equal to the value of Design Capacity.
The exact value of cycle count threshold is stored in the battery permanent memory.
Design CapacityTheoretical capacity of a new battery.
Design Voltage Theoretical value for nominal voltage of a new battery.
Manufacture Date (DD:MM:YY)
The date the battery pack was manufactured.
Manufacturer Name
Acronym of the battery pack manufacturer name.
Device Name
Battery pack model name.
Device Chemistry
Battery chemistry of the cells used.
Therm. Status from charger
Status of the battery thermistor or code resistor read by Smart Battery Charger IC. The
thermistor or code resistor is always connected to the charger whenever the corresponding
battery is connected to the charger and SMBus.
17
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Smart Batt2
If Smart Battx is selected for a battery NOT
connected to the SMBus, the menu contains the
following:
Battx information from Memory and PMC (This
information comes from the DC/DC Board
memory or is measured by the DC/DC Board.
SMBus data in this menu is not real time, because
this battery is not connected to the SMBus).
NOTE: This page may not contain information if
SMBus has been connected only to the other
battery. Page can be updated by battery
disconnection and reconnection, if desired.
Rel. State Charge
Relative state of charge of the
battery. Expressed as a
percentage of Rem. Cap. (mAh) /
Full Cap.(mAh).
Remaining Capacity
Remaining battery capacity
(mAh).
Full Charge Capacity
Capacity of the battery when it is fully charged.
Design CapacityTheoretical capacity of a new battery.
Design Voltage Theoretical value for nominal voltage of a new battery.
Manufacturer Date (DD:MM:YY)
The date the battery pack was manufactured
Manufacturer Name
Acronym of the battery pack manufacturer name.
Device Name
Battery pack model name.
Device Chemistry
Battery chemistry of the cells used.
Batt1 Voltage
Battery A voltage measured at the DC/DC Board.
Batt2 Voltage
Battery B voltage measured at the DC/DC Board.
Batt Current
Battery current (discharge or charge) for the battery connected to SMBus.
Measured at the DC/DC Board.
Batt Not CHG Temperature
This is subject to change
18
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
2
Display
Geometry views the geometry of the display.
Colors views the color of the screen.
Readability views the readability of the screen.
19
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
3
Keyboard
Keyboard
The service menu for testing the command board
functions.
Upper Led is for testing the upper alarm LED (red)
on the command board. When the text is
highlighted, the upper alarm LED can be turned
on and off by pressing the ComWheel.
Lower Led is for testing the lower alarm LED
(yellow) on the command board. When the text is
highlighted, the lower alarm LED can be turned on
and off by pressing the ComWheel.
Dummy Press is for testing the ComWheel. When
the text is highlighted, pressing the ComWheel
creates a sound from the loudspeaker and the
corresponding number on the service data field
increases.
Service Data
Message count counts the number of messages that are sent out to the main CPU board.
Leds upper and lower indicate the states of the alarm LEDs on the command board.
Direct action keys texts are indications to the command board membrane keys. When a key on the
command board is pressed, the corresponding text in the menu changes its colour.
Control wheel, Press counts the ComWheel pressings.
Control wheel, Clockwise and Counter clockwise indicate the ComWheel turnings.
20
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
3.1 Keyboard Log
Keyboard Scroll Log
All the keyboard presses and the commands
given by the ComWheel are recorded in the
Keyboard Log. The keyboard log is saved in the
permanent memory of the monitor. The length
of the log is 1150 events. The log is FIFO type.
Scroll Stat enables to scroll the keyboard
events.
21
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
4
Parameters
NOTE: Parameter values in Service Data fields are only for reference in this section.
4.1 Gas Unit
22
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
4.1.1 General
Service Data
Module configuration shows which measurement
options are available, i.e. are detected by the module.
Timeouts is a cumulative number that indicates how
many times the module has not responded to the
monitor's inquiry.
Bad checksums is a cumulative number that
indicates how many times communication from the
module to monitor has broken down.
Bad c-s by mod is a cumulative number that indicates
how many communication errors the module has
detected.
The monitor starts counting these items at power up
and resets to zero at power off. The values may also
be reset when a module is attached to the monitor
frame and be set to 32769 or continuous counting
may be started when the module is removed from the
monitor frame.
The nonzero values do not indicate a failure, but the continuous counting (more than 5 per second) or value
32769 indicates either a serial communication failure or a module not in place. Also failures in other modules
may cause these numbers to rise or be set to 32769.
23
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
4.1.2 Gases
Noise Meas
activates the noise measurement.
Sample gain adj adjusts the sampling pump gain,
i.e. for adjusting the sample flow
measurement.
Pump ctrl
A manual control for the sampling
pump.
Zero valve ctrl A manual control for the zero
valve.
Record Data
prints out the shown service data
and board information (id. serial
number and software id.) onto the
recorder module, N-FCREC, NFREC.
Service Data
CO2% field
shows real-time concentrations.
CO2noise-%
is standard deviation of
concentration.
CO2 /channels A-E
mV field: signal is scaled to mV.
Gain: User gain. It is scaled as (User gain)/(Factory gain).
O2, N2O, AA
Not in use with S/5TM Extension Modules
ID
Not in use with S/5TM Extension Modules
ID unrel.
Not in use with S/5TM Extension Modules
Sample Flow
is calculated from differential pressure and adjusted by the module. Zero value as measured
during initialization when the pump is off. Gain: sample flow measurement can be calibrated
by adjusting the gain.
Ambient
Ambient pressure is measured continuously. Amb-Work: ambient pressure - sampling
system internal pressure.
Fall time
Not in use with S/5TM Extension Modules
CO2-O2 Delay
Not in use with S/5TM Extension Modules
Pump
Can be toggled ON/OFF. PWM output 0-100% is shown. Pump voltage is also shown.
Lamp
The state, PWM control, and current of the lamp are shown.
Fan
Not in use with S/5TM Extension Modules
Zero and Occl valve
Can be toggled between the measurement state (MEAS) and zeroing/occlusion states (ZERO/
OCCL).
Temp
Temperatures measured by the module from TPX, CPU, and OM.
Time after power on In minutes after power on.
24
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
4.2 ECG Module
Power freq: Set power frequency; 50 Hz/60 Hz.
Filter low: Set filter low frequency; 0.05 Hz/0.5 Hz.
Filter high: Set filter high frequency; 30 Hz (40 Hz if
power freq is 60 Hz) /150 Hz.
Service Data
Power freq, and Cable type show the values chosen
or detected, Filter low and high defines the selected
filter (Monitor/Diagnostic/ST).
Quick zero module is ON when the ECG signal is
beyond the scale, and therefore, is quickly returned to
optimal range using fast signal processing methods.
All the Quick zero bits are ON at the same time.
Cable shows ON when ECG cable is connected.
Electrode shows ON when each of these electrodes
are connected.
Pacer count is a running number for pacemaker
users.
Button No effect on the module.
Resp Available indicates that ECG hardware is capable of measuring impedance respiration.
Measurement shows ON when the respiration measurement is on.
Amp zero shows ON when zeroing of the respiration amplifier takes place.
Waveform VALUE will be updated in one second interval.
Timeouts is a cumulative number that indicates how many times the module has not responded to the
monitor’s inquiry.
Bad checksums is a cumulative number that indicates how many times communication from the module to the
monitor has broken down.
Bad c-s by mod is a cumulative number that indicates how many communication errors the module has
detected. The monitor starts counting these items at power up and resets to zero at power off. The values may
also be reset when a module is attached to the monitor frame and be set to 32769 or continuous counting may
be started when the module is removed from the monitor frame.
The nonzero values do not indicate a failure, but the continuous counting (more than 5 per second) or value
32769 indicates either a serial communication failure or a module not in place. Also failures in other modules
may cause these numbers to rise or be set to 32769.
RAM indicates the state of the RAM memory.
ROM indicates whether the checksum at the EPROM is in accordance with the one the software has calculated.
EEPROM indicates if the values stored in the permanent memory are valid.
The state is either OK, Fail or ? (module not in place or a communication error).
25
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
4.2.1 ECG Setup
Filter filters the ECG signal high frequency noise and
slow respiratory artefacts.
Monit (monitor) filter is used in routine monitoring. It
effectively filters the artefacts caused by the
electrosurgery unit and respiration.
Diagn (diagnostic) filter is used if more accurate
information of the waveform is needed (e.g. of Pwave or AV block). The diagnostic filter is more
susceptible both to high frequencies and baseline
wander than the monitor filter.
STfilt (ST filter) permits more accurate information of
ST segment. It filters the high frequency artefacts
caused by the electrosurgery unit, but catches the
slow changes in ST segment. The ST filter is more
susceptible to baseline wander than the monitor
filter.
5-lead cable selects five or three electrodes. With the
12-lead ECG the selection is automatic.
Pacemaker selects how to display the pacing pulse
of cardiac pacemaker. The selections are Show, Hide,
ON R and Sensit.
Hide, the pacing pulse is filtered away from ECG data.
Show, the pacer pulse is filtered away from ECG data
but the pulse is displayed as a constant height marker.
ON R, pacing pulses are not filtered away from ECG
data. This improves ECG monitoring with A-V
pacemaker patients, as QRS complexes are counted
even if the pacing pulse hits the QRS complex.
However, during asystole the monitor may count
pacing pulses as heart beats.
Sensit selection uses a more sensitive pacemaker
detection. Pacemaker spike is displayed on ECG.
26
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
4.3 PSM STP
Record Data prints out the shown service
data and board information (id, serial number
and sw id) onto the recorder.
Temp Test activates the automatic
temperature test for the temperature
channels T1 and T2. The result from the test is
shown in the service data field.
NOTE: The Temp Test needs to be selected
twice before the test starts.
Service Data field
Gain is a coefficient to compensate gain error.
Usually the values for P1 and P2 are between
17000 and 25000 and for T1 and T2 between
13000 and 14300.
Zero indicates the offset compensation value
of each parameter in the A/D converter.
Typically the values for P1 and P2 are within
±1000 and for T1 and T2 between -150 and
+300. Calibrate if zero and/or gain value is
outside the ranges.
Cable shows ON when a corresponding cable
is connected to the front panel and Probe
shows ON when a corresponding probe is connected to the cable.
Under Value, the measured numeric values are displayed simultaneously. Pressure values are real time values
and shown in mmHg. Temperature values are shown in degrees Celsius.
The front panel STP keys functions are confirmed by pressing each key and observing that OFF turns to ON at
Button. T1 button is not in use with E-PSM(P).
SpO2 shows the measured beat-to-beat SpO2 value.
Modpr is a modulation % that indicates the AC/DC ratio in the measured signal.
Hr is a pulse rate calculated from every beat.
Cable and Probe can be either OFF or ON, and these indicate the state PROBE OFF.
Under them there is a message field for SpO2. It can be OK, PULSE SEARCH, NO PROBE, PROBE OFF, NO PULSE,
ARTEFACT, POOR SIGNAL, or CHECK PROBE.
27
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Balance between leds is adjusted by changing the intensity of red/infrared. Intensity of infrared (Ired int.) is in
the range of 40 to 255 and red intensity (Red int.) is in the range of 40 to 255.
DC gain shows the gain of DC signal adjusted by the module.
IDC is the value of infrared signal.
RDC is the dc value of red signal.
AC gain is the gain of infrared and red ac signals. AC gain values can be 1 or 0. Value 1 means high ac gain
and 0 means low gain.
Pre gain is a preamplifier gain for infrared and red signals. Pre gain values can be 1 or 0. Value 1 means
normal operation. Value 0 means that signal levels are very low and extra gain is taken into use.
Temp error shows the status of the temperature test. No errors found show the status (OFF) and errors found
(ON).
Protect key shows normally OFF but turns to ON when the button at the bottom of the module is pressed.
Protect mode is normally ON. It turns to OFF, when Protect is switched to OFF for the temperature calibration
in Calibration Menu.
Configuration shows the chosen module configuration: TP, ST, or STP.
Timeouts is a cumulative number that indicates how many times the module has not responded to the
monitor’s inquiry.
Bad checksums is a cumulative number that indicates how many times communication from the module to
the monitor has broken down.
Bad c-s by mod is a cumulative number that indicates how many communication errors the module has
detected. The monitor starts counting these items at power up and resets to zero at power off. The nonzero
values do not indicate a failure, but the continuous counting (more than 5 per second) indicates either a serial
communication failure, or a module not in place. Also other modules can cause communication errors that
cause these numbers rise.
RAM indicates the state of the RAM memory.
ROM indicates whether the checksum at the EPROM is in accordance with the one the software has
calculated.
EEPROM indicates if the values stored in the permanent memory are valid.
The state is either OK, Fail or ? (module not in place or a communication error).
28
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
4.3.1 Calibrations
Protection: Protection for the configuration can be
set ON and OFF.
Set Config: The module configuration should be
set according to the module type. The setting is
possible only when the protection is set OFF. The
available selections are TP, ST or STP. The
configuration setting should be checked, if the STP
board is replaced.
Calibrate T1 / Calibrate T2: The functions are for
calibrating the temperature channels T1 and T2.
Calibrate P1 / Calibrate P2: The functions are for
calibrating the invasive blood pressure channels
P1 and P2.
How to calibrate T1/ T2
The calibrations are possible only when the protection is set OFF. The temperature calibration
requires accurate test plugs of value 25 °C and 45 °C.
1.
Select Calibrate T1/Calibrate T2.
2.
Insert the test plug 25 °C into the T1/T2 connector.
3.
Press the ComWheel.
4.
Insert the test plug 45 °C into the T1/T2 connector.
5.
Press the ComWheel.
How to calibrate P1/ P2
The calibrations require a pressure transducer (with appropriate cable) and a pressure
manometer.
1.
Connect the pressure transducer with the pressure manometer to the P1/P2 connector.
Select Calibrate P1/Calibrate P2. Leave the transducer to room air pressure.
2.
Press the ComWheel to start zeroing.
3.
Supply a pressure of 100 mmHg to 300 mmHg to the transducer. The recommended
pressure is 200 mmHg.
4.
Set the pressure on the display to match the pressure reading on the manometer and
press the ComWheel.
29
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
4.4 NIBP Module
Service menu for Non-invasive Blood Pressure
Modules.
Service Data
Pressure shows the measured pressure multiplied by
10. This value is automatically zero-drift
compensated.
Zero shows the difference between the zeroing value
in the permanent memory (stored when the module
is calibrated) and the current automatic zero-drift
compensation multiplied by 10. The value can
change between +20 and -20 mmHg. If the zero drift
exceeds ± 10 mmHg, the module should be
recalibrated.
Protect handle indicates hardware protection for
EEPROM memory. It should be ON all the time in
normal operation. If it is OFF data can not be read
from or written to EEPROM, only the calibration
protection can be set or reset by software. It can be
turned to OFF by pressing the the NIBP module
buttons Auto ON/OFF and Start Cancel simultaneously for 3 seconds, which also enables Protection ON/
OFF menu selection in the calibration menu.
Calibr. prot. shows software calibration protection and it should be OFF to enable calibration.
+15 V power refers to legacy NIBP modules. Not used in E-PSM(P).
AD0 to AD7 show the values of each eight channels of the A/D converter. AD7 is not used in E-PSM(P).
Timeouts is a cumulative number that indicates how many times the module has not responded to the
monitor’s inquiry.
Bad checksums is a cumulative number that indicates how many times communication from the module to
the monitor has broken down.
Bad c-s by mod is a cumulative number that indicates how many communication errors the module has
detected. The monitor starts counting these items at power up and resets to zero at power off. The nonzero
values do not indicate a failure, but the continuous counting (more than 5 per second) indicates either a serial
communication failure, or a module not in place. Also other modules can cause communication errors that
cause these numbers rise.
RAM indicates the state of the RAM memory.
ROM indicates whether the checksum in the EPROM is in accordance with the one the software has
calculated.
EEPROM indicates if the values stored in the permanent memory are valid.
The state is either OK, Fail or ? (module not in place or a communication error).
30
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
4.4.1 NIBP Demo
A service menu for demonstrating the
oscillometric method of NIBP measurement. The
menu shows the real-time pressure signals that
are measured from the NIBP cuff. The
measurement result is shown in the adjoining digit
field.
Wave Recording is for selecting the recording
option. If ON is selected, the pressure signals are
printed out in real-time on the recorder after the
recorder Start/Stop button is pressed.
Remove menu widens the displayed waveform
area.
The menu can be closed by selecting the Previous
Menu or just by pressing the ComWheel if the
Remove menu was selected.
31
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
4.4.2 NIBP Calibration
Active Leak Test: Wrap an adult cuff around a pipe
and connect the cuff to the module. Select the
active leak test (ON). The module automatically
pumps a pressure of 260 mmHg into the cuff. Wait
for several seconds until the pressure stabilizes.
Then check that the pressure reading does not drop
more than 6 mmHg per minute. If it does, leaking
point(s) should be detected and fixed. Cancel the
test by selecting the Active leak test OFF.
Calibration Check: After the calibration check is
selected (ON), the module zeroes the pressure
transducers at the beginning of the calibration
check. Do not pump pressure until the text
‘Calibrating’ appears in the NIBP digit field or the
zeroing will fail. After the zeroing is done, manually
pump pressure into the module and make sure that
the same pressure values are shown both on the
display and on the manometer. Pressure of both
pressure channels B1 and B2 are shown. The
pressure values are automatically zerocompensated, so the readings of B1 and B2 should be the same as the manometer readings.
Protection: Software calibration protection (ON/OFF). Select OFF when calibrating. Protection selection
becomes available in the menu after pressing the NIBP module buttons Auto ON/OFF and Start/Cancel
simultaneously for 3 seconds.
How to Calibrate
Calibration selection is available only when protection is OFF.
NOTE: Both channels B1 and B2 must be calibrated simultaneously.
NOTE: The module must be in the frame during the whole procedure.
NIBP calibration can be performed in the NIBP Service menu as follows:
1.
If Protection is ON, change it to OFF by pressing the NIBP module buttons Auto ON/OFF
and Start Cancel simultaneously for 3 seconds, which enables the Protection selection.
Select protection OFF in the calibration menu and press the ComWheel. Then press the
buttons again for 3 seconds to enable Calibration.
NOTE: When the buttons have been pressed, the NIBP field shows an error message
‘Calibration switch on!’.
NOTE: When calibration is enabled, a message ‘Calibration not protected’ appears.
2.
For proper zeroing to take place, remove the hose from the front panel connector. Select
Calibration and push the ComWheel. Messages ‘Zeroing’ and ‘Zeroed’ will appear in the
NIBP message field. After this, a pressure bar will appear beside the menu and the text
‘Calibrating’ will appear in NIBP digit field.
3.
Connect an external mercury manometer with a pump to the module through the both
tubes of the hose. Pump up to about 200 mmHg pressure (range of 150 to 300 mmHg
allowed) according to the manometer. Verify that both pressure values in the prompt field
match the manometer reading. If not, adjust by turning the ComWheel.
32
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
4.
When the values are equal, push the ComWheel to confirm the calibration. After a few
seconds the ‘Calibrated’ message will appear in the NIBP digit field, which means that the
calibration data has now been saved.
NOTE: When calibrating NIBP, always change the displayed pressure value slightly with the
ComWheel, even in cases where the value would be correct. For example, change the value
one step higher and then back one step lower. The ‘Calibrated’ text should appear in the
display. This ensures that the calibration procedure is correctly registered and stored by the
module.
5.
Use the module buttons again to enable Protection setting and set it ON, and finally
disable Protection setting.
4.4.3 NIBP Safety Valve
Test: Start test is for starting and Stop test is for
stopping the Safety Valve test.
Safety Valve Data:
For information on general items Pressure, Zero,
Protect handle, Calibr. prot., +15 V power, AD0 to
AD7 as well as Timeouts etc., see service data
descriptions in section “4.4 NIBP Module”.
Max. press and 2 s after stop show the measured
values at Safety Valve test.
Safety Valve Test Adult/Infant
Wrap an adult cuff around a pipe and connect the
cuff to the module. Highlight Start test and give the
ComWheel a push. The test ends automatically or
when Stop test (appears in place of Start test) is
pushed.
Max. press indicates the pressure at which the
safety valve opens and is normally 300 ±15 mmHg
for adult and 150 mmHg ±15 mmHg for infant.
2 s after stop indicates the pressure at 2 seconds
after the pump has stopped and is normally > 270 mmHg for adult and > 130 mmHg for infant. If the value is
less, check leakage by the active leak test.
33
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
4.4.4 NIBP Pulse Valve
Start test is for starting and Stop test is for
stopping the test.
Set Valve lets you adjust the opening of the pulse
valve.
Pulse Valve Data
For information on general items Pressure, Zero,
Protect handle, Calibr. prot., +15 V power, AD0 to
AD7 as well as Timeouts etc., see section “4.4 NIBP
Module”.
How to check Pulse Valve
Wrap an adult cuff around a pipe and connect the cuff to the module. Select Start test and
push the ComWheel. The pressure rises beyond 240 mmHg and stops. The pulse valve opens.
The module counts the time it takes for the pressure to go down from 240 mmHg to 50 mmHg
and displays it on the screen. The test can be manually stopped by selecting Stop test.
The valve can be adjusted between 0 and 255 (0 for fully closed and 255 for fully open). First
select Set Valve and push the ComWheel. See the pulse valve value and adjust it by turning the
ComWheel. Then push the ComWheel to confirm the value.
The Interval 240 mmHg -> 50 mmHg time should be less than 60 seconds when the valve is
150 and less than 10 when fully opened (255). When fully closed (0), the system should be
airtight and the pressure does not drop. Depending on an individual, the pulse valve may
remain closed up to approx. value 100.
If the measured time deviates much from those above, then the pulse valve or its tubes are
faulty.
34
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
4.4.5 NIBP Buttons/Leds
The selections Auto ON/OFF, Manual ON/OFF, STAT ON/OFF, and Measur. ON/OFF.
Buttons/Leds Data
For information on general items Pressure, Zero,
Protect handle, Calibr. prot., +15 V power, AD0 to
AD7 as well as Timeouts etc., see section “4.4 NIBP
Module”.
Buttons Checking
The front panel keys function is confirmed by
pressing and releasing the key and observing that
OFF turns to ON at Auto On/Off, and Start Cancel.
Set Cycle Time and STAT On/Off are not in use with
E-PSM(P).
35
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
4.4.6 NIBP Pneumatics
Start Pump/Stop Pump: A manual control for the
pump. The selection changes to Stop Pump when the
pump turns on.
Open Exh1/Close Exh1: This function is not used
with E-PSM(P) modules.
Open Exh2/Close Exh2: A manual control for the
exhaust valve 2. The selection changes to Close Exh2
when the valve is opened.
Open Zero valve: This function is not in use with EPSM(P) modules.
Set Valve: The opening of the pulse valve is adjusted
between 0 and 255 (0 for fully closed and 255 for fully
open). First push the ComWheel, then turn it to adjust
the value on the screen and finally push to set the
value.
Reset Clock is not in use with E-PSM(P) modules.
Pneumatics Data field
For information on general items Pressure, Zero,
Protect handle, Calibr. prot., +15 V power, AD0 to AD7 as well as Timeouts etc., see section “4.4 NIBP
Module”.
Pump, Exh1 Valve, and Exh2 Valve show their states. NOTE: Exh1 Valve has no effect on the module.
Pulse Valve shows how much the valve is opened (0 to 255) during Valve Setting.
How to check Interval 20 mmHg -> 185 mmHg
Select Start pump at different combinations of the valves open/closed and push the
ComWheel. The module counts the time it takes for the pressure to go up from 20 mmHg to
185 mmHg and displays it. When all the valves are closed, the pump should be able to pump
the pressure in about 1 to 4 seconds into an adult cuff wrapped around a pipe. The pump does
not stop without selecting Stop Pump by pushing the ComWheel.
36
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
4.4.7 NIBP Watchdog
Test ADULT: No effect on the module.
Test INFANT: No effect on the module.
Stop Test: No effect on the module.
Watchdog Data field
For information on general items Pressure, Zero,
Protect handle, Calibr. prot., +15 V power, AD0 to
AD7 as well as Timeouts etc., see section “4.4 NIBP
Module”.
Watchdog Interval: No effect on the module.
Adult watchdog time testing
No effect on the module.
Infant watchdog time testing
No effect on the module.
37
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
4.5 DIS Interfacing
4.5.1 Interfacing
How to interface
To select the parameter data source:
•
•
•
Press the Monitor Setup and select Interfacing.
Select the desired measurement parameter.
Select the desired source by name.
NOTE: The name of the device is visible on the list only if the device is correctly connected to the
module.
38
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
4.5.2 Status Page
Access via Monitor setup - Interfacing.
The selection Next page is available, if more than 8
DIS modules are connected to the DIS bus
simultaneously.
Interfaces
The menu displays a list of all connected DIS modules
and the statuses of the corresponding external
devices.
If the bus voltage is too low, you cannot add more
devices. ‘DIS module bus voltage low. Do not add
more devices or reduce cable length’ message
appears.
4.5.3 DIS Interfacing service menu
Access via Monitor setup - Install/ServiceService
The menu displays submenus for all connected DIS
modules.
39
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
4.5.4 DIS Module specific page
Service Data
Product name: DIS module name.
Product type: DIS module type.
Driver sw id: DIS module software and its release
date.
Short product name: DIS module name.
Module serial number: DIS module serial number.
HW card type: PCB type.
HW id: DIS module PCB identification number.
HW test date: DIS module PCB testing date.
Unit serial number: DIS module PCB serial
number.
Comment field: Indicates the status of the
external device.
bus voltage: DIS bus voltage.
tout: DIS module timeouts, seen by the monitor. The value should not increase more than by 5 per second.
cse: DIS module checksum errors, seen by the monitor. The value should not increase more than by 5 per
second.
rx: The number of data packets from the external device received by the DIS module.
rx err: The number of data errors from the external device received by the DIS module.
tx: The number of data packets to the external device sent by the DIS module.
Ram: Status of DIS module RAM memory.
Rom: Status of DIS module ROM memory.
EEPROM: Status of DIS module EEPROM memory.
40
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
5
Set/Test
The power supply unit contains a watchdog
circuitry, which needs refreshment at every 1.5
seconds. If the refreshment did not occur, the
watchdog circuitry will reset the main CPU. In
normal operation, the main CPU refreshes the
watchdog circuitry at every 0.2 seconds.
The purpose of the watchdog circuitry is to restart
the monitor, if there was a serious malfunction.
This feature is useful in two cases: when the main
CPU is not able to control the monitor, or when
the CPU controls the monitor but detects a
serious malfunction. Watchdog tests check
proper functionality of the watchdog circuitry in
various conditions.
Watchdog test ensures directly that the
watchdog of the power unit functions properly.
Choosing this test prevents the watchdog
circuitry from refreshing and shows running
seconds with an accuracy of 0.1 seconds.
The test should have the following result when
the watchdog circuitry is working properly: The monitor will restart after 1.5 seconds from the start of the
test. In malfunction: ‘>20 s’ is displayed, and the test will be interrupted. In this case, the fault is in the
watchdog circuitry of the power unit.
WD by Overload test ensures the functionality of a feature, where the software controls the monitor, but
detects an overload situation in the main CPU.
The test should have the following result when the feature is working properly: The monitor will restart after
15 seconds from the start of the test.
Factory Reset restores the factory default settings and clears the data memories. Factory reset should be
run if the monitor software is replaced or if the SRAM/Timekeeper battery is replaced.
41
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
5.1 Country Settings
Language
Select the software language.
National Reqs
Select the software features, which include national
requirements.
Power Frequency
Set the power frequency (50 Hz/60 Hz). This setting is
used to filter out possible power frequency
interference from the parameter measurements.
Time format
Set the time format of the real time clock (24 h/12 h).
42
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
6
Service Log
Error, event, alarm and maintenance data is stored in Service Log.
The service log contains information about the occurred monitor errors, events and alarms since the last
factory reset or service log reset. The service log is saved in the EEPROM memory of the main CPU board. The
user can also store different maintenance events in the maintenance log.
Maintenance menu is for setting and viewing the
maintenance information of the monitor.
Error History is for selecting the error history view
onto the right side of the menu.
Event History is for selecting the event history view
onto the right side of the menu.
Alarm History is for selecting the alarm history view
onto the right side of the menu.
Scroll Last Er (Ev) is for scrolling the error / event /
alarm information on the right side of the menu.
Scroll Counters is for scrolling the error / event /
alarm counters on the right side of the menu.
Record Data is for recording the service log
information onto the recorder.
Reset Log is for clearing up the content of the
service log. This function should be run after a
performed maintenance. In Error/Event history view,
the Reset Log command clears up both the error and
the event log. In the Alarm History view, the Reset
Log command resets only the alarm history log.
43
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
6.1 Maintenance
The Maintenance History Log gives the user a possibility to store the maintenance history of the monitor. The
user can store different planned maintenance (PM) events, repairs and upgrades in the maintenance history
log.
Running hours: shows how many hours the monitor
has been on. User cannot reset this value.
since This date and time is set at the factory and it
shows the manufacturing date and time. User
cannot reset this date and time.
since last 1 year PM: shows the running hours since
the last 1 year PM storing.
Last events: The section shows the last
maintenance events and the time of their
occurrence.
Event counters: The section contains counters for
each different maintenance events. The time of
occurrence of the last event is shown beside each
counter.
6.1.1 Planned Maintenance
1 Year PM gives you the possibility to store a 1 year
PM event in the maintenance history log.
Other PM gives you the possibility to store another
PM event in the maintenance history log.
Notify on PM This feature is for future purposes.
44
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
6.1.2 Repair
The repair menu gives the user a possibility to store
repair events in the maintenance history log. The
different repairs that can be saved are: Display,
Power Supply, Recorder, Frame (e.g. board in the
frame), Parameters (e.g. a board in the parameter
module) or Other (a miscellaneous repair not
specified by previous options).
6.1.3 Upgrade
The upgrade menu gives the user a possibility to
store the upgrades in the maintenance history log.
45
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
7
Record Data
In this menu, the user can specify where to print
from any service menu. The setting goes into the
permanent memory of the monitor. Only one
option can be chosen at a time. The options where
to print are: To Printer, To Recorder and To
Memory Card. Only the option To Recorder can be
selected. When the front panel key for the recorder
is pressed, the output is the recorder despite of the
setting of the Record Data menu.
46
Document no. M1187329-003
Service Menu
8
SW Download
Menu for downloading monitor software via the
network port.
Enable Download enables software download mode
and restarts the monitor.
CPU serial number shows the serial number of the
CPU board.
The SWDL tool is intended to be used by GE Healthcare
service organization and authorized distributors only.
For more information on the SWDL tool, see
“Software Download Tool - User Instructions.”
8.1 Remote Access
Remote Access menu is for setting the interface with
an external PC that runs the Virtual Support software,
which is a service diagnostic tool for remote
diagnostics purposes.
When the access mode is set to Normal (the default),
the PC can only read service menu data from the
monitor.
With the access mode Extended, the PC can also
activate the monitor’s service menu functions.
NOTE: Patient monitoring is not possible, when the
access mode Extended is selected. The access mode
turns back to Normal, if the monitor is restarted or if
the service menu is closed.
47
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
For your notes:
48
Document no. M1187329-003
Datex-Ohmeda
Frame for FM
Technical Reference Manual Slot
Conformity according to the Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning Medical Devices amended by 2007/47/EC
CAUTION: U.S. Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a licensed medical practitioner.
Outside the USA, check local laws for any restriction that may apply.
All specifications subject to change without notice.
Document number M1187335-004
9 February, 2012
GE Healthcare Finland Oy
Kuortaneenkatu 2
FI-00510 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: +358 10 39411
Fax: +358 9 1463310
www.gehealthcare.com
Copyright 2010, 2012 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Table of contents
Table of contents
Table of contents
i
Table of figures
iii
Introduction
1
1
Specifications
2
1.1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
2
Functional description
2.1
2.2
3
Frame for FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.1 Electrical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.2 Environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MemCards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wireless Network, F-FMW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Outputs, direct ECG and synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1.1 Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1.2 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1.3 CPU board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.1.4 DC/DC board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.1.5 AC/DC unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.1.6 Module bus cable unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.1.7 Interconnection board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.1.8 Display connection board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.1.9 Front cover parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.1.10 Wireless LAN option, F-FMW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.1.11 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Connectors and signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.2.1 External connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.2.2 Digital and analog outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2.3 Printer connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Service procedures
3.1
3.2
5
21
General service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.2.1 S/5 FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.2.2 Recommended tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.2.3 Recommended parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.2.4 Before beginning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.2.5 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.2.6 Recorder Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
i
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
4
3.2.7 MemCard option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.2.8 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.2.9 Wireless LAN option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.2.10 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
S/5 FM disassembly and reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.3.1 Before disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.3.2 Handling and storage of LCD display component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.4.1 Battery indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.4.2 To change the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.4.3 To check the battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.4.4 Conditioning the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
To replace the fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.5.1 Primary fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.5.2 Fuse for external DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
To download the software on CPU board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Adjustments and calibrations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Troubleshooting
4.1
4.2
4.3
50
S/5 Frame for FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Memory option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
NET section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Appendix A:
Service check form, Datex-Ohmeda S/5 Frame for FM, F-FM
ii
Document no. M1187335-004
A-1
List of figures
Table of figures
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
Figure 4
Figure 5
Figure 6
Figure 7
Figure 8
Figure 9
Figure 10
Figure 11
Figure 12
Figure 13
Figure 14
Figure 15
S/5 Frame for FM......................................................................................................................................................................... 1
FM Monitor connection block diagram.............................................................................................................................. 6
CPU board F-FM(W)-01 .............................................................................................................................................................. 7
CPU board F-FM(W)-00 .............................................................................................................................................................. 8
DC/DC Board .................................................................................................................................................................................. 9
DC/DC board block diagram.................................................................................................................................................10
AC/DC unit .....................................................................................................................................................................................11
Module bus cable unit..............................................................................................................................................................12
Interconnection board.............................................................................................................................................................12
Display connection board ......................................................................................................................................................13
Parts inside Front cover...........................................................................................................................................................13
External connectors of Frame for FM ...............................................................................................................................15
Multi I/O adapter.........................................................................................................................................................................17
Inserting a battery .....................................................................................................................................................................47
Capacity indicator on the battery.......................................................................................................................................47
iii
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
iv
Document no. M1187335-004
Frame for FM
Introduction
This section provides information about the maintenance and service of the following
products:
•
•
•
S/5 Frame for FM, F-FM.
Software Licenses L-FICU04, L-FICU04A. L-FICU06, L-FICU06A.
WLAN option F-FMW.
Figure 1
S/5 Frame for FM
1
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
1
Specifications
1.1 Frame for FM
Dimensions
Height
302 mm (11.8 in)Handle Up
274 mm (10.7 in)Handle Down
Width
302 mm (11.8 in) Without modules
337 mm (13.3 in) With modules
Depth
143 mm (5.6 in) Without extension module
156 mm (6.1 in) With extension module
200 mm (7.8 in) With extension and PSM modules
Weight
FM
FM + E-PSM
FM + N-FCREC + E-PSM
5.0 kg
5.6 kg
6.6 kg
FM without modules, batteries included
FM with PSM
FM with PSM and extension module with recorder and CO2
1.1.1 Electrical requirements
Any fluctuations within the specified limits do not affect the performance.
Mains input
Rated voltage
100 - 10% to 240 10% Vac
Rated current
1.25A at 100V, 625mA at 240V
Rated frequencies
50/60Hz
Power consumption 150 VA
Ext. DC Input
Cooling
Voltage
10 - 16V
Current
6 A max
(External DC power for future use)
Convection
1.1.2 Environmental requirements
Operating temperature
normal operation
while charging batteries
Storage temperature
Relative humidity
Atmospheric pressure
10 to 40°C
50 to 104 °F
10 to 35°C
50 to 95 °F
-20 to +60°C
-4 to 140 °F
10 … 90%. Non-condensing
670 to 1060 mbar (500 to 800 mmHg, 670 to 1060 hPa)
1.2 LCD display
Display size
Display type
Resolution
Number of waveforms
Number of digit fields
Display layout and colors
Horizontal viewing angles
2
Document no. M1187335-004
10.4 in (diagonal)
Active Matrix Color TFT LCD
SVGA 800x600
Up to 6
Up to 4
User-configurable
Left and right side 50°
Frame for FM
Vertical viewing angles
Lower side 45°
Upper side 35°
Backlight
cold cathode fluorescent lamp, replaceable
Backlight lifetime
40 000 h
Backlight intensity
250 Cd/m2 typ.
Integrated Command Board with direct function keys, menu keys and ComWheel for selections and
adjustments in menus.
1.3 Batteries
Number of batteries
Battery type
Voltage
Capacity
Capacity indicator
Operation time
Charge time
Battery life
Conditioning
2
Exchangeable Lithium-Ion
11.1V (nominal)
3.5 Ah
Fuel gauge on monitor screen and on battery pack
up to 4.5 hours
2.5 hours per battery pack
300 cycles to 50% capacity
Manual
1.4 MemCards
MemCard capacity
Data storage capacity
Operating system
File system
MemCards
6 MB minimum
2 days of continuous physiological data trends
Datalight ROM-DOS
MS-DOS compatible
PCMCIA-ATA compatible memory cards
1.5 Network
Connector type
Network type
Isolation
Network ID
Communication protocol
Network Connectivity
RJ-45
10 Base-T
1500 V, 60/50Hz, 1 min.
Network ID key and virtual network ID
DRI 01, 02 and 03
D-O Central and iCentral
Meets IEEE802.3 specifications (10MBASE-T)
Hospital grade approved data transformer
Coding element interface
1.6 Wireless Network, F-FMW
Type
Frequency range
Data rate
Output power
Data transmission
Security
Built-in transceiver and antenna
Worldwide product covering 2.4 to 2.5 GHz, programmable for
different country regulations
11 Mbps per channel (max.)
100 mW
IEEE 802.11b compliant, Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS)
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) 40 and 128 bit encryption
3
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
1.7 Analog Outputs, direct ECG and synchronization
ECG
InvBP
From first user lead (ECG1)
Gain:
1 V/1mV ±20%
Delay:
< 15 ms
DC offset:
±100 mV max.
Output range:
±4 V
Noise:
50 mVpp max.
Frequency response: 0.05 Hz to 40 Hz
From pressure channel P1
Gain:
10 mV/1 mmHg ±20%
Delay:
< 35 ms
DC offset:
±100 mV
Output range:
-0.4 V to +3.2 V
Noise:
50 mVpp max.
The pacemaker pulses have been replaced with 2 ms/5 V fixed digital pulses at the ECG analog output for
IABP or defibrillator equipment. A device that fulfils the requirements of the IEC 60601-1 standard can be
connected to the defibrillator & IABP synchronization connector. There are no other limitations, because
the signals of the connector are galvanically isolated from patient applied part of the ECG and invasive
blood pressure measurements.
Synchronization pulse
Pulse width
Delay
Amplitude
Output impedance
Current limit
10 ms positive pulse
< 35 ms (R-wave peak to
leading edge of pulse)
CMOS compatible
3.5 V min. at 1 mA sourcing
0.5 V max. at 5 mA sinking
50 ohm
10 mA
The signal requires input impedance of 100 k
1.8 Digital outputs
Nurse call
Serial Output
4
Document no. M1187335-004
Low State: 0 - 0.5V; High State: 3.5 - 5V
Generated on red and yellow alarms
Asynchronous
Serial data interface, uses RS-232 standard
Baud rate max 115.2 kbps
Parity: None; Data bits: 8; Stop bit: 1
Frame for FM
2
Functional description
2.1 Main components
2.1.1 Keyboards
User interface parts
Vertical and Horizontal Membrane keypad containing 20 keys. The keypads are foil membrane
keypads. The keypads are connected to the UPI section of the CPU board.
ComWheel is used for menu selection.
2.1.2 Display
The 10.4” LCD display with SVGA 800 x 600 resolution has bright long live lamps and a wide
viewing angle.
NOTE: The LCD display backlight circuit runs on a high voltage. Do not touch the inverter board
or the backlight tube leads when powered.
Backlights
Replaceable backlight lamp unit consists of two integrated cold cathode fluorescent lamps.
The backlight lamp unit is driven by a separate inverter board.
5
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
FLEXIBLE
FLEXIBLE
MONITOR
MONITOR
(FM)
(FM)
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
BLOCK
BLOCK
DIAGRAM
DIAGRAM
15.9V
15.9V
+/-2%
+/-2%
$
EXTDC
EXTDC
ID DATA
ID DATA
SERIAL
SERIAL
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
SERIAL
SERIAL
DATA
DATA
+3.3V
+3.3V
& +5V
& +5V
?Z
PMC
PMC
DATA
DATA
PMC
PMC
DATA
DATA
;
?
NETWORK
NETWORK
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
BOARD
BOARD
ETHERNET
ETHERNET
DATA
DATA
CPU
CPU
BOARD
BOARD
CWCW
& XY
& XY
+3.3V
+3.3V
& +5V
& +5V
SWSW
LOAD
LOAD
PCMCIA
PCMCIA
CARD
CARD
^
?
CFCF
WLAN
WLAN
CARD
CARD
\::Z\
ALARM
ALARM
LEDS
LEDS
VSYS_OUT
VSYS_OUT
SPEAKER
SPEAKER
?
;
MODBUS
MODBUS
DATA
DATA
VMOD
VMOD
POW
POW
LEDS
LEDS
MODBUS DATA
VMOD
MODBUS DATA
VMOD
ALARM LEDS
CW & XY
ALARM LEDS
CW & XY
?Z
POW LEDS
?
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
BACKLIGHT
BACKLIGHT
CTRL
CTRL
POW LEDS
?
VERTICAL
VERTICAL
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
?
\::Z\
EXTDC
EXTDC
COMWHEEL
COMWHEEL
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
NETWORK
NETWORK
ID ID
SERIAL
SERIAL
DATA
DATA
?;
?
KEYBOARD
KEYBOARD
(REMCO)
(REMCO)
BAT2
BAT2
DC/DC
DC/DC
BOARD
BOARD
MULTI
MULTI
I/OI/O
ADAPTER
ADAPTER
KB DATA
KB DATA
ID DATA
ID DATA
BAT1
BAT1
= PIN-TO-PIN
= PIN-TO-PIN
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
>
KB DATA
KB DATA
INTERCONNECTION
INTERCONNECTION
BOARD
BOARD
SMBUS
SMBUS
>
= CABLE
= CABLE
OROR
WIRES
WIRES
NETWORK CONNECTOR
?
RJ-45 10BASE-T
NETWORK
CONNECTOR
@'
RJ-45 10BASE-T
\>$]
>
AC/DC
AC/DC
POWER
POWER
#
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
[
= I/O
= I/O
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
MULTI I/O CONNECTOR
MULTI I/O CONNECTOR
>
?
BAT2
$
BAT2
SMBUS
BAT1
FILTER
FILTER
BOARD
BOARD
[
?
EXTERNAL
EXTERNAL
DCDC
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
10-16.5V
10-16.5V
SMART
SMART
BATTERY
BATTERY
B B
Li-ION
Li-ION
9-12.6V
9-12.6V
SMBUS
SMBUS
SMART
SMART
BATTERY
BATTERY
A A
Li-ION
Li-ION
9-12.6V
9-12.6V
SMBUS
BAT1
ACAC
INLET
INLET
90-264Vac
90-264Vac
47-63Hz
47-63Hz
[>
!
#$
!
#$
#$'*,
'8:;<
CONNECTION
CONNECTION
BOARD
BOARD
;
^
Z
;
BACKLIGHT
BACKLIGHT
INVERTER
INVERTER
VSYS_OUT
VSYS_OUT
& &
BACKLIGHT
BACKLIGHT
CTRL
CTRL
CWCW
USER
USER
MODBUS
MODBUS
CABLE
CABLE
XY XY
PANEL
PANEL
UNIT
UNIT
VMOD
VMOD
VMOD
VMOD
SYNC
SYNC
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
UNIT
UNIT
MODBUS
MODBUS
DATA
DATA
MODULEBUS
MODULEBUS
;
XY XY
HORISONTAL
HORISONTAL
?
CONTROL
CONTROL POW
POW
LEDS
LEDS
10.4"
10.4"
SVGA
SVGA
;
CCFL
CCFL
BACKLIGHT
BACKLIGHT
LAMPS
LAMPS
Z
ANALOG
ANALOG
OUT
OUT
INTERFACE
INTERFACE
BOARD
BOARD
'Q
LCD
LCD
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DEFIB
DEFIB
& &
IABP
IABP
SYNC
SYNC
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
DIS
DIS
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
PANEL
PANEL
BOARD
BOARD
BOARD
BOARD
?
BOARD
BOARD
GREEN
GREEN
ORANGE
ORANGE REDRED
YELLOW
YELLOW
GREEN
GREEN
Figure 2
6
Document no. M1187335-004
>
?
RED
RED
/ YELLOW
/ YELLOW
FM Monitor connection block diagram
:#^`be
ALARM
ALARM
LEDS
LEDS
?
POWER
POWER
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM
;
INDICATOR
INDICATOR
INDICATOR
INDICATOR
LIGHT
LIGHT
M1035159_00.vsd
POW
POW
LEDS
LEDS
M1035159_00.vsd
?
Frame for FM
2.1.3 CPU board
F-FM(W)-01
Figure 3
CPU board F-FM(W)-01
The board is based on AMD Élan SC520 microcontroller. Other features include a flat panel
display controller, 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet interface, PCMCIA interface, sound system and
Renesas H8SX based UPI.
The CPU section takes care of the central processing.
The main features are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Élan SC520 processor
Internal clock frequency 133MHz
32 Mbytes SDRAM
16+16 Mbytes flash memory
32 Kbytes static RAM with real time clock
4 channel UART:

3 serial channels with signals in AC logic level

1 serial channel signals in RS232 level
Programmable alarm sound generator
PC-card slot
The SRAM with real-time clock is backed up by a lithium battery.
CAUTION
Lithium battery on the CPU board. Dispose of the battery in accordance with
local environmental and waste disposal regulations.
Connectors
Interconnection board connector X3
Flat panel connector X7 (to display connection board)
Speaker connector X17
Analog output board connector X4 (to sync connector board)
7
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Ethernet connector X14 (network cable to network connector board)
System watchdog and voltage supervision
There is a voltage supervisor chip that controls +1.2V, +2.5V, +3.3V and +5V internal operating
voltages and it generates system reset if undervoltage situation occurs in monitored voltages.
There is a separate watchdog supervisor chip that generates system reset if watchdog refresh
period exceeds 1.6 seconds.
F-FM(W)-00
Figure 4
CPU board F-FM(W)-00
The board is based on AMD 486DX4 microprocessor and Radisys R400EX chip set. Other
features include a flat panel display controller, 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interface, PCMCIA interface,
sound system and Hitachi H8S based UPI.
The CPU section takes care of the central processing.
The main features are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
486 processor
Internal clock frequency 100MHz
32 Mbytes DRAM
8 Mbytes program flash memory
32 Kbytes static RAM with real time clock
4 channel UART:

2 serial channels with signals in AC logic level

2 serial channel signals in RS232 level
Programmable alarm sound generator
PC-card slot for software updates
The SRAM with real-time clock is backed up by a lithium battery.
CAUTION
Lithium battery on the CPU board. Dispose of the battery in accordance with
local environmental and waste disposal regulations.
8
Document no. M1187335-004
Frame for FM
Connectors
Interconnection board connector X3
Flat panel connector X7 (to display connection board)
Speaker connector X17
Analog output board connector X4 (to sync connector board)
Ethernet connector X20 (network cable to network connector board)
System watchdog and voltage supervision
There are two voltage supervision chips that control the system reset signals.
The +3.3V supervision chip outputs reset signals for +3.3V devices. Reset is activated when
voltage is below 3.08V. It also has a watchdog that is refreshed in normal operation and in
standby.
The +5V supervision chip outputs reset signals for +5V devices. Reset is activated when voltage
is below 4.63V. +5V reset causes also +3.3V reset through a FET.
2.1.4 DC/DC board
The DC/DC board converts the output voltage of AC/DC unit, external DC unit (External DC
power for future use) or battery voltage to various supply voltages for the electronics of FM
monitor. The DC/DC board takes care of the battery charging.
Figure 5
DC/DC Board
DC/DC board functional blocks
DC/DC board operation is controlled by the PMC (Power Management Controller) CPU. PMC
takes care of power path controlling and power supplies' sequencing. It communicates with
the main CPU via serial communication. PMC also measures DC/DC board voltages and
currents.
High efficiency switching power supplies and power path switches are used on the DC/DC
board. This is because of no-fan requirement for FM monitor as well as maximizing the battery
time.
Circuit breakers make VSYS and MOD voltages short-circuit protected. Also the battery charger,
+5V and +3.3V switchers withstand short-circuit. +5V_OUT is disconnected from +5V by a
circuit breaker in case of +5V_OUT overload.
9
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
The boost converter can be set to two different output levels. The higher one is used to give the
battery charger adequate input voltage when the DC/DC board input comes from an external
DC source. The lower one is set in AC/DC use to keep the boost converter enabled but passed
by a diode and thus not switching, which minimizes the power loss. When the AC/DC voltage
drops, the boost converter starts regulating its output and keeps the MOD voltages at a level a
little lower than the one in AC/DC use. In battery use, the lower output voltage yields a little
better efficiency, too.
Smart batteries, battery charger and PMC communicate via SMBus (System Management Bus).
It is a two-wire interface closely resembling I2C. Smart battery controls the charging and
calculates and stores the capacity information as well as other battery related data. Batteries
can be charged when external DC or AC/DC voltage is present.
Block diagram of the power supplies is represented in Figure 6.
DC/DC BOARD FUNCTIONAL BLOCKS
AC / DC
15.9V
+/-2%
EXTERNAL
DC
10 - 16.5V
2x BATTERY
10.8V Li-ION
(9-12.6V)
SMART
BATTERIES
= DC/DCBOARD
POWER
PATH
SWITCH
POWER
PATH
SWITCH
SMART
BATTERY
CHARGER
(BUCK)
VSYS 9 - 16.2V
14.6V /
15.4V
2-LEVEL
SET_HI
BOOST
Boost converter
15.4V (set_hi)
14.6V
passed by diode
Power source
@ EXTDC
@ Battery
@ AC/DC
dcdc_brd_block.vsd
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
VBOOST 14.1 - 16V
5V_PMC
3.3V
BUCK
5V
BUCK
PMC CPU
&
ON/STBY
LOGIC
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
SERIAL COMM.
&
ON/STBY CTRL
Figure 6
10
Document no. M1187335-004
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
+3.3V
+5V
+5V_OU
T
DC/DC board block diagram
VSYS_OUT
9 -16.2V
I/O_VMOD
13.8- 16V
VMOD
13.8 -16V
Frame for FM
Battery charger
Battery charger is a Level 2 Smart Battery Charger. It communicates with the batteries and
PMC CPU via SMBus interface. The charger acts as an SMBus slave device that responds to
charging current and charging voltage values sent to it by a Smart Battery.
The charger includes an input current limiting feature. In a case where the input current
exceeds the limit, the charger reduces the output current to keep the input within the limit. The
currents of the MOD voltages (VMOD, I/O_VMOD) are taken through this current measurement
as well. This results that the charger reduces its output current if the sum of the charger input
current and MOD currents exceeds the input limit. The purpose of this is to prevent the input
power sources from getting overloaded if MOD power is increased during charging.
Power path switching electronics
The power source to be used (batteries, external DC or AC/DC output) is chosen initially by a
‘power path controller’ inside this block. The PMC CPU has full control over the power path
management after the initial choice is made at startup.
2.1.5 AC/DC unit
Figure 7
AC/DC unit
AD/DC unit
The AC/DC unit is a compact medical power supply based on high-efficiency technology. It is
designed for 65 watt continuous output power, universal AC input and 15.9V output voltage.
Because FM is convection cooled, AC/DC unit’s output is not loaded with full rated power to
reduce heat dissipation.
11
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
2.1.6 Module bus cable unit
Figure 8
Module bus cable unit
Interconnection Board connector
Module bus connector (pins 21…25)
CPU board connector
DIS connector X4
Sync IABP & DEF connector
2 pcs grounding wires
2.1.7 Interconnection board
Figure 9
Interconnection board
Interconnection board takes care of most of the monitor internal cabling.
CPU board connector X2
Module bus flex board connector X6
Fuse for External DC input (for future use)
DC/DC board connector X8
Backlight inverter connector X9
Multi I/O connector X5
Battery 1 connector X3
12
Document no. M1187335-004
Frame for FM
Battery 2 connector X4
User interface board connector X1
2.1.8 Display connection board
Figure 10
Display connection board
CPU board connector X1
Display connector X2
2.1.9 Front cover parts
1
2
3
5
4
Figure 11
Parts inside Front cover
(1)
Alarm light board
(2)
Alarm indicator board
(3)
Indicator ribbon cable
(4)
User interface board
(5)
Power indicator board
13
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
2.1.10 Wireless LAN option, F-FMW
Datex-Ohmeda Wireless Network is an extension to, or an alternative for, a wired DatexOhmeda Monitor network. It provides same network services than the wired Datex-Ohmeda
Network.
The monitor network is a local area network based on standard Ethernet technology. The
monitor network is formed by connecting one Central and up to 32 bedside monitors together.
The Central and the bedside monitors are connected to a 10 Mbps hub. The hub works as a
multiport repeater and controls the information flow between all the devices connected to the
monitor network.
The communication protocol for the monitor network is Datex-Ohmeda specific.
Wireless bedside monitors can use both the wired and wireless network. If the network cable is
connected, the wired Datex-Ohmeda Network is used.
Network connection is changed automatically between LAN and WLAN. LAN overrides when
available.
For using Wireless LAN connection, the monitor frame with ready-fitted WLAN option F-FMW is
required.
For configured parameters please refer to the Datex-Ohmeda Network, Wireless LAN
Installation Guide.
2.1.11 Batteries
The S/5 FM has two lithium-ion batteries, located in the battery compartment. The DC/DC
board connects one of the batteries to be the power source, if no power is received from the
AC/DC unit or from an external DC unit (External DC power for future use). The battery charging
is controlled by the DC/DC board.
The batteries can be charged separately, and screen symbols and monitor frame LED
indicators indicate their charging level and possible failure.
NOTE: When the monitor is battery powered, the green battery LED is on. When the monitor is
mains/external DC powered, the green mains/external DC LED is on.
14
Document no. M1187335-004
Frame for FM
2.2 Connectors and signals
2.2.1 External connectors
X4
X3
X5
1
X6
2
X1
X7
X8
Figure 12
X9
X2
External connectors of Frame for FM
(1)
Fuses
(2)
Potential equalization connector
X1
NET connector
X2
Multi IO connector
X3
Receptacle for power cord
X4
Module Connector for E-PSM, E-PSMP or N-FMC, N-FMCREC, N-FMREC
X5
Defib & IABP sync connector
X6
Connector for DIS interfacing system
X7
Connector for Remote Controller K-CREMCO
X8
NET ID connector
X9
Serial connector
15
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Network connector, X1
RJ45 connector
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Tx +
Tx Rx +
N/C
N/C
Rx N/C
N/C
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
GND
NET_ID_DO, TTL out
NET_ID_DI, TTL input
NET_ID_CLK, TTL out
NET_ID_CS, TTL out
TXD, RS-232 output
RXD, RS-232 input
NURSE_CALL, CMOS output
reserved
Data -, RS-485 I/O
CONNECTOR_ID, TTL input
EXTDC+, 10-16V, input (for future use)
GND
GND
KB_DATA#, TTL, I/OPin
KB_CLK#, TTL, I/O
+5V_OUT, +5V, output
CTS#, RS-232 input
RTS#, RS-232 output
REMOTE_ON#
reserved
Data +, RS-485 I/O
I/O_VMOD, 13.8 - 16V
EXTDC+, 10-16V, input (for future use)
GND
Multi I/O connector X2
25 pin female connector
13
1
25
14
16
Document no. M1187335-004
Frame for FM
Multi I/O adapter
Figure 13
Multi I/O adapter
Connector for K-CREMCO X 7
5 pin connector
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
KB_CLK
KB_DATA
not in use
GND
+4.75 - +5.25V
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NET_ID_CS, TTL out.
NET_ID_CLK, TTL out.
NET_ID_DO, TTL out.
NET_ID_DI, TTL input
GND
+4.75 . . . +5.25V
Not in use
NURSE_CALL, CMOS output
GND for Network ID
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GND
RXD, RS-232 input
TXD, RS-232 output
+4.75 . . . +5.25V
GND
N/C
RTS#, RS-232 output
CTS#, RS-232 input
N/C
Net ID connector X8
9 pin female connector
5
1
9
6
Serial port X9
9 pin male connector
17
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Main power X3
Mains connector
Pin
Signal
L
Live
PE
Protected earth
N
Neutral
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
GND
Vmod 13.8 - 16 V
Data +
Data Shield
Module connector X4
5 pin connector
Defib & IABP sync connector X5
Female mini din7 connector Pin
Signal
1
2
3
Defib sync
Marker_in
Analog GND
5
6
7
8
Digital GND
Reserved
Pressure_out
Direct_ECG
DIRECT_ECG: Output signal follows first user lead (ECG1 lead) including augmented leads. If
pace is on, there is an enhanced pacer pulse (5 volts at 2 milliseconds) when pacemaker
triggering is detected.
In the event of a LEAD FAIL, refer to the following:
Lead Failed
Right arm
Left arm
Left leg
Chest
ECG Analog Out
III
II
I
II
On LEADS OFF situation ECG analog output is flat line (0V).
In 5-lead mode, the chest lead must be labeled V1, otherwise output will follow lead II.
PRESSURE_OUT: The pressure labeled ART is sent to the analog out. If no pressure is labeled
ART, P1 is sent to the analog out. Output is set to flat line (0V) if the pressure channel is not
zeroed.
18
Document no. M1187335-004
Frame for FM
DIS connector, X6 DIS interface (RS485)
8 -pin female connector
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Data +
Data 13.8 -16 VMOD
GND
N/C
GND
N/C
N/C
2.2.2 Digital and analog outputs
Digital outputs
There are separate digital outputs. Both signals use TTL-level. The outputs are: Defibrillation
Sync. and Nurse Call.
Defibrillation Sync (X5, pin1) indication is generated by ECG. When active, the signal is in state
1. After 10 ms the signal is reset to state 0. New Defibrillation Sync is not generated before the
indication is deactivated. The delay from the R wave peak to the start of the signal is maximally
35 ms.
Nurse Call (X8, pin 8) indication is generated by red and yellow alarms. When activated, it is set
to state 1 and remains at that state until the alarm situation is over or SILENCE ALARM key is
pressed.
The range of state 0 is from 0 to 0.5 V, and the range of state 1 is 3.5 to 5 V.
If the output signals are used simultaneously with the coding element, the B-UPINET Y-cable,
order number 889308, should be used.
Analog outputs
S/5 FM produces two analog real-time signals.
NOTE: When the source of the selected analog output is invalid (e.g. invasive pressure channel
is not zeroed), or becomes invalid (e.g. ECG lead is disconnected), the signal on the output is
shown as flat line (0 VDC).
Direct ECG (X5, pin 8): Delay (max.):
Gain ECG (out)/ECG (in):
Pacer:
15 ms
1 V/1 mV ±20%
5 V and 2 ms pulse
The signal requires input impedance of 100 kW.
Invasive pressure signal (X5, pin 7):
From pressure channel P1
Delay (max.):
35 ms
Gain Signal (out) / Pressure (in): 10 mV/1 mmHg ±20%
Output range:
-0.4 V to +3.2 V
The signal requires input impedance of 100 k
2.2.3 Printer connection
For connecting a printer to the S/5 FM, the serial data interface is used. When parallel printing
is desired, a serial to parallel converter (ref. 78030) is needed.
For further information see Part I, Interfacing.
19
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
For your notes:
20
Document no. M1187335-004
Frame for FM
3
Service procedures
3.1 General service information
The field service of S/5 FM is limited to replacing faulty PC boards and mechanical parts. Return
the faulty PC boards to GE Healthcare for repair.
GE Healthcare is always available for service advice. Provide the unit serial number, full type
designation and a detailed fault description.
WARNING
Only trained personnel with appropriate tools and equipment should
perform the tests and repairs outlined in this section. Unauthorized service
may void the warranty of the unit.
3.2 Service check
3.2.1 S/5 FM
These instructions include complete procedures for a service check. The service check is
mandatory after any service repair. However, the service check procedures can also be used
for determining possible failures.
The procedures should be performed in ascending order.
The instructions include a check form (APPENDIX A:) which may be used when performing the
procedures.
The symbol

in the instructions indicates that the check form contains space to record the
results of the particular procedure.
3.2.2 Recommended tools
Table 1
Recommended tools
Tool
Notes
Power cord
Screwdrivers
Torx T8, T10 and T15
MemCard - Menu
for MemCard Option
MemCard - Data
for MemCard Option
E-PSM(P)
N-F(C)REC
21
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Table 2
Patient simulators’ compatibility with each hemodynamic module
Patient simulator
Module
Parameter
M1010831
MedSim
Lionheart &
MPS450
E-PSM(P)
ECG
Cable included
Multilink ECG acc.
Multilink ECG acc.
T
2016998-001
2016998-001 and
M1010832
2016998-001
and M1010846
InvBP
Cable included
M1010858 and
2005772-001
M1010862 and
2005772-001
Table 3
Adapter cables for hemodynamic patient simulators
Patient simulator
Adapter cables for simulators
Hemodynamic patient simulator
Dual temperature adapter cable
2016998-001
Hemodynamic patient simulator
Dual Inv.BP adapter cable
2005772-001
Medsim
Temperature adapter cable
M1010832
Medsim
Inv.BP adapter cable
M1010858
Lionheart & MPS450
Temperature adapter cable
M1010846
Lionheart & MPS450
Inv.BP adapter cable
M1010862
3.2.3 Recommended parts
Table 4
Recommended parts
Part
Order No.
Notes
Recorder paper
74205-HEL
for recorder unit
3.2.4 Before beginning
WARNING
•
•
Make sure that the monitor is switched to standby.
•
•
Disconnect the power cord and detach the batteries.
If the monitor is connected to Datex-Ohmeda Network, disconnect the Mon-Net cable
from the monitor. Take out the memory card, if installed.
Detach the fuse holder and the rear cover.
Wear a grounded antistatic wristband when handling PC boards.
Electrostatic discharge may damage components on the board.
22
Document no. M1187335-004
Frame for FM
3.2.5 General
1.
Internal parts
Check that:

the screws are tightened properly

the cables are connected properly

the connector pins are intact

there are no loose objects inside the monitor
Reassemble the monitor.

2.
External parts
Check that:

all stickers are intact

the LCD display screen is intact

the ComWheel cover is intact and is attached properly

all mechanical parts are functioning properly

3.
Module installation
Check that the modules go in smoothly and lock up properly.
Leave the modules connected.

4.
Command Board LEDs
Connect the power cord and check the Command Board LEDs:

the green mains power LED is on

the green battery LED is off

the orange battery LED is on or off continuously (not blinking)

5.
Start-up
Switch the monitor on.
Check that the monitor starts up properly, i.e. the alarm LEDs turn blank, the start-up
sound is heard from the loudspeaker and the normal monitoring screen appears.
No error messages should appear on the screen.
If the monitor contains the recorder unit, two lines of start-up information should be
recorded.

23
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
6.
Module recognition
Configure the monitor screen so that all needed parameter information is shown:
Monitor Setup
Screen 1 Setup
Waveform Fields
Digit Fields
Check that the selected parameter information is shown on the screen.
NOTE: InvBP waveforms are not shown without a patient simulator.
Do no connect the simulator to the monitor at this stage.

7.
LCD display picture
Check that the picture on the LCD display screen is straight, clear and stable.

8.
Time and date
Check that the time and date are correct, adjust them if necessary.
Monitor Setup
Set Time and Date
NOTE: The selection SET TIME AND DATE cannot be accessed if a case is started, or a
patient has been admitted.
NOTE: If the clock shows time 0:00 continuously (at successive start-ups), the SRAM/
TIMEKEEPER battery on the CPU board needs to be replaced.
The FACTORY RESET should be performed after the battery replacement.

9.
Loudspeaker
Check the loudspeaker by setting the alarm volume:
Alarms Setup
Alarm Volume
Test the whole volume scale from 1 to 10 by turning the ComWheel and check that the
alarm volume changes correspondingly. The alarm sound should be clear and audible
with all the settings.

10.
Display brightness
Select
Monitor Setup
Display Brightness
Push the ComWheel and check that the display brightness follows the selected
brightness.

24
Document no. M1187335-004
Frame for FM
11.
Monitor software
Enter the service menu:
Monitor Setup
Install Service (Password 16-4-34)
Service (Password 26-23-8)
Take down the information regarding Monitor software.

12.
Content of the service log
Select Service Log from the menu.
Check the contents of the Service Log for possible problems. If the monitor contains the
recorder unit, record the Service Log onto the recorder by selecting Record Log.

13.
Voltages
Check the power supply output voltages through the service menu:
Monitor Setup
Install Service (Password 16-4-34)
Service (Password 26-23-8)
Frame
Power Supply
Check that all the displayed values are within reasonable limits.

14.
Watchdog circuitry
Select:
Monitor Setup
Install Service (Password 16-4-34)
Service (Password 26-23-8)
Set/Test
Perform the tests WATCHDOG and WD BY OVERLOAD. Check that the monitor restarts in
each case.
NOTE: When selecting WD BY OVERLOAD, restarting should take place approximately
after 15 seconds.

Preset monitor settings:
Record/Print
Record Waveforms
Waveform 1 --> ECG1
Waveform 2 --> P1
Waveform 3 --> P2
25
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Delay --> Off
Paper Speed --> 6.25 mm/s
Length --> 30 s
15.
Alarm LEDs
Enter the Keyboard service menu:
Monitor Setup
Install Service (Password 16-4-34)
Service (Password 26-23-8)
Keyboard
Select the text Upper Led. Check that the red alarm LED turns on and off when pressing
the ComWheel. Check also the yellow alarm LED by selecting Lower Led from the menu.

16.
Membrane keys
Press the keys on the monitor command board one by one. Check that each key
generates a sound from the loudspeaker. Also, the corresponding text in the menu should
change from yellow to red.
Check also the functioning of the side panel keys.

17.
ComWheel
Turn the ComWheel clockwise and counterclockwise and check that each step generates
a sound from the loudspeaker and the corresponding values at the bottom of the menu
increase.
Select Dummy Press. Push the ComWheel and check that the press generates a sound
and the corresponding value in the menu increases.

18.
Module communication
Connect a patient simulator to the module.
Enter the parameter service menus one by one:
Monitor Setup
Install Service (Password 16-4-34)
Service (Password 26-23-8)
Parameters
ECG, STP and NIBP
Check that the ‘Timeouts’, ‘Bad checksums’ and ‘Bad c-s by mod’ values do not increase
faster than by 5 per second.

26
Document no. M1187335-004
Frame for FM
19.
Batteries
Enter the BATTERY service menu:
Monitor Setup
Install Service (Password 16-4-34)
Service (Password 26-23-8)
Frame
Power Supply
WPM Battery
Smart Batt1
Smart Batt2
Check that all values are within reasonable limits.
NOTE: In order to update values for a desired battery, disconnect the other battery
shortly.

20.
Battery operation
Disconnect the power cord (without switching the monitor to standby).
Check that the monitoring continues normally. Check also the Command board LEDs:
- the green mains power LED is off
- the green battery LED is on
- the orange battery LED is off

21.
Battery charging
Reconnect the power cord.
Check that the monitoring continues without problems. Check also the Command board
LEDs:
- the green mains power LED is on
- the green battery LED is off
- the orange battery LED is on or off continuously (not blinking)

3.2.6 Recorder Unit
22.
Recorder messages
Open the recorder unit cover. Check that the message ‘Recorder: Cover open’ appears on
the screen, then close the cover.

23.
Recording
Press the key Start/Stop and check that the module starts recording the selected
waveforms. Press the key again on the module to stop recording.
27
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
NOTE: InvBP waveforms are not recorded without a patient simulator.
NOTE: If no recording appears, check that the paper roll is installed in a correct way. Only
one side of the paper is printable.

24.
Paper speed
Press the key Start/Stop again and this time wait until the recording stops. Check that
the length of the recorded waveform scale is 18.7 cm ( 1.5 cm).
Change the paper speed setting to 1 mm/s:
Print/Record
Record Waveforms
Paper Speed --> 1 mm/s
Press the key Start/Stop and wait until the recording stops. Check that the length of the
scale is now 3.0 cm ( 0.5 cm).

25.
Quality of recording
Check that the quality of the recordings is acceptable.

3.2.7 MemCard option
26.
Module recognition
Enter the Memory Card service menu:
Monitor Setup
Install Service (Password 16-4-34)
Service (Password 26-23-8)
Frame
MemCards
Check that the memory option is recognized properly, i.e. ‘Present’ and ‘Active’ state YES.

27.
Memories and PCMCIA controller
Check that the Memory board memories and the PCMCIA controller have passed their
tests. The status for each should be OK.

28.
Communication
Select Communication. Check that ‘Interface status’ states ‘ACTIVE’ continuously and the
error counter values on the bottom part of the menu are stable.

28
Document no. M1187335-004
Frame for FM
29.
Data Card recognition
Select Status. Insert a Memory card labelled ”Data” in the memory card slot. Check that
the message ‘Data Card inserted’ appears on the message field and the green menu card
symbol on the upper right hand corner of the screen within 1 minute.
Wait until the information regarding SLOT2 is fully updated in the service menu, then
check that the ‘Card type’ states DATA and the ‘File system’ ATA.
Check that the rest of the information for SLOT2 is reliable and no errors have been
detected.
Remove the memory card.

30.
Menu Card recognition
Select Status. Insert a Memory card labelled ‘Menu’ in the memory card slot. Check that
the message ‘Menu Card inserted’ appears on the message field and the white menu
card symbol in the upper right hand corner of the screen within 1 minute.
Wait until the information regarding SLOT2 is fully updated in the service menu, then
check that the ‘Card type’ states MENU and the ‘File system’ ATA.
Check that the rest of the information for SLOT2 is reliable and no errors have been
detected.

31.
Menu card function
Enter the SAVE MODES menu:
Monitor Setup
Install Service (Password 16-4-34)
Save Modes (Password 13-20-31)
Save the current modes in the Menu card by selecting
Load Modes
To Menu Card --> Save.
Wait until the saving is complete, then return to the previous menu.
Change the name for the mode number 1:
Highlight the mode number 1, push the ComWheel and select -Name. Select suitable
characters from the list by turning and pressing the ComWheel, then confirm the new
name by selecting End.
Load the original modes from the Menu card by selecting
Load Modes
From Memory Card --> Load.
Wait until the loading is complete (may take a couple of minutes), then return to the
previous menu.
Check that the mode number 1 has got back its original name.

29
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
3.2.8 Network
32.
Connection to network
Check that the Mon-Net cable connector is clean and intact, then connect it to the
monitor.
Check that the monitor connects to the Datex-Ohmeda Network, i.e. the network symbol
appears under the clock in the upper right hand corner of the screen. Also a message
regarding the connected Central should appear in the message field of the screen.
If the message regarding the Central does not appear, check the status of the network.

33.
Ethernet address
Enter the network service menu:
Monitor Setup
Install Service (Password 16-4-34)
Service - Frame (Password 26-23-8)
Network- Ethernet
Check that the service menu counters for the received (‘In’) and transmitted (‘Out’) data
are updated frequently.

34.
Data error counters
Check that the counters for data errors (‘CRC’, ‘Frame’, ‘Transm.’) are stable.
NOTE: The counters may show values higher than 0, however, if any of the values is
increasing continuously, it indicates a problem.

35.
Hardware error counters
Check that the counters for hardware errors (‘Intern.’, ‘Missed’, ‘FIFO’, ‘Overrun’) show all 0.
If any of the counters show a value higher than 0, replace the network board.

36.
Disconnection recognition
Disconnect the Mon-Net cable from the monitor. Check that the message ‘Network
down:’ appears in the message field within 30 seconds. When the message appears, the
service menu values are no longer updated.
Reconnect the Mon-Net cable and check that the monitor connects to the Datex-Ohmeda
Network again.

37.
ID-plug recognition
Switch the monitor to standby. Disconnect the Identification plug from the monitor.
Switch the monitor back on and check that the message ‘Check network connectors’
appears in the message field.
30
Document no. M1187335-004
Frame for FM
Reconnect the Identification plug and check that the monitor connects to the DatexOhmeda Network.

3.2.9 Wireless LAN option
38.
Signal strength
Check that the WLAN signal strength symbol roams or stays fixed on the monitor screen.
39.
Configure access point
Configure one access point appropriately. Bring the monitor to good WLAN coverage
area. Check that the field level indicator stops scrolling.
Go to the WLAN Status page (... Service -> Frame -> Network -> WLAN - WLAN Status).
Check that the Connection is active, AP MAC address is recognized and the connection
Speed is at least 2 Mbits/s.
40.
Connection to Network
Make sure that the monitor is in line of sight with a wireless LAN access point antenna.
Check that the monitor connects to the Datex-Ohmeda Network, i.e. the wireless LAN
network symbol appears in the upper right-hand corner of the screen.

3.2.10 General
41.
Trends retaining
Check that the monitor is capable of storing the trend information and temporary
settings in a short (max. 15 minutes) standby.
Press the membrane key Pt.Data & Trends --> Trends. Check that there is trend
information available for the monitored parameters.
Switch the monitor to standby and disconnect the power cord. Wait for two minutes, then
reconnect the power cord and switch the monitor back on.
Check that the trend information is still available.

42.
Battery capacity
Condition the batteries.

43.
Service Log reset
Enter the Service Log in the Service menu:
Monitor Setup
Install Service (Password 16-4-34)
Service (Password 26-23-8)
Service Log
31
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Clear the content of the Service Log by selecting RESET LOG from the menu.

44.
Electrical safety check
Perform electrical safety check and leakage current test.
Check that the monitor functions normally after the performed electrical safety check.

45.
Final cleaning
Switch the monitor to standby, disconnect the power cord and perform final cleaning.

46.
Fill in all necessary documents

3.3 S/5 FM disassembly and reassembly
WARNING
WARNING
The S/5 FM is always energized by the internal batteries. A short circuit may
cause internal damage. Do not touch any exposed wiring or conductive
surface inside, this may cause an electric shock.
Always perform an electrical safety check and a leakage current test on the
monitor after service.
NOTE: The backlight circuit runs on high voltage.
Do not touch the inverter board or the backlight tube leads when powered.
3.3.1 Before disassembly
WARNING
Wear a grounded, antistatic wristband when handling PC boards.
Electrostatic discharge may damage components on the board.
Make sure that the monitor is turned off.
Disconnect the main power cord. If the monitor is connected to the Datex-Ohmeda Network,
disconnect the Mon-Net cable.
To reassemble the monitor, reverse the order of the disassembly steps.
32
Document no. M1187335-004
Frame for FM
Tools needed
-
screwdrivers, TORX; T8, T10, T15
-
crosshead screwdriver; M15
-
flat blade screwdriver
-
sockets; M4.5, M7, M11
-
antistatic wristband
To separate the back cover from
the monitor frame
1. From the back side of the monitor, remove:
-
both batteries
-
Multi I/O adapter
-
the fuse holder
-
three (T8) screws from the top of the back cover
-
two (T15) screws with star washers
-
one (T15) screw
Notice the places of the star washers.
2. Remove the two (T15) screws from the front side of the
monitor.
33
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
3. Remove the two (T8) screws from the datacard slot.
4. Place the monitor face down on a non-adrasive, static-free
surface.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the ComWheel.
-
Lift the back cover up.
Now you can access the following field replaceable parts.
Follow the instructions below:
34
Document no. M1187335-004
-
“To remove the network connector board unit”
-
“To remove the main power connector unit”
-
“To remove the Multi I/0 connector (25 pins)”
-
“To remove the DC/DC board”
-
“To remove the AC/DC unit and the battery brake”
-
“To remove the filter board”
Frame for FM
To remove the network connector
board unit
-
Remove the screw (T10) holding the unit to the frame.
-
Disconnect the cable coming from the Network
connector board
-
Remove the Network connector board
To remove the main power connector unit
-
Remove the two screws (T10) holding the unit
to the frame.
-
Disconnect the X1 connector and the
protective earth connector from the
receptacle.
-
Remove the two terminal screws (M4,5) with
washers holding the connector to the frame.
To remove the Multi I/0 connector (25 pins)
35
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
To remove the DC/DC board
36
Document no. M1187335-004
-
Remove the AC/DC board connector.
-
Remove the screw (T10) holding the unit to
the frame.
-
Disconnect the DC/DC board from the frame
by lifting it up carefully.
-
While reassembling, route the AC/DC board DC/DC board cable according to the picture.
Frame for FM
To remove the AC/DC unit and the battery
brake
Disconnect:
-
the AC/DC unit - DC/DC unit cable connector
-
the AC/DC board - Filter board cable
connector
-
the protective earth cable connector
Remove:
-
the four screws (T10) holding the AC/DC unit
to the frame
-
the AC/DC unit
NOTE: It is not allowed to repair the AC/DC
power unit in the field. Return the faulty AC/DC
power unit to GE Healthcare for service.
To remove the battery brake:
-
remove the two (T10 ) screws
-
Remove the two (T10) screws holding the filter
board to the frame.
To remove the filter board
37
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
To separate the frame assembly from the front
cover unit
WARNING
Wear a grounded antistatic wristband and soft cotton gloves (dust free)
when handling the LCD display parts. Hold them by their corners or edges.
Do not touch the connector pins.
In normal circumstances it is very difficult to keep the LCD display component and the display
shield surfaces free of dust when the LCD display unit is exposed to room air. If dust particles
remain on the LCD display component and the display shield surfaces, they may impair the
picture quality on the screen.
If you can provide a dust free environment, follow the instructions below.
-
Disconnect the interconnection flex board
connector from the user interface board.
-
Remove the three (T8) screws from the
borders of the frame unit, one on the other,
two on the other side of the frame.
-
Lift the frame unit carefully up.
NOTE: The backlight circuit runs on high voltage. Do not touch the inverter board or the
backlight tube leads when powered.
38
Document no. M1187335-004
Frame for FM
To change the LCD backlight
-
Disconnect the connector from the inverter
board.
-
Push the lid beside the backlight to release
the backlight tube. Pull the backlight carefully
out.
NOTE: Do not bend the backlight tube.
NOTE: Do not touch the backlight tube with your hands.
To separate the LCD display from the frame
unit
-
Remove the four (T10) screws holding the
display to the frame unit.
-
Disconnect the connector from the inverter
board.
-
Lift the display carefully up.
-
Disconnect the LCD display flat cable carefully
from the display.
NOTE: When reassembling the LCD display, be careful that no dirt or finger prints are left
between the LCD display element and the protection glass window.
NOTE: Do not use excessive force when fastening the display to the frame. Fastening the
screws too tightly might bend the display too much and break it. The screws must also be
fastened gradually, first fasten all screws slightly, then more tightly.
39
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
3.3.2 Handling and storage of LCD display component
Handling of LCD display component and protective window
If the LCD Display component surface becomes dusty, wipe it gently with absorbent cotton,
chamois or other soft material. If necessary, breathe onto the display surface and wipe
immediately. The display surface may also be cleaned using a small amount of normal hexane.
Do not use acetone, toluene or alcohol because they cause chemical damage to the polarizer.
1.
Wipe off saliva and water drops as soon as possible. Their prolonged contact with the
polarizer cause deformations and color fading.
2.
Do not open the component case because internal circuits are sensitive to electrostatic
discharges.
Taking a spare part LCD Display component or a display shield into use:
Peel off the protective film slowly (in more than 10 seconds) from the display or protective
window surface. Fast peeling may generate enough static electricity to destroy the LCD Display
component.
Storaging an LCD display component as a spare part for a long period
1.
Store the display in a dark place. Do not expose it to sunlight or fluorescent light. Keep the
temperature between 5 °C and 35 °C / 41 °F and 95 °F at normal humidity.
2.
The polarizer surface should not come into contact with any other object. It is
recommended that the display unit is stored in the container in which it was originally
shipped.
40
Document no. M1187335-004
Frame for FM
To remove the inverter board
NOTE: The inverter board is sensitive to bending.
-
Remove the two (T10) screws and the
insulator plate.
-
Disconnect the backlight connector(s) and the
inverter cable connector.
NOTE: When reassembling make sure that the
connectors are fastened properly.
Inverter Board F-FM(W)-01
Inverter Board F-FM(W)-00
NOTE: When replacing the Inverter board, fasten the inverter screws gently, using only as
much force as necessary to fasten the board firmly enough in place. The screws must not be
fastened so tightly that the board will be bent from around the screws.
To remove the handle
-
Remove the two screws (T15) holding the
handle to the handle guide unit.
41
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
To remove the EMC shield
-
Remove the 14 screws (T10) holding the shield
to the frame unit. One of the screws is under
the Network connection cable. Lift the shield
carefully up.
NOTE: When reassembling the monitor,
remember to connect the grounding wire of the
Sync connector unit to the EMC shield.
Now you can access the following field
replaceable spare parts. Follow the instructions
below:
-
“To remove the handle guide unit”
-
“To remove the CPU board”
-
“To remove the loudspeaker unit”
-
To remove the Network cable, disconnect the
cable connectors from the CPU board and the
Network connector board.
-
Remove the WLAN antenna from the handle
guide.
-
Remove the two screws (T10) holding the
handle guide unit to the frame.
To remove the handle guide unit
42
Document no. M1187335-004
Frame for FM
To remove the CPU board
-
Disconnect the following cables from the CPU
board:
•
•
•
•
loudspeaker cable
Sync connector cable
interconnection board connector cable
network connection cable
-
Remove the eight screws (T10) holding the
CPU board to the frame.
-
Lift the CPU board carefully up and remove it
from the frame.
-
Remove the two screws (T10) holding the
loudspeaker unit to the frame.
-
Disconnect the loudspeaker cable from the
CPU board.
To remove the loudspeaker unit
43
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
To remove the interconnection board
-
Remove the three screws (T10) holding the
plastic flex board cover.
-
Turn the frame around. Remove the two
screws (T10) holding the flex board to the
frame.
-
Disconnect the interconnection board
connector from the module bus cable.
NOTE: When reassembling the monitor, check
that a cellular rubber sealing is attached to the
module bus cable connector.
-
44
Document no. M1187335-004
Remove the interconnection board carefully
from the frame.
Frame for FM
To remove the power supply frame
-
Remove the two screws (T15) holding the
power supply frame to the inner frame.
-
Now you have access to replace the inner
frame and Modulebus cable unit subassembly.
45
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
3.4 Batteries
3.4.1 Battery indicators
The S/5 FM messages, screen symbols and front panel LED indicators tell the user about the
status of the batteries. For screen symbols, see “Part 1 Symbols”. For LED indicators, consult the
table below and for messages, see section “Troubleshooting.”
Table 5
Battery indicators
Screen symbol
A
B
Front panel battery
LED indicators
Monitor is battery
powered. Batteries are
fully charged and the
size of the green bar
indicates the charging
level.
green lit
green lit
B
Monitor is battery
powered. Battery A is
empty, battery B is ok.
green lit
B
Monitor is battery
powered. Battery A
failure, battery B is ok.
Monitor is mains
powered. Battery A is
being charged (white
bar), battery B is already
charged.
green dark
Monitor is battery
powered. Battery A is
missing, battery B is ok.
green lit
Monitor is mains
powered. No battery
backup: batteries have
failed or they are not
inserted.
green dark
B
A
Explanation
B
B
no screen symbol
46
Document no. M1187335-004
orange dark
orange dark
orange flashing
orange lit
orange flashing
orange flashing
Frame for FM
3.4.2 To change the batteries
Figure 14
CAUTION
WARNING
Inserting a battery
(1)
Open the lid of the battery compartment located behind the handle by sliding it to the left.
(2)
Lift up the battery you want to change. Check the indicators and messages on the screen
to make sure that you change the battery with lower charge.
(3)
Push in the new battery. Make sure that the charging indicator is facing forward and push
the battery down all the way. Check the monitor indicators.
After having replaced a battery, always make sure that you close the battery
compartment by sliding the lid back to the right until it clicks.
Do not incinerate a battery or store at high temperatures as it will explode.
3.4.3 To check the battery
Check the battery charging level by pressing the test
button on the battery as indicated in the drawing on the
left.
The green bar lights up and the number of lit segments
indicates the charging level: the more lit segments, the
higher the capacity level.
Figure 15
Capacity indicator on the battery
47
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
3.4.4 Conditioning the batteries
Condition the batteries regularly to maintain their useful life. Condition a battery every six
months or when the message ‘Condition Battery x’‘ appears on the screen. Always observe the
messages and symbols on the screen to see the battery status. You can also check the status
through Monitor Setup - Battery Setup. Conditioning a battery is best done on an external
charger. If you do not have an external charger, proceed according to the following
instructions.
NOTE: You cannot condition batteries during patient monitoring. Always disconnect the
modules first.
1.
Continue normal battery use until the green bar of a battery charge indicator is less than
3/4 of the full height. After this, remove the battery. Continue monitoring with one battery
until its charge is less than 3/4 of the full capacity.
2.
Insert both batteries and connect the monitor to the power supply. The monitor starts
charging both batteries, and the capacity indicators scroll accordingly. Keep charging the
batteries until both capacity indicators are full height.
3.
Continue charging for another two hours. After this, check that the orange battery LED in
the front panel is no longer on. If it is, continue charging until it goes off.
4.
Disconnect the monitor from the power supply and leave it on until the batteries run out
and the monitor switches off. Wait for another 15 minutes.
5.
Reconnect the monitor to the power supply and turn it on. Continue charging the
batteries until both capacity indicators are full height and no longer scrolling.
6.
Keep charging for another two hours. After this, check that the orange battery LED in the
front panel is no longer on. If it is, continue charging until it goes off to indicate that the
battery conditioning is complete.
NOTE: If only one battery is inserted during conditioning, the orange LED will keep flashing and
will not go off.
3.5 To replace the fuses
3.5.1 Primary fuses
Pull out the fuse holder under the mains connector at the back of the monitor. Replace the
fuses with fuses of exactly the same type and rating.
3.5.2 Fuse for external DC
External DC power for future use only.
Remove the rear cover. Replace the fuse that is located inside the fuse holder under the
receptacle with a fuse of exactly the same type and rating.
3.6 To download the software on CPU board
In case of a faulty CPU board refer first to section “To remove the CPU board“ and then follow
the instructions for downloading service software.
NOTE: All user settings will be lost after downloading of new monitor software.
NOTE: During the downloading of software the serial number of the monitor is written on the
software card. The software can then be downloaded again to the same monitor, but not to
any other monitor. (For F-FM(W)-00 frame version).
48
Document no. M1187335-004
Frame for FM
3.7 Adjustments and calibrations
It is not necessary to perform calibrations or adjustments on S/5 Frame for FM.
49
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
4
Troubleshooting
4.1 S/5 Frame for FM
Table 6
S/5 Frame for FM troubleshooting chart
Problem
Cause
What to do
Monitor is not starting.
1. The batteries are empty.
2. Fuses may be blown.
3. If power cord connected, AC/DC
unit may be faulty.
4. If AC/DC unit is working, the DC/
DC board may be faulty.
5. On/Stby key may be faulty.
1. Connect the power cord.
2. Replace fuses.
3. Replace the AC/DC power unit.
1. The connection between DC/DC
board and CPU board may be
faulty.
2. Faulty CPU board.
1. Check the connector and the
interconnection board.
Monitor is not starting.
The monitor starts (alarm leds
are lit and a beep is heard), but
the display remains black.
4. Replace the DC/DC unit.
5. Replace the command board
panel keyboard foil.
2. Replace the CPU board.
1. The LCD display cables are loose. 1. Check the LCD display connection
board connectors.
2. Check backlight connector. Check
2. The backlights are not lit.
inverter cable.
Backlights may be faulty. Replace the
backlights.
Backlight Inverter may be faulty.
Replace the Inverter board.
Display and monitor operating
but alarm leds not illuminating
in start-up.
1. Loose connectors.
2. Ribbon cable faulty.
3. CPU not working.
1. Check all connectors from CPU to
led board.
2. Replace ribbon cable.
3. Replace CPU.
Display and monitor operating 1. Loudspeaker connector or wires
but no audible beep in start-up.
loose or faulty.
1. Check loudspeaker connector and
wires.
Display is too dim.
1. Adjust display brightness higher.
2. Replace backlight.
3. Replace backlight inverter.
1. Incorrect brightness adjustment.
2. Backlight faulty.
3. Backlight inverter faulty.
Stripes or white areas on screen. 1. Loose faulty display connection 1. Check display connection
flexboard connectors in CPU and
flexboard connectors in CPU and
display.
display.
Module data disappears from
the screen. ‘Module power
supply overload’ message.
Parameter module current (in
module bus) too high.
Detach and change parameter
module.
Module data disappears.
1. Module bus voltage or signals
path broken.
1. DC/DC board module power
section may be faulty. Replace the
DC/DC board.
2. Replace the Module bus cable
unit.
50
Document no. M1187335-004
Frame for FM
Problem
Cause
What to do
‘Battery failure’ message on the 1. Problem in communication
screen.
between battery and DC/DC
board.
2. Battery too old or defected.
3. DC/DC board may be faulty.
1. Replace battery.
'Frame temperature high'
message.
The temperature inside the frame is
too high.
Check monitor ventilation holes.
‘Battery temperature high’
message on the screen.
Battery SMBus temperature is too
high.
Check monitor ventilation holes.
Replace battery.
After shut off, the trend and
1. The On/Stby switch has been
patient data does not remain 15
pressed over 10 s. (= service
min in the memory.
reset).
2. Empty battery.
3. Only one battery inserted.
2. Replace battery.
3. Replace the DC/DC board.
1. When switching off, the On/Stby
switch has to be pressed less than
10 s.
2. Replace the battery.
3. Use always two batteries.
Keyboard not working, but
module communication is OK.
Keyboard cables and connectors, or Check the interconnection board
connectors.
interconnection board connectors
may be faulty.
Check the keyboard cable connection
to the user interface board.
Keyboard not working, and
module communication not
working.
UPI section of the CPU board not
functioning normally.
Keyboard partly not working.
1. Keyboard faulty.
1. Replace the keyboard foil.
2. Keyboard cables and connectors, 2. Check the interconnection board
or interconnection board
connectors.
connectors may be faulty.
Check the keyboard cable connection
to the user interface board.
Restart the monitor.
Replace the Central Processing
Board.
4.2 Memory option
Table 3
Memory option troubleshooting chart
Error message
Cause
What to do
‘No menus in Menu Card’
message
There are no menus in the Menu
card.
Insert a Menu card with valid menu
configuration files in the module.
‘Faulty Data Card - change card’
An error has occurred during Data
card read/write operation.
Change Data card.
‘Faulty Menu Card - change card’ An error has occurred during Menu
card read/write operation.
Change Menu card.
51
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
4.3 NET section
Table 4
Problem
NET section troubleshooting chart
Cause
Monitor does not connect to Patch panel
the network.
Patch cable
Monitor connects to the
network, but disconnects
unexpectedly (‘Network
connection down’ message
on the monitor screen).
What to do
Patch cable not connected to HUB or to panel.
Patch cable or connector defective.
HUB not connected to power supply.
HUB port closed due to physical layer problems.
HUB port temporarily closed and reopened due
to physical layer problems.
Hubs not properly connected to each other.
Monitor-Network cable
Cable not properly connected to the wallplate
or to the monitor.
Cable or connector defective.
Network cable (inside the
monitor) defective
Replace the Network cable.
Network Connector Board
defective
Replace the Network Connector Board Unit.
Net section of the CPU board
The NET section is defective. Replace the CPU
board.
NET section memory on the
CPU board
The SRAM of the NET section is defective or
uninitialized. The NET cannot be used. See
network service page for details.
Wrong identification number
Use the Virtual ID number with monitors that
have WLAN option installed.
Identification plug
There is no identification plug attached to the
monitor.
The identification plug is defective or
uninitialized. The plug cannot be used.
Multi I/O adapter faulty
52
Document no. M1187335-004
Replace multi I/O adapter.
Frame for FM
Problem
Cause
‘Check network connectors’ Monitor-Network cable
message shows on the
monitor screen
What to do
Cable not properly connected to the wallplate
or to the monitor.
Cable or connector defective.
Network cable (inside the
monitor) defective
Replace the Network cable.
Network Connector Board
defective
Replace the Network Connector Board Unit.
Multi I/O adapter faulty
Replace multi I/O adapter.
Identification plug
There is no identification plug properly attached
to the monitor.
The identification plug is defective or
uninitialized. The plug cannot be used. See
network service page for details.
‘Network board error’
message shows on the
monitor screen
NET section on the CPU board The NET section is defective. The board cannot
be used. See network service page for details.
NET section memory on the
CPU board
The SRAM memory of the NET section is
defective or uninitialized. The board cannot be
used. See network service page for details.
Other Site View shows no
waveforms
No waveforms are set up for
Monitor-to-Monitor
communication
Run Network Setup to verify current Monitor-toMonitor communication setup.
Network printing fails
Print server is busy
Network manager's print server is busy at the
moment and cannot take more print jobs. Try
again after 15 seconds.
Print queue is full
There are too many unprinted documents
waiting in the print queue. Check the printer, as
it is not operating properly.
Printer is off-line
Printer cable is loose, printer is out of paper,
there is a paper jam or the printer is simply
switched to off-line state.
There are no menus for the
record keeper
Run Network Setup to verify the current setup.
Record keeper menus are
blank
53
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
For your notes:
54
Document no. M1187335-004
Appendix A Service check form, Datex-Ohmeda S/5 Frame for FM, F-FM
APPENDIX A: Service check form,
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 Frame for FM, F-FM
Customer
Module type
Service
S/N
Date
Service engineer
Monitor Installation
L-
E-
F-
N-
N-
N-
N-
N-
NOK = Test OK
General
OK
N.A. = Test not applicable
N.A.
Fail = Test failed
Fail
OK
1. Internal parts
2. External parts
3. Module installation
4. Command Board LEDs
5. Start-up
6. Module recognition
7. LCD display picture
8. Time and date
9. Loudspeaker
10. Display brightness
11. Monitor software
12. Content of the service
log
13. Voltages
14. Watchdog circuitry
15. Alarm LEDs
16. Membrane keys
17. ComWheel
18. Module
communication
19. Batteries
20. Battery operation
N.A.
Fail
21. Battery charging
1(4)
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Recorder unit
OK
N.A.
Fail
22. Recorder messages
23. Recording
24. Paper speed
25. Quality of recording
Notes
S/N
MemCard Option
OK
N.A.
Fail
OK
26. Module recognition
27. Memories and PCMCIA
controller
28. Communication
29. Data Card recognition
30. Menu Card recognition
31. Menu card function
N.A.
Fail
N.A.
Fail
Notes
S/N
Network Option
OK
N.A.
Fail
OK
32. Connection to network
33. Ethernet address
34. Data error counters
35. Hardware error
counters
36. Disconnection
recognition
37. ID-plug recognition
Notes
2(4)
Document no. M1187335-004
Appendix A Service check form, Datex-Ohmeda S/5 Frame for FM, F-FM
S/N
Wireless LAN option
OK
N.A.
Fail
38. Signal strength
OK
N.A.
Fail
OK
N.A.
Fail
39. Configure access point
40. Connection to
Network
Notes
General
OK
N.A.
Fail
41. Trends retaining
42. Battery capacity
43. Service Log reset
44. Electrical safety check
45. Final cleaning
46. Fill in all necessary
documents
Notes
Used spare parts
Signature
3(4)
Document no. M1187335-004
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
For your notes:
4(4)
Document no. M1187335-004
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
Technical Reference Manual Slot
Conformity according to the Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning Medical Devices amended by 2007/47/EC
CAUTION: U.S. Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a licensed medical practitioner.
Outside the USA, check local laws for any restriction that may apply.
All specifications subject to change without notice.
Document number M1215098-002
12 August, 2011
GE Healthcare Finland Oy
Kuortaneenkatu 2
FI-00510 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: +358 10 39411
Fax: +358 9 1463310
www.gehealthcare.com
Copyright © 2011 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Table of contents
Table of contents
Table of contents
i
Table of figures
iii
List of tables
iv
Introduction
1
1
Specifications
3
1.1
1.2
3
3
3
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
1.3
2
General specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1 NIBP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.2 ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.3 Pulse oximetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.4 Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.5 Invasive blood pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.6 Respiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.1 NIBP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.2 ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.3 Pulse oximetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.4 Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.5 Invasive blood pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.6 Respiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional description
2.1
2.2
2.3
8
Measurement principle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1.1 NIBP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1.2 ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1.3 Pulse oximetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1.4 Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.1.5 Invasive blood pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.1.6 Respiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Main components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2.1 E-PSMP/E-PSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2.2 NIBP board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.2.3 ECG board in 12-lead measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.2.4 ECG filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.2.5 STP board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connectors and signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.3.1 Module bus connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.3.2 Front panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
i
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
3
Service procedures
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
4
4.2
5
General service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.2.1 Recommended tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.2.2 Recommended parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.2.3 Visual inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.2.4 Functional inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Disassembly and reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.3.1 Before disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.3.2 Tools needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.3.3 To disassemble the module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.3.4 To remove the manifold unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.3.5 To remove the module bus connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.3.6 To replace the NIBP filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Adjustments and calibrations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.4.1 NIBP calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.4.2 Temperature calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.4.3 Invasive pressure calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Troubleshooting
4.1
25
46
Troubleshooting charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.1.1 NIBP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.1.2 NIBP error code explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.1.3 Pulse oximetry (SpO2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.1.4 Invasive blood pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Troubleshooting flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.2.1 Troubleshooting for NIBP parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.2.2 Troubleshooting for ESP parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Earlier revisions
Appendix A:
Service check form, Patient Side Module,
E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
ii
Document no. M1215098-002
54
A-1
Table of figures
Table of figures
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
Figure 4
Figure 5
Figure 6
Figure 7
Figure 8
Figure 9
Figure 10
Figure 11
Figure 12
Figure 13
Figure 14
Patient Side Module, E-PSMP .................................................................................................................................................. 1
Absorption of infrared light in the finger........................................................................................................................... 9
Pulse oximetry probe parts layout and schematic diagram .................................................................................10
Front panel of E-PSMP .............................................................................................................................................................11
NIBP board functional block diagram ..............................................................................................................................12
NIBP pneumatics diagram.....................................................................................................................................................14
12-lead ECG measurement block diagram....................................................................................................................15
STP board block diagram .......................................................................................................................................................17
Temperature measurement principle ..............................................................................................................................18
Pressure measurement principle........................................................................................................................................19
Pulse oximetry measurement block diagram...............................................................................................................20
Serial communication of E-PSM(P) module ....................................................................................................................21
Troubleshooting flowchart for NIBP parameter ..........................................................................................................52
Troubleshooting flowchart for ESP Parameters...........................................................................................................53
iii
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
List of tables
Table 1
Table 2
Table 3
Table 4
Table 5
Table 6
Table 7
Table 8
Table 9
Patient Side Module options................................................................................................................................. 1
Module bus connector description ................................................................................................................ 22
ECG connector ......................................................................................................................................................... 22
SpO2 connector ....................................................................................................................................................... 23
Invasive blood pressure connectors (P1, P2) ............................................................................................. 23
Temp connector (T1, T2) ...................................................................................................................................... 24
Recommended tools............................................................................................................................................. 25
Recommended parts ............................................................................................................................................ 26
NIBP calibration check pressures ................................................................................................................... 44
iv
Document no. M1215098-002
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
Introduction
This Technical Reference Manual Slot provides information for the maintenance and service of
the Patient Side Modules E-PSMP and E-PSM.
Please also refer to “Technical Reference Manual” of the monitor for system specific
information e.g. related documentation, conventions used, symbols on equipment, safety
precautions, system description, system installation, interfacing, functional check and planned
maintenance.
The E-PSMP and E-PSM modules provide general hemodynamic parameters.
Figure 1
Patient Side Module, E-PSMP
Table 1
Patient Side Module options
Parameter
E-PSMP
E-PSM
Two invasive blood pressures
x
Impedance respiration
x
x
ECG
x
x
Pulse oximetry
x
x
Two temperatures
x
x
NIBP
x
x
Intended purpose (Indications for use)
The Patient Side Module (model family E-PSM(P)) and accessories are indicated for the
monitoring of hemodynamic parameters of all hospital patients. The hemodynamic
parameters of the module comprise ECG including ST-segment and arrhythmia, Impedance
respiration, NIBP, Temperature, SpO2 (including monitoring during conditions of clinical patient
motion), and invasive blood pressure.
1
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
Impedance respiration measurement is indicated for patients aged 3 and up. The NIBP
measurement is indicated for patients who weigh 5 kg (11 lb.) and up. This device is indicated
for use by qualified medical personnel only.
Monitor software compatibility
Patient Side Module, E-PSM(P) Rev. 00 and 01 are designed for use with Datex-Ohmeda
monitors as follows:
−
S/5 FM monitors using software L-FICU04(A) or later.
−
S/5 Anesthesia Monitors using software L-ANE04(A) or later equipped with 5-Module
Frame, F-CU5(P) or with S/5 8-Module Frame, F-CU8. With the F-CU8, the E-INTPSM
interface module is needed.
−
S/5 Critical Care Monitors using software L-ICU04(A) or later equipped with 5-Module
Frame, F-CU5(P) or with S/5 8-Module Frame, F-CU8. With the F-CU8, the E-INTPSM
interface module is needed.
Equipment safety symbols
When displayed on the E-PSM, E-PSMP module, indicates that protection
against cardiac defibrillator discharge is due in part to the accessories for pulse
oximetry (SpO2), temperature (T) and invasive pressure (P) measurement.
2
Document no. M1215098-002
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
1
Specifications
1.1 General specifications
Module size
WxDxH
Module weight
Power consumption
Operation temperature
51 x 132 (171 w/ tab) x 140 mm
2 x 5.2 (67 w/ tab) x 5.5 in
0.6 kg /1.4 lb.
2.3 W typical (NIBP pump off)
7.5 W typical (NIBP pump on)
10 to 40°C / 50 to 104°F
1.2 Typical performance
1.2.1 NIBP
WARNING
Non-invasive blood pressure measurement is intended for patients
weighing over 5 kg (11 lb.)
Oscillometric measurement principle.
Measurement range
Pulse rate range accepted
Measurement interval
Typical measuring time
Initial inflation pressure
Venous stasis
Cuff widths
adult
child
infant
30 to 250 bpm
from 1 min. to 4h
adult
infant
adult
child
infant
adult
child
infant
see User’s Guide
25 to 260 mmHg
25 to 195 mmHg
15 to 140 mmHg
23 s
20 s
170 ±10 mmHg
150 ±10 mmHg
120 ±10 mmHg
80 ±5 mmHg / 2 min.
60 ±5 mmHg / 2 min.
40 ±5 mmHg / 1 min.
Venous stasis pressure may be lower than the values above if the patient has low blood
pressure. The venous stasis pressure adapts to the measured mean pressure being the same
as mean pressure but always at least the following:
Infant 20 ± 5 mmHg
Child 30 ± 5 mmHg
Adult 40 ± 5 mmHg
Overall system accuracy:
1
Meets or exceeds SP10-2002 AAMI standards1
(According to SP10-2002 AAMI 4.4.5.2.B, Intra-arterial method as the reference standard, mean difference of the test
system and the comparison system shall be ± 5 mmHg or less with standard deviation of 8 mmHg or less).
3
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
1.2.2 ECG
Lead selection
Sweep speeds
I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6
12.5, 25, 50 mm/sec.
Display filter
Diagnostic
Monitoring
ST filter
0.05 to 150 Hz
0.5 to 30 Hz (-3 dB, with 50 Hz reject filter)
0.5 to 40 Hz (-3 dB, with 60 Hz reject filter)
0.05 to 30 Hz (-3 dB, with 50 Hz reject filter)
0.05 to 40 Hz (-3 dB, with 60 Hz reject filter)
Heart rate from ECG
Range
Accuracy
Resolution
Update interval
Averaging time
30 to 250 bpm
±5 bpm or ±5%, whichever is greater
1 bpm
5s
5s
ST levels (in main software)
ST level range
Resolution
Averaging
-9 to +9 mm (-0.9 to +0.9 mV)
0.1 mm (0.01 mV)
calculated from 8 QRS complexes
Pacemaker pulse detection
Detection level
2 to 700 mV
Pulse duration
0.5 to 2 ms
The monitor is specified for both of the methods A and B in ANSI/AAMI EC13 4.1.4.2.
Direct ECG and Synchronization
for specifications see section “Specifications” in the “Frame for FM Technical Reference Manual Slot”
1.2.3 Pulse oximetry
Measurement range
Calibration range
Accuracy1
0 to 100%
70 to 100%
100 to 70%, ±2 digits
±3 digits during clinical patient motion
69 to 0%, unspecified
Display resolution
1 digit = 1% of SpO2
Display averaging time
Slow, Normal, beat-to-beat
Pulse beep pitch
varies with SpO2 level
The monitor is calibrated against functional oxygen saturation SpO2 func.
Pulse rate from Pleth
Measurement range
Accuracy
Resolution
Display averaging
Adjustable pulse beep volume.
30 to 250 bpm
30 to 100, ±5 bpm,
100 to 250, ±5%
1 bpm
10 s
Pleth waveform
Scales
2, 5, 10, 20, 50 mod%, Auto
Start up scale is 20 mod% if AUTO is not selected to be the default setting.
1
Accuracy is based on deep hypoxia studies with volunteered subjects during motion and non-motion conditions over a
wide range of arterial blood oxygen saturation as compared to arterial blood CO-Oximetry. Accuracy may depend on the
sensor used, please refer to the instructions for use in the accessory package.
4
Document no. M1215098-002
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
1.2.4 Temperature
Measurement range
Measurement accuracy
Display resolution
Temperature test
Probe type
Single use sensors
10 to 45 °C (50 to 113 °F)
±0.1 °C (25 to 45.0 °C)
±0.2 °C (10 to 24.9 °C)
0.1 °C (0.1 °F)
automatic (every 10 min.)
compatible with YSI 400 series
±0.3 °C (25 to 45.0 °C)
±0.4 °C (10 to 24.9 °C)
1.2.5 Invasive blood pressure
Measurement range
Measurement accuracy
Zero adjustment range
Calibration range
Scales
Sweep speed
-40 to 320 mmHg
±5% or ±2 mmHg
±150 mmHg
±25%
upper limit is adjustable between 10 and 300 mmHg in steps of
10 mmHg. Lower limit is 10% of selected upper limit below zero.
12.5, 25, 50 mm/s
Digital display
Range
Resolution
-40 to 320 mmHg
±1 mmHg
Waveform display
Range
-30 to 300 mmHg
Pulse rate from arterial pressure
Measurement range
Resolution
Accuracy
30 to 250 bpm
1 bpm
±5 bpm or ±5% whichever is greater
1.2.6 Respiration
The EMC immunity of the respiration measurement has been tested with 1 Vrms and 1 V/m.
This level has been used for optimizing the immunity of the respiration measurement to damp
the operating frequency of the electrosurgery equipment.
WARNING
Impedance respiration measurement is intended for patients over three
years old.
Measurement range
Accuracy
Resolution
Averaging time
Update interval
4 to 120 breath/min
±5 breath/min or ±5%
1 breath/min
30 s
10 s
Respiration waveform
Sweep Speeds
6.25 mm/s and 0.625 mm/s
5
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
1.3 Technical specifications
1.3.1 NIBP
Deflation rate, PR dep.
3 to 8 mmHg/s
Inflation time
20 to 185 mmHg, 1 to 5 s
Automatic software control, max. inflation pressure
adult
280 ±10 mmHg
child
200 ±10 mmHg
infant
145 ±5 mmHg
Over pressure limit, stops measurement after 2 seconds
adult
320 mmHg
child
220 mmHg
infant
160 mmHg
The safety circuit limits the maximum cuff pressure to 320 mmHg in adult/child mode or to 160
mmHg in infant mode. Independent timing circuit limits the pressurizing (>15 mmHg) time to 3
minutes maximum in adult/child mode, and to 90 seconds at (>5mmHg) in infant mode.
Zeroing to ambient pressure is done automatically.
Inflation pressure is adjusted according to the previous systolic pressure, typically 40 mmHg
above. If the systolic pressure is not found, the inflation pressure is increased typically 50
mmHg.
Max. measurement time
adult
120 s
child
120 s
infant
75 s
Pressure transducer accuracy is better than ±3 mmHg or ±2% whichever is greater.
Max. error
±4 mmHg.
Protection against electrical
shock
Type BF defibrillator-proof
1.3.2 ECG
Defibrillation protection
Recovery time
Input impedance
CMRR
System noise
Allowable offset
Gain range
Pacemaker pulse detection
Protection against electrical
shock
5000 V, 360 J
5s
>2.5 MΩ (10 Hz)
>100 dB (ST)
<30 mV (p-p, RTI)
±1VDC
0.2 to 5.0 cm/mV
2 to 700 mV, 0.5 to 2 ms pulses
Type CF defibrillator-proof
1.3.3 Pulse oximetry
Protection against electrical
shock
Type CF defibrillator-proof
1.3.4 Temperature
Measurement accuracy
Protection against electrical
shock
±0.1 °C (25.0 to 45.0 °C)
±0.2 °C (10.0 to 24.9 °C)
Type CF defibrillator-proof
NOTE: The accuracy of the measurement may be different from the specified, depending on
the transducer/probe used. Please refer to the transducer/probe specification.
6
Document no. M1215098-002
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
1.3.5 Invasive blood pressure
Digital display averaging
Digital displays Art and P1 are averaged over 5 seconds and updated at 5 seconds intervals. All
other pressures have respiration artifact rejection.
Accuracy
Transducer and input sensitivity
Filter
Zero set accuracy
Calibration resolution
Zero time
Protection against electrical
shock
±5% or ±2 mmHg, whichever is greater
5 µV/V/mmHg
0 to 4 - 22 Hz adjustable
±1 mmHg
±1 mmHg
less than 15 s
Type CF defibrillator-proof
NOTE: The accuracy of the measurement may be different from the specified, depending on
the transducer/probe used. Please refer to the transducer/probe specification.
1.3.6 Respiration
Excitation frequency,
12-lead ECG
Breath detection
Input dynamic range
Input impedance range
Respiration Rate
Lead off detection
31.25 kHz
automatic, manually adjustable minimum detection: 0.2, 0.4,
0.6, 0.8, 1.0
0.2 to 20 Ω
100 to 5000 Ω
min. 4 breath/min
max. 120 breath/min
>3 MΩ
7
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
2
Functional description
2.1 Measurement principle
2.1.1 NIBP
NIBP (Non-Invasive Blood Pressure) is an indirect method for measuring blood pressure.
The NIBP measurement is performed according to the oscillometric measuring principle. The
cuff is inflated with a pressure slightly higher than the presumed systolic pressure, and deflated
at a speed based on the patient’s pulse, collecting data from the oscillations caused by the
pulsating artery. Based on these oscillations, values for systolic, mean, and diastolic pressures
are calculated.
The following parts are necessary for the NIBP measurement:
•
•
•
E-PSMP/E-PSM module
twin hose (adult or infant model)
blood pressure cuffs (various sizes)
2.1.2 ECG
Electrocardiography analyzes the electrical activity of the heart by measuring the electrical
potential produced with electrodes placed on the surface of the body.
ECG reflects:
•
•
•
•
electrical activity of the heart
normal/abnormal function of the heart
effects of anesthesia on heart function
effects of surgery on heart function
See the “User's Guide” or the “User’s Reference Manual” for electrodes’ positions and other
information.
2.1.3 Pulse oximetry
A pulse oximeter measures the light absorption of blood at two wavelengths, one in the near
infrared (about 940 nm) and the other in the red region (about 660 nm) of the light spectrum.
These wavelengths are emitted by LEDs in the SpO2 probe, the light is transmitted through
peripheral tissue and is finally detected by a PIN-diode opposite the LEDs in the probe. The
pulse oximeter derives the oxygen saturation (SpO2) using an empirically determined
relationship between the relative absorption at the two wavelengths and the arterial oxygen
saturation SaO2.
In order to measure the arterial saturation accurately, pulse oximeters use the component of
light absorption giving variations synchronous with heart beat as primary information on the
arterial saturation.
A general limitation of pulse oximetry is that due to the use of only two wavelengths, only two
hemoglobin species can be discriminated by the measurement.
8
Document no. M1215098-002
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
The modern pulse oximeters are empirically calibrated either against fractional saturation
SaO2frac;
SaO2frac =
HbO2
HbO2 + Hb + Dyshemoglobin
Formula 1
or against functional saturation SaO2func;
SaO2func =
HbO2
HbO2 + Hb
Formula 2
Functional saturation is more insensitive to changes of carboxyhemoglobin and
methemoglobin concentrations in blood.
The oxygen saturation percentage SpO2 measured by the module is calibrated against
functional saturation SaO2func. The advantage of this method is that the accuracy of SpO2
measurement relative to SaO2func can be maintained even at rather high concentrations of
carboxyhemoglobin in blood. Independent of the calibration method, pulse oximeters are not
able to correctly measure oxygen content of the arterial blood at elevated carboxyhemoglobin
or methemoglobin levels.
Plethysmographic pulse wave
The plethysmographic waveform is derived from the IR signal and reflects the blood pulsation
at the measuring site. Thus the amplitude of the waveform represents the perfusion.
Pulse rate
The pulse rate calculation is done by peak detection of the plethysmographic pulse wave. The
signals are filtered to reduce noise and checked to separate artifacts.
Intensity of
transmitted
light
Imax (DC-component)
Imax
Imin
AC-component
Variable absorption
due to pulse added
volume of arterial
blood
Transmitted
light
Arterial blood
Tissue
No pulsation
Pulsatile blood
Time
absorption_of_light.vsd
Venous blood
Incident light
Figure 2
Absorption of infrared light in the finger
9
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
SpO2 sensor connector
RED
Detector
Figure 3
PSM_absorption_of_infrared.vsd
IRED
Emitter
Pulse oximetry probe parts layout and schematic diagram
The standard probe is a finger clamp probe which contains the light source LEDs in one half
and the photodiode detector in the other half. Different kinds of probes are available from GE
Healthcare.
2.1.4 Temperature
The temperature is measured by a probe whose resistance varies when the temperature
changes, called NTC (Negative Temperature Coefficient) resistor.
The resistance can be measured by two complementary methods:
•
Applying a constant voltage across the resistor and measuring the current that flows
through it.
•
Applying a constant current through the resistor and measuring the voltage that is
generated across it.
The E-PSM(P) module uses the constant current method. The NTC-resistor is connected in series
with a normal resistor and a constant current is applied through them. The temperature
dependent voltage can be detected at the junction of the resistors, thus producing the
temperature signal from the patient. The signal is amplified by analog amplifiers and further
processed by digital electronics.
2.1.5 Invasive blood pressure
To measure invasive blood pressure, a catheter is inserted into an artery or vein. The invasive
pressure setup, consisting of a connecting tubing, a pressure transducer, an intravenous bag
of normal saline, all connected together by stopcocks, is attached to the catheter. The
transducer is placed at the same level with the heart, and is electrically zeroed.
The transducer is a piezo-resistive device that converts the pressure signal to a voltage. The
monitor interprets the voltage signal so that pressure data and pressure waveforms can be
displayed.
10
Document no. M1215098-002
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
2.1.6 Respiration
Impedance respiration is measured across the thorax between ECG electrodes. The respiration
signal is made by supplying current between the electrodes and by measuring the differential
current from the electrodes. The signal measured is the impedance change caused by
breathing. The respiration rate is calculated from these impedance changes, and the
respiration waveform is displayed on the screen.
2.2 Main components
2.2.1 E-PSMP/E-PSM
1
2
3
4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Module keys
NIBP connector
InvBP connector in E-PSMP only
Temperature connector
SpO2 connector
ECG and impedance respiration connector
Tab for removing the module
7
5
6
Figure 4
Front panel of E-PSMP
The E-PSMP and E-PSM modules contain three main PC boards, the STP board, the ECG board,
and the NIBP board. Each of these boards contain a processor and software in the processor
flash memory. The boards produce their own supply voltages from the Vmod 13.8-16 V line
that is available via the module bus connector. In addition to this, the NIBP board provides +5V
for the ECG and STP board non-isolated side components. The NIBP board provides also the
synchronization signal for the ECG and STP board power supplies.
There are two input boards; the STP input board and the ECG input board attached to the front
panel of the module. The front panel has five connectors and four keys. There is one connector
for two temperature measurements, one for two invasive blood pressure measurements, one
for ECG, one for NIBP, and one for SpO2 measurement. The NIBP connector includes two
plungers for NIBP hose identification. The keys are for NIBP Auto On/Off, NIBP Start/Cancel, P1
zero, and P2 zero.
NOTE: The connectors and keys depend on the module variant, and some variants may not
have all the mentioned connectors and keys.
11
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
2.2.2 NIBP board
P a t ie n t a n d N I B P c u f f
N IB P c u ff h o s e
N IB P c o n n e c to r w ith N IB P h o s e
id e n t if ic a t io n
N I B P p n e u m a t ic s ( m a n if o ld )
P re s s u re
s e n s o rs
D r iv e r s f o r
p u m p & v a lv e s
M a in C P U
N V m e m o ry
f o r c o n t in u e d
p a t ie n t d a t a
N V m e m o ry
S a fe ty C P U
P o w e r s u p p ly
RS 485
c o m m u n i c a t io n
+5 V and
s y n c h r o n iz a tio n s ig n a l
fo r E C G - a n d
S T P -b o a rd s
M o d u le b u s c o n n e c t o r
Figure 5
PSM_NIBP_blockdiag.vsd
N IB P
c o n tro l
keys
Pum p
NIBP board functional block diagram
Signal processing
Two signals from the pressure transducers are amplified and sent to the A/D converter. After
the converter, digitized signals are sent to the microprocessor for data processing.
The NIBP board is controlled with an H8/3052 microprocessor at 16 MHz oscillator frequency.
Memory
The NIBP program memory (processor flash memory) size is 512k x 8. The processor has
4 kBytes RAM and there is also an external RAM memory, the size of which is 128k x 8. Variable
values of the NIBP measurement are stored into the external RAM. The EEPROM size is 512 x 8
and it is used to store the calibration values for the pressure transducers, the pulse valve
constants gained during measurements, the PC board identification, and the module serial
number.
12
Document no. M1215098-002
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
Software control
The software controls valves and a pump. In addition to the individual on/off signals for each
component there is a common power switch for the valves and the pump that can be used at
pump/valve failures.
In addition to external RS485 reset line, the microprocessor system is equipped with its own
power-up reset. See the section in the ECG board’s description: “RS485 communication.”
Safety circuit
The NIBP board is equipped with an independent safety circuit to disconnect supply voltages
from the pump and the valves if the cuff has been pressurized longer than the preset
maximum measurement time, or if the pressure of the cuff is inflated over the specified
pressure limit. The maximum measurement time values and pressure limits for different
measurement modes have been specified in the technical specification section of this manual.
Pneumatics
The module has the following pneumatics parts:
1.
Intake air filter; for preventing dust and other parts from entering the air pump and the
valves.
2.
Air pump; for pumping the measuring pressure of the cuff.
3.
(Pulse) Valve; for producing a linear pressure fall (bleeding) in order to measure the blood
pressure of the patient.
Note that in the service menu also names Valve and Set valve have been used for this
valve.
4.
Safety valve; The safety valve is intended to be used for deflating the cuff in single fault
case, i.e. to prevent too long a measurement time or too high an inflation pressure of the
cuff.
Note that also Exh2 valve has been used to designate the Safety valve in service menu.
5.
Main pressure sensor; for measuring the pressure of the blood pressure cuff and the
pressure fluctuations caused by arterial wall movement.
6.
Safety pressure sensor; for detecting the cuff loose, cuff occlusion situations, etc. and for
recognizing the pressure sensor fault.
7.
Cuff connector; for connection and hose identification.
13
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
Safety pressure sensor
S1
Plunger
Proportional valve
Air pump
Cuff connector
S2
Main pressure sensor
Dump valve
Intake air filter
Figure 6
PSM_NIBP_pneum_diagr.vsd
Plunger
NIBP pneumatics diagram
Power supply section of the NIBP board
All connections are established via a 5-pin connector (female). The module needs a +15 V (dirty)
power supply to operate. The supply voltage Vmod 13.8- 16 V is generated in the power supply
section of the monitor. The other voltages needed for the operation of the NIBP measurement
are made on the NIBP board.
The NIBP power supply synchronizes the ECG and STP isolation power and supplies
non-isolated 5 V to the ECG and STP board.
14
Document no. M1215098-002
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
2.2.3 ECG board in 12-lead measurement
The 12-lead ECG measurement consists of the functions shown in Figure 7 on page 15. All
functions are located in the ECG board except the ECG input unit.
PATIENT AND ECG ELECTRODES
ECG CABLE
- ECG LEAD SET
- ECG TRUNK CABLE
ECG INPUT UNIT
- ECG CONNECTOR
- INPUT PROTECTION RESISTORS
INPUT PROTECTION DIODES FOR ECG & RESPIRATION MEASUREMENT
INPUT FILTERING FOR ECG & RESPIRATION MEASUREMENTS
RESPIRATION
MEASUREMENT
AMPLIFIERS
RESPIRATION
MEASUREMENT
CURRENT SUPPLY
ECG
PREAMPLIFIERS &
RLD CIRCUIT
LEADS OFF &
PACER &
DEFIBRILLATION
DETECTION
BASELINE
RESTORATION
RS 485
COMMUNICATION
POWER SUPPLY
ISOLATION
ISOLATION
MODULE BUS CONNECTOR
Figure 7
NV
MEMORY
ECG BLOCK DIAGRAM
12_lead_ECG_meas_blck_dgrm.vsd
ECG CPU
12-lead ECG measurement block diagram
ECG input unit
The ECG input unit consists of the front panel connector and the ECG input connector board
with the high voltage protection resistors. The connector for the 12-lead ECG cable is a green
11-pin rectangle shaped connector.
Input protection and filtering
The input protection is implemented with high voltage protection resistors in the ECG input unit
and with protection diodes in the ECG board. The input filtering for ECG measurement is done
with passive RC filtering.
15
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
ECG preamplifiers
The buffer amplifiers are used for each lead. The “Leads off” detection is implemented by
measuring the output level of the input buffer amplifiers with the A/D converter of the CPU. The
ECG signals are measured using differential amplifiers.
ECG amplifiers and baseline restoration
The function of the ECG amplifiers and baseline restoration is to amplify the signal and to
restore the baseline of the signal in the middle of the display after the change of the signal
level, e.g. after the change of the DC offset voltage.
Pacer detection
Pacer detection has been made by using four slew rate detector circuits. The pacer detection
amplifiers have been realized at the front of the slew rate detectors independently of the ECG
measuring channels.
Respiration impedance supply
The 31.25 kHz sine wave generator is used as the respiration measurement signal supply.
Analog switches are used for connecting the sine wave to the ECG leads to be measured.
Respiration impedance amplifiers
Buffer amplifiers are used in respiration measurement. Analog switches are used for selecting
the measurement leads. There are also additional amplifiers for increasing the respiration
signal gain. When ECG measurement is 5/12-lead, the respiration measurement is always done
between R and F, independently on the ECG lead selection. When ECG measurement is 3-lead,
then the respiration measurement happens at the same lead as the ECG measurement (I, II or
III).
ECG CPU
The CPU is a 16 bit H8/3052 single-chip microcomputer. It contains 128 kbytes of flash memory
and 4 kbytes of RAM. The clock frequency is 16 MHz.
RS485 communication
The communication to the CPU board of the monitor uses RS485 protocol. The RS485 driver
circuits are optically isolated from the processor of the module.
Power supply
The ECG board has a driver-controlled half-bridge switching power supply with 5 kV isolation.
The supply voltages have been regulated with linear regulators.
2.2.4 ECG filtering
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 monitors have three ECG filtering modes:
MONITORING
DIAGNOSTIC 12-lead ECG
ST FILTER
0.5 to 30 Hz (with 50 Hz reject filter)
0.5 to 40 Hz (with 60 Hz reject filter)
0.05 to 150 Hz
0.05 to 30 Hz (with 50 Hz reject filter)
0.05 to 40 Hz (with 60 Hz reject filter)
The purpose of filtering is to reduce high frequency noise and low frequency (e.g. respiratory)
movement artifacts.
The monitor filter is used in normal monitoring. The diagnostic filter is used if more accurate
diagnostic information is needed. The ST filter gives more accurate information of ST segment,
but reduces high frequency noise.
16
Document no. M1215098-002
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
The high-pass filters 0.5 Hz and 0.05 Hz are done with software. The monitor sends a command
to the hemodynamic module determining which of the corner frequencies 0.5 Hz or 0.05 Hz is
to be used.
The 50 Hz and 60 Hz reject filters are both low-pass filters with zero at 50 Hz or 60 Hz
correspondingly. They are software based filters used for the mains supply filtering. With these
filters the 3 dB value for low-pass filter is 30 Hz or 40 Hz.
In diagnostic mode the upper frequency is 150 Hz and it is limited by software.
2.2.5 STP board
PATIENT AND SpO2 PROBE
PATIENT AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR
PATIENT AND INVASIVE CANNULA OR
CATHETER
SpO2 TRUNK CABLE
TEMPERATURE CONNECTOR
FLUSHING KIT & INVASIVE PRESSURE
SENSOR WITH DOME
SpO2 CONNECTOR
INPUT PROTECTION CIRCUITRY
INV.PRESSURE CONNECTOR
SpO2 PROBE RECOGNITION & LED
DRIVE SELECTION MATRIX
TEMPERATURE
MEASUREMENT
AMPLIFIER
SpO2 LED
DRIVE
SENSOR SIGNAL
CURRENT
SOURCE
INV: PRESSURE
MEASURE MENT
AMPLIFIER
SENSOR SIGNAL
VOLTAGE
SOURCE
SpO2
AMPLIFIER
A/D CONVERSION
RS 485
COMMUNICATION
POWER SUPPLY
ISOLATION
ISOLATION
NV
MEMORY
MODULE BUS CONNECTOR
Figure 8
STP BLOCK DIAGRAM
STP_brd_blck_dgrm.vsd
STP CPU
STP board block diagram
Microprocessor unit
The CPU is a 16 bit H8/3052 single-chip microcomputer. It contains 128 kbytes of flash memory
and 4 kbytes of RAM. The clock frequency is 16 MHz.
High speed I/O is used to obtain a pulse control sequence necessary for pulse oximetry
measurement. Timing for the clock is from the oscillator.
17
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
Temperature measurement unit
The NTC-resistor value in the probe depends on the patient’s temperature. It is measured with
the following principle described below.
The constant current source is supplied about 38 μA current through the temperature sensor
(YSI 400-series NTC resistor). The constant current is caused a voltage over the temperature
sensor (NTC resistor). The voltage over the temperature sensor is amplified in a differential
amplifier stage. The amplified voltage is transferred to a controller of the STP board through an
A/D converter.
constant
current
source
Defibrillation/ESD protection
resistors and diodes
Temperature
sensors T1, T2
Ref1
Ref2
T2
R
R
R
0C:7k36
15C:3k54
25C:2k53
38C:1k30
45C: 984
R
R
Figure 9
Differential
amplifier
d/dt
0
0
0
To A/D
converter
0
PSM_temp_meas_principle.vsd
T1
R
Temperature measurement principle
Invasive blood pressure measurement unit
An isolated +5 V voltage is supplied to the pressure transducer. The differential voltage, which
depends on the pressure and the supplied voltage, is calculated from the bridge connection
(see the formula below).
Uout = Uin × pressure × 5 μV, where Uin is 5 V
⇒ Uout = 25 μV × pressure [mmHg]
18
Document no. M1215098-002
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
Pressure amplification is realized in the instrumentation amplifier. The gain of the amplifier is
set to keep the level of the signal transferred to the A/D converter within the measurement
range even when there are circumstantial offsets or offsets caused by the transducer. There is
a filter before the amplifier to attenuate high frequency disturbances.
Vin
Current
measurement
G
to AD converter
Pressure
transducer
Vout
Input filter
G
to A D converter
Figure 10
PSM_pressure_meas_principle.vsd
Instrum entation
amplifier
Pressure measurement principle
Pulse oximetry measurement section
LED control signals
The D/A converters of the microcontroller on the STP board set the LED intensity adjustment
values for the infrared and red LEDs of the SpO2 probe. The microcontroller on the STP board
switches ON (to the adjusted intensity) and OFF the SpO2 probe LEDs according to the
predetermined sequence.
LED driving circuit
Differential amplifiers measure the LED currents (LED current indication) of the SpO2 probe over
the shunt resistors placed in the LED current paths. The LED driving voltages (LED voltage
indication) are measured from the driver circuitry. The LED driving circuits also have MOSFET
transistor matrix to enable the use of different probe configurations.
Measured signal preamplification
The preamplifier is a bipolar/single-ended current-to-voltage converter with adjustable gain. A
higher gain is used for measuring thin tissue. The preamplification stage has also ambient light
reduction and a second amplifier stage.
19
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
LED Driving circuit 1
LED Intensity adjustment 1
LED ON/OFF control 1
LED voltage indication 1
LED current indication 1
LED Driving circuit 2
LED Intensity adjustment 2
LED ON/OFF control 2
LED voltage indication 2
SpO2
Probe
LED current indication 2
LP
Oximeter channel 1
Gain=7.5
DCsuppression
LP
Ambient reduction
DCsuppression
DCsuppression
Oximeter channel 4
LP
DE-MUX
Analog
Figure 11
Oximeter channel 3
Gain=7.5
Amplifiers
Digital
Spo2_measurement_blck_diagr.vsd
LP
Amplifier:
Gain = 2
Preamplifier:
Current-to-voltage type
Bipolar/single-ended modes
Adjustable gain
Oximeter channel 2
Gain=7.5
Pulse oximetry measurement block diagram
Red and infrared channel separation
It is possible to multiplex the detector signal to four different channels depending on the
content of the signal. The detector signal must at least multiplex into infrared and red signals.
Other channels are e.g. for diagnostic purposes.
Serial communication
An RS485 type bus driver makes the serial communication between the module and the frame.
The data transmission rate is 500kbps.
20
Document no. M1215098-002
Figure 12
SEND DATA
DATA
NDATA
SEND/RECEIVE
SEND DATA
SEND/RECEIVE
DATA
RS 485
DRIVER
NDATA
STP BOARD CONNECTOR
RECEIVE DATA
PATIENT ISOLATION
STP BOARD
+5 V
Module bus connector
RS 485
DRIVER
+5 V
synchronization signal
RECEIVE DATA
NIBP BOARD CONNECTOR
NIBP BOARD
SEND DATA
SEND/RECEIVE
DATA
RS 485
DRIVER
NDATA
+5 V
PSM_serial_communication.vsd
RECEIVE DATA
ECG BOARD CONNECTOR
ECG BOARD
DIRECT ECG (PWM)
PATIENT ISOLATION
ECG BOARD CONTROLLER
STP BOARD CONTROLLER
NIBP BOARD CONTROLLERS
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
Serial communication of E-PSM(P) module
Signals and isolation barrier
The communication signals transfer over the isolation barrier by using high isolation voltage
(6kV) opto isolators.
Power supply section
The power for the electronics on the floating part of the STP and the ECG boards is made on
each board with the switching power supplies connected to a high voltage isolated
transformer. The switching power supplies on the STP and ECG boards are synchronized to the
frequency, about 340kHz of the switching power supply on the NIBP board. The NIBP board
supplies non-isolated 5 V to the ECG and STP boards. The module uses only Vmod 13.8 - 16 V
voltage of the frame. The other voltages of the measuring boards are made by the switching
power supplies and regulators or the linear regulators. Each measuring board is protected
against overloading with PTC type automatic fuses.
21
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
2.3 Connectors and signals
2.3.1 Module bus connector
Table 8
Module bus connector description
5 pin connector
Pin No.
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
GND
Vmod 13.8 - 16 V
Data +
Data Shield
2.3.2 Front panel connectors
Table 9
ECG connector
ECG Connector
22
Document no. M1215098-002
Pin No.
Signal Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
R/RA; Right arm electrode
C2/V2; Chest electrode
C3/V3; Chest electrode
L/LA; Left arm electrode
N/RL; Neutral/Right Leg Drive electrode
C1/V1; Chest electrode
C4/V4; Chest electrode
F/LL; Left Leg electrode
C6/V6; Chest electrode
C5/V5; Chest electrode
Cable Shield
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
Table 10
SpO2 connector
SpO2 connector
Table 11
Pin No.
Signal
Description
1
DET_A
Photodiode anode
2
DET_C
Photodiode cathode
3
DATA-
4
Wire 1/3
LED connection
5
IR_C
IR LED cathode
6
OUTER SHIELD
7
DET_SHIELD
8
PRB_ID
Bin/ID Resistor+
9
Wire 3/5
LED Connection
10
RED_C
RED LED cathode
11
DATA+
Invasive blood pressure connectors (P1, P2)
Invasive blood pressure
connectors (Dual BP)
Pin
No.
Signal
Description
1
BP_+VREF BP transducer excitation voltage, channel 1
2
BP SIG+
3
BP_+VREF BP transducer excitation voltage, channel 2
4
AGND
Analog ground
5
BP SIG+
BP transducer signal positive (+), channel 2
6
SHIELD
BP cable shield
7
AGND
Analog ground
8
BP SIG1
BP transducer signal negative (-), channel 1
9
BP SIG2
BP transducer signal negative (-), channel 2
10
BP1_ID
BP1 probe identification
11
NC
Not connected
BP transducer signal positive (+), channel 1
23
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
Table 12
Temp connector (T1, T2)
Temp connector
24
Document no. M1215098-002
Pin No
Signal
1
Sensor drive current
2
Input from temperature sensor, channel 1
3
Not connected
4
Not connected
5
Thermistor ID (LOW= Temperature error,
HIGH=YSI 400 series)
6
Cable shield
7
Analog ground
8
Input from temperature sensor, channel 2
9
Not connected
10
Not connected
11
Digital ground
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
3
Service procedures
3.1 General service information
The field service of the hemodynamic modules is limited to replacing faulty printed circuit
boards or mechanical parts. The circuit boards should be returned to GE Healthcare for repair.
GE Healthcare is always available for service advice. Please provide the unit serial number, full
type designation, and a detailed fault description.
WARNING
Only trained personnel with appropriate equipment should perform the
tests and repairs outlined in this section. Unauthorized service may void
warranty of the unit.
3.2 Service check
These instructions include complete procedures for a service check. The service check is
mandatory after any service repair. However, the service check procedures can also be used
for determining possible failures.
The procedures should be performed in ascending order.
The instructions include a check form (“APPENDIX A:”) which may be used when performing the
procedures.
The symbol
"
in the instructions indicates that the check form contains space to record the
results of the particular procedure.
3.2.1 Recommended tools
NOTE: Use only properly maintained, calibrated and traceable measurement equipment for the
specified calibrations and adjustments to ensure accuracy.
Table 13
Recommended tools
Tool
Order No.
For product(s)
Hemodynamic patient simulator
M1010831
E-PSM(P)
Adapter cables for simulators
-
Dual temperature adapter cable 2016998-001
Hemodynamic patient simulator
and Medsim
-
Dual Inv.BP adapter cable
2005772-001
Hemodynamic patient simulator
-
Temperature adapter cable
M1010832
Medsim
-
Inv.BP adapter cable
M1010858
Medsim
-
Temperature adapter cable
M1010846
Lionheart & MPS450
-
Inv.BP adapter cable
M1010862
Lionheart & MPS450
Pressure manometer
E-PSMP
Accessories:
Temperature test set
884515-HEL
E-PSM(P)
25
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
Tool
Order No.
For product(s)
Multi-Link ECG accessories, IEC:
-
Multi-link 3-leadwire set
412682-003
E-PSM(P)
-
Multi-link 5-leadwire set
412681-003
E-PSM(P)
-
Multi-link 5-leadwire set, C2-C6
416467-004
E-PSM(P)
-
Multi-link 12-lead ECG trunk
cable
416035-002
E-PSM(P)
Multi-Link ECG accessories, AHA:
-
Multi-link 3-leadwire set
412682-001
E-PSM(P)
-
Multi-link 5-leadwire set
416681-001
E-PSM(P)
-
Multi-link 5-leadwire set, V2-V6
416467-003
E-PSM(P)
-
Multi-link 12-lead ECG trunk
cable
416035-001
E-PSM(P)
SpO2 finger probe
OXY-F-UN
E-PSM(P)
SpO2 Interconnect Cable
OXY-ES3
E-PSM(P)
InvBP transducer
70077-001
E-PSMP
Adult NIBP cuff hose with cuff ID
2021285-001
E-PSM(P)
Adult NIBP cuff
2753E
E-PSM(P)
Infant cuff hose without cuff ID
414874-001
E-PSM(P)
Screwdriver
3.2.2 Recommended parts
Table 14
Recommended parts
Part
Order No.
Notes
E-PSM(P), Air Filter, FRU
M1221481
Replace every 3 years
3.2.3 Visual inspection
Detach the module cover by removing the four screws from the bottom of the module.
Check:
1.
Internal parts
−
screws are tightened properly
−
connectors are connected properly
−
NIBP tubing is attached properly
−
there are no loose objects inside the module
"
2.
External parts
−
26
Document no. M1215098-002
the front cover and the front panel sticker are intact
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
−
all connectors are intact and attached properly
−
the module box and latch are intact
"
3.2.4 Functional inspection
3.
NIBP pump filter
Replace the NIBP pump filter, if necessary.
"
Reattach the module cover and check that the latch is moving properly.
Switch the monitor on and wait until the monitoring screen appears. Configure the
monitor screen so that all the needed parameters are shown, for example as follows:
Monitor Setup - Screen 1 Setup - Waveform Fields - Field 1 - ECG1
Field 2 - ECG2
Field 3 - P1
Field 4 - P2
Field 5 - Pleth
Field 6 - Resp
Digit Fields - Lower Field 2 - NIBP
Lower Field 3 - T1+T2
4.
Module installation
Plug in the module. Check that it goes in smoothly and locks up properly.
"
5.
Module recognition
Check that the module is recognized, i.e. all the needed parameter information, except
invasive blood pressure, starts to show on the screen.
"
Preset ECG, Respiration, InvBP and SpO2 measurement settings:
ECG - ECG Setup - Hr Source - Auto
Pacemaker - Show
Others - Resp Setup - Size - 1.0
Resp Rate Source - Auto
Measurement - On
Detection Limit - Auto
Invasive Pressures - P1 ‘Art’ Setup - Label - Art
P2 ‘Cvp’ Setup - Label - Cvp
PulseOximetry - Pleth Scale - Auto
27
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
ECG measurement
6.
Module software (serial numbers)
Enter the service menu:
Monitor Setup - Install/Service (password 16-4-34) Service (password 26-23-8)
Take down the information regarding the module software by selecting Scroll Vers and
turning the ComWheel.
"
7.
Communication and memories
Enter the Parameters - ECG service menu.
Check that the Time-outs, Bad checksums and Bad c-s by mod values are not increasing
faster than by 5 per second. Check also that the ECG/RESP board memories have passed
the internal memory test, i.e. the RAM, ROM and EEPROM state all OK.
"
8.
Power frequency
Check that the power frequency value is set according to the current mains power
frequency. Change the setting by selecting Power Freq, if necessary.
"
9.
Cable recognition
Connect a 12-lead ECG trunk cable without a lead set to the module. Check that the
message ‘Leads off’ is displayed on the screen.
"
10.
Lead detection
Connect both 5-leadwire sets to the trunk cable. Connect all the leads together, for
example to a suitable screwdriver. Check that all the electrodes show ON and the
message ‘Asystole’ appears. Check that the Cable type shows 10 lead.
Connect the 10-leadwire set to the simulator. Disconnect one of the leads and check that
the corresponding electrode in the service menu shows OFF within 10 seconds of the
disconnection, and then reconnect the lead. Check the rest of the leads using the same
method. Disconnect the trunk cable.
Connect a 3-leadwire set to a trunk cable and connect it to the module. Connect all the
leads together, for example to a suitable screwdriver. Check that the cable type shows 3
lead.
NOTE: When any of the limb leads is disconnected, the measurement will automatically
change to 3 electrode ECG measurement.
NOTE: The asystole and different leads off messages are shown using certain priority.
Even though one of the leads is disconnected, the related leads off message may not
appear on the screen.
NOTE: When RA, LA, LL or RL electrode is disconnected, all six V electrodes show OFF.
"
28
Document no. M1215098-002
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
11.
Test with the patient simulator
Connect the leads to a patient simulator.
Perform the settings and checks with Dynatech Nevada MedSim 300 Patient Simulator:
ECG - BASE - BPM - 160
PACE - WAVE - NSR
Check that a normal ECG waveform is shown, the HR value is 160 (±5) and the ‘Pacer
count’ value is not increasing in the service menu.
ECG - PACE - WAVE - ASNC
Check that pacemaker spikes are shown on the ECG waveform, the HR value changes to
75 (±5) and the Pacer count value is increasing according to the shown pacemaker spikes.
Set the pacemaker option off:
ECG - PACE - WAVE - NSR
"
Respiration measurement
12.
RESP measurement recognition
Check that Resp Available and RESP Measurement both show ON in the ESTP: ECG service
menu.
"
13.
Test with patient simulator
Check the respiration measurement with a patient simulator.
The settings and checks with Dynatech Nevada MedSim 300 Patient Simulator:
Simulator Cover:
BASELINE IMPEDANCE -switch - 500
LEAD SELECT-switch - II/RL-LL
Simulator Menu:
RESP - WAVE - NORM
RATE - 20
OHMS - 1.0
RATIO - 1/1
APNEA - OFF
SHIFT - OFF
Check that the RESP waveform is shown and the RR value is 20 (±5). Change the position
of the BASELINE IMPEDANCE switch and check that appropriate RESP waveform and RR
value are shown again within 30 seconds.
RESP - APNEA - 32 S
Check that the monitor activates the APNEA alarm.
NOTE: Make sure that only the ECG leads are connected to the simulator during the apnea
test. If other cables are connected at the same time, the respiration signal from the
simulator may be disturbed, and therefore, the APNEA alarm may not be activated.
NOTE: When you have the ECG service menu open, spikes will appear on the respiration
waveform. These spikes represent the threshold level for detecting inspiration and
expiration.
"
29
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
Temperature measurement
14.
Communication and memories
Enter the ESTP: STP service menu:
Parameters - ESTP : STP
Check that the Time-outs, Bad checksums and Bad c-s by mod values do not increase
faster than by 5 per second. Check also that the STP board memories have passed the
internal memory test, i.e. the RAM, ROM and EEPROM show all OK.
"
15.
Temperature probe detection
Check that the ‘Cable’ and ‘Probe’ show OFF for both channels, T1 and T2, when no
probes are connected.
Connect the temperature adapter cable to the module temperature connector and a
temperature test plug to the adapter cable. Check that the Cable and Probe for T1 show
ON and the corresponding temperature value appears on the monitor screen.
Perform the same check also for the channel T2.
"
16.
Calibration check
Check the temperature calibrations using temperature test plugs.
If the deviation on a temperature reading on the screen is more than 0.1°C, calibrate the
temperature channels according to the instructions in chapter “Temperature calibration”
on page 45.”
"
17.
Temp test
Activate the temperature test by selecting Temp Test from the menu and pressing the
ComWheel twice. When the message ‘Performing temp test’ disappears from the digit
field, check that no error messages appear and Temp error shows OFF for both channels
in the service menu.
"
18.
Module configuration
Check that the module configuration has been set correctly. The configuration in use is
shown beside the text Configuration in the service menu and it can be either STP or ST.
Change the configuration in the Calibrations - Set Config menu, if necessary. To activate
the change, reset the module communication by removing and inserting the module.
"
30
Document no. M1215098-002
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
Invasive blood pressure measurement
19.
Membrane keys
Check the front panel membrane keys that are related to the InvBP measurement.
Press each of the keys for at least one second. Check that the pressed key is identified, i.e.
one of the texts for Buttons changes from OFF to ON in the service menu.
"
20.
Cable and transducer detection
Check that the Cable and Probe for P1 show OFF. Connect the InvBP adapter cable to the
module, connect a cable with an invasive blood pressure transducer to the adapter cable
and check that the Cable and Probe show ON and the corresponding pressure waveform
appears on the screen.
Perform the same check also for the InvBP channel P2.
"
21.
Calibration
Calibrate the InvBP channels P1 and P2 according to the instructions in chapter “Invasive
pressure calibration” on page 45.“
"
22.
Test with patient simulator
Check the InvBP channels with a patient simulator.
The settings and checks with Dynatech Nevada MedSim 300 Patient Simulator:
SENSITIVITY - switch - 5 µV/V/mmHg
ECG - BASE - BPM - 60 - BP - 1 - WAVE - ATM
2 - WAVE - ATM
Restore the normal monitoring screen by pressing the key Normal Screen.
Connect cables from the channels BP1 and BP2 to the module connectors. Zero the InvBP
channels by pressing the keys ZERO P1 and ZERO P2 on the module front panel.
BP - 1 - WAVE - ART
2 - WAVE - CVP
Check that appropriate InvBP waveforms are shown and the InvBP values are
approximately 120/80 (±3 mmHg) for the channel P1 and 15/10 (±2 mmHg) for the
channel P2.
Check that the HR value is calculated from P1, when ECG is not measured (ECG cable
disconnected).
"
SpO2 measurement
23.
SpO2 probe detection
Check that the message ‘No probe’ is shown, when no SpO2 sensor is connected to the
module. Connect an SpO2 finger probe to the module (with the interconnection cable, if
needed). Check that the message ‘Probe off’ is shown when the probe is not connected to
a finger.
"
31
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
24.
Test measurement
Connect the SpO2 probe onto your finger. Check that the reading of 95-99 and SpO2
waveform appears. Check that the HR value is calculated from SpO2 when ECG and InvBP
(P1) are not measured.
"
Non Invasive Blood Pressure measurement
25.
Communication and memories
Enter the NIBP module service menu:
Parameters - NIBP
Check that the Time-outs, Bad checksums and Bad c-s by mod values are not increasing
faster than by 5 per second. Check also that the NIBP board memories have passed the
internal memory test, i.e. the RAM, ROM and EEPROM show all OK.
"
26.
Membrane keys
Check the front panel membrane keys.
Select Buttons/Leds.
Press each of the two NIBP related membrane keys for at least one second. Check that
the pressed key is identified, i.e. the corresponding text changes from OFF to ON in the
menu, when the key is released back up again.
"
27.
Pump and valves
Check the pump and valves.
Select Pneumatics from the NIBP menu. Connect a pressure manometer to the NIBP
module cuff connector.
Select Start Pump and press the ComWheel. Check that the pump turns on and the
pressure inside the tubing system starts to increase. Stop the pump by pressing the
ComWheel again when the pressure reaches 280 mmHg.
Select Open Exh2. Press the ComWheel and check that the pressure inside the tubing
system starts to drop, then press the ComWheel again. If necessary, turn the pump on
again for a moment to increase the pressure inside the tubing system.
Select Set Valve. Press the ComWheel and set the value under the text Pulse Valve to
number 150 by turning the ComWheel. Press the ComWheel again and check that the
pressure inside the tubing system starts to drop. Finish the test by selecting Previous
Menu.
"
28.
Leak test
Check the NIBP tubing system for leakages.
Select Calibrations from the NIBP service menu.
Connect the pressure manometer to the NIBP module cuff connector. Start the active leak
test from the menu by pressing the ComWheel. The module pumps a pressure of about
290 mmHg and then the pump stops. The max pressure in Adult mode is about 290
mmHg, but in Infant mode only 140mmHg.
32
Document no. M1215098-002
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
Wait for 15 seconds for the pressure to stabilize then check that the pressure does not
drop more than 6 mmHg per one minute. Release the pressure by pressing the
ComWheel once more.
"
29.
Calibration check
Recalibrate the NIBP measurement according to the instructions in section “NIBP
calibrations” on page 44. Remember to set the calibration protection back on after the
calibration.
Disconnect the pressure manometer. Select Calibrations - Calibration Check. Press the
ComWheel and take down the zero offset values for both pressure transducers, B1 and
B2. The values should be within ±20 mmHg.
Connect the pressure manometer to the cuff connector and check the calibration with
pressures 100 mmHg, 200 mmHg and 260 mmHg. The zero offset value must be added to
the displayed pressure value in order to determine the real pressure.
"
30.
Safety valve functions
Select Safety Valve from the NIBP service menu.
Disconnect the pressure manometer from the NIBP module cuff connector. Connect the
NIBP hose and cuff to the NIBP module cuff connector. Perform the check with a
standard adult cuff that is connected around some round object, for example a
calibration gas bottle.
Select Start Test. Start the adult safety valve test by pressing the ComWheel. Wait until
the pump stops and the pressure is deflated.
Open cuff connector or disconnect and connect cuff connector from module
Check the pressure values ‘Max press’ and ‘2 s after stop’ for both transducers. All the
values should be within 270 - 330 mmHg.
Select ADULT. Press the ComWheel and check that the text changes now to INFANT.
Select Start Test and wait until the pump stops and the pressure values on the screen
have been updated.
Open cuff connector or disconnect and connect cuff connector from module
Check that the values ‘Max press’ and ‘2 s after stop’ are all now within 135 to 165 mmHg.
Return to the normal monitoring mode by pressing Normal Screen.
"
31.
Cuff related messages
Connect an adult NIBP cuff to the cuff connector and disconnect one of its hoses.
Start NIBP measurement by pressing the key Start/Cancel on the module and check
that the message ‘Cuff loose’ appears on the screen within 70 seconds.
Reconnect the hose and then bend it with your fingers. Restart the measurement and
check that the message ‘Cuff occlusion’ appears on the screen within 70 seconds.
"
33
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
32.
Test measurement
Check that the automatic inflation limits are in use:
NIBP - NIBP Setup - Inflation Limits - Auto - Previous Menu
Connect the cuff onto your arm, select Start Ven.Stasis in the NIBP menu and press the
ComWheel. Check that the module identifies the cuff, i.e. the text Adult appears in the
NIBP digit field for a short moment.
Keep the pressure inside the cuff for about half a minute in order to find out that the cuff
is not leaking, then press the ComWheel again. Select Normal Screen.
Disconnect the cuff hose.
"
33.
NIBP hose detection
Press the Start/ Cancel module or side panel key and check that the ‘Cuff loose’
message appears in the NIBP digit field.
Attach a NIBP cuff hose without cuff identification and check that the module identifies
the hose:
−
The message ‘Select inflation limits’ appears in the NIBP digit field.
−
When you try to start the measurement, the monitor automatically opens the
selections NIBP Setup - Inflation Limits.
"
All modules
34.
Electrical safety check
Perform an electrical safety check and a leakage current test.
"
35.
Functioning after electrical safety check
Check that the module functions normally after the performed electrical safety check.
"
36.
Final cleaning
Clean the module with suitable detergent.
"
Fill in all necessary documents.
34
Document no. M1215098-002
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
3.3 Disassembly and reassembly
3.3.1 Before disassembly
WARNING
Wear a grounded, antistatic wristband when handling PC boards.
Electrostatic discharge may damage components on the board.
Handle all PC boards by their edges.
3.3.2 Tools needed
CAUTION
-
torx screwdrivers; T6, T8
-
flat blade screwdriver
-
pincers
-
antistatic wristband
When reassembling the module, make sure to reconnect all cables properly.
3.3.3 To disassemble the module
1. Remove the four screws (T8) holding the module cover to the
frame from the bottom of the module.
2. Hold the cover from the back corners, lift it about 45° to
unlock the snaps from the front unit and pull the cover out
backwards.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the seal. When reassembling
the seal may stick to the cover.
35
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
3. To remove the NIBP board:
NOTE: You may remove the NIBP filter cover and the filter before
disconnecting the flex cable.
-
Disconnect the module bus connector, pump connector and
NIBP flex connector.
-
Disconnect the hoses (2 pcs) coming from the manifold.
NOTE: Note the positions of the hoses; mark them if necessary
to ensure they are replaced correctly.
-
Remove the NIBP board.
4. Disconnect the air intake hose from the NIBP manifold.
NOTE: The lips of the insulator plates secure the module bus
connectors. While reassembling the insulator plates, ensure
that the connector secure lips support the connectors correctly.
36
Document no. M1215098-002
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
5. Lift the NIBP-STP insulator plate carefully up.
6. To remove the STP board
-
Carefully open the connector lock and then disconnect the
STP input flex cable from the STP board.
NOTE: When reassembling, ensure that the flex cable is aligned
properly and the connector is locked.
-
Lift the STP board a little to disconnect the module bus
connector. Remove the STP board.
7. Remove the STP-ECG insulator plate. Be careful not to
damage the NIBP hoses.
8. Hold down the ECG board. Carefully open the connector lock
and then disconnect the ECG input flex cable from the ECG
board.
NOTE: When reassembling, ensure that the flex cable is aligned
properly and the connector is locked.
37
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
9. To remove the ECG board
-
While holding the ECG input unit out of the way, lift the ECG
board a little and disconnect the module bus connector.
-
Remove the ECG board.
10. Remove the NIBP filter cover and the filter. (If not removed
already.)
11. Remove the four screws (T6) with washers holding the NIBP
pump to the frame.
12. Flip the module over and remove the two (T6) screws holding
the lock unit to the frame. While pulling the tab push the
lockers with a screwdriver to remove the lock unit.
13. Carefully lift up the front unit together with the NIBP pump.
Reassemble the module in reverse order.
Always perform the “Service check” after reassembling the module.
38
Document no. M1215098-002
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
To remove the pump unit
14. Disconnect the hoses from the manifold. The hoses follow
the pump.
3.3.4 To remove the manifold unit
15. Disconnect the two (T6) screws holding the
manifold to the front cover unit.
16. Open the connector lock from the NIBP flex
board and disconnect the membrane
keyboard flex.
39
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
17. Lift the manifold carefully aside. Be careful
not to damage the NIBP flex board.
Disconnect the NIBP flex board connector
from the STP input board.
NOTE: When reassembling, make sure that the
NIBP flex board connector is connected properly
(all pins connected) to the STP input board.
Reassemble the module in reverse order.
Always perform the “Service check” after reassembling the module.
40
Document no. M1215098-002
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
3.3.5 To remove the module bus connector
18. Use a flat blade screwdriver to unlock the
module bus connector insulator cover.
Put the screwdriver in the hole and move the
blade backwards (away from the flex cable)
until the insulator cover unlocks.
19. Pull the module bus connector carefully
through the hole in the frame.
Reassemble the module in reverse order.
Always perform the “Service check” after reassembling the module.
41
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
3.3.6 To replace the NIBP filter
1. Follow the disassemble instruction steps 1
and 2.
2. Remove the NIBP filter cover and replace the
filter.
Reassemble the module in reverse order.
Always perform the “Service check” after reassembling the module.
42
Document no. M1215098-002
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
3.4 Adjustments and calibrations
NOTE: Use only properly maintained, calibrated and traceable measurement equipment for the
specified calibrations and adjustments to ensure accuracy.
3.4.1 NIBP calibrations
The electronics of the NIBP pressure measurement is calibrated at the factory. The processor
automatically maintains the zeroing pressure. If the zero point of the pressure transducer drifts
more than specified, an error message is given and the NIBP board should be recalibrated or
replaced.
Recalibrate the NIBP measurement once a year. The checking and recalibration can be done in
the NIBP service menu.
The calibration of the primary pressure channel can also be checked from the NIBP setup
menu (NIBP - NIBP Setup - Calibration Check). In this case, the auto zeroing is performed at
start - remove the hose before entering to ensure atmospheric pressure to the pressure
transducers - the primary pressure is displayed. The zero-offset value should then be zero.
Check the intake air filter as part of the calibration check. Change the filter if it is visibly dirty.
Calibration check
1.
Enter Calibration menu:
Monitor Setup - Install/Service (password 16-4-34) -Service (26-23-8) - Parameters -
PRESTN_calib_menu.vsd
PRESTN_calib_menu.vsd
NIBP - Calibrations
2.
Select Calibration Check and push the ComWheel.
3.
Connect an external precision manometer to the module.
4.
Pump the following pressures to manometer and check the difference between the
manometer and monitor pressure display (The zeroing offset is automatically subtracted
from the pressure readings).
43
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
Table 3
NIBP calibration check pressures
Pressure
Max. error
Example
0 mmHg
±5 mmHg (=zero offset)
-1
100 mmHg
100 ±2 mmHg
100 ±2
200 mmHg
200 ±3 mmHg
200 ±3
260 mmHg
260 +/-3 mmHg
200 ±3
If the error of pressure channel B1 is larger than specified above, the module should be
recalibrated. The error of B2 is allowed to be even twice as large because it has no effect on
blood pressure measurement accuracy. However, we recommend recalibrating the module
when the error of B2 is larger than specified above to ensure best possible operation.
Calibration
1.
Enter Calibration menu.
2.
Remove the hoses from the front panel connector to enable proper zeroing.
3.
Select Calibration. If it is not available, perform the steps a, b, and c.
NOTE: Do not pull out the hemodynamic module from the monitor frame. The module must be
in the frame during the whole procedure.
a.
b.
c.
Press the hemodynamic module buttons Auto ON/OFF and Start Cancel
simultaneously for 3 seconds to enable the calibration. This enables menu selection
Protection. The message ‘Calibration switch ON!’ is displayed.
Select Protection OFF in the Calibration menu and push the ComWheel.
Press the buttons again for 3 seconds. Menu selection Calibration is now enabled, and
Protection is disabled. When the calibration is enabled, a message ‘Calibration not
protected’ is displayed.
•
Start calibration by pushing the ComWheel. Messages ‘Zeroing’ and ‘Zeroed’ will be
displayed in the NIBP message field. After this, a pressure bar and text ‘Calibrating’ will be
displayed.
•
Connect an external mercury manometer with a pump to the module through the both
tubes of the hose - both transducers B1 and B2 must be calibrated simultaneously. Pump
up to a pressure of about 200 mmHg according to the manometer. Calibration is possible
in the range of 150 to 250 mmHg.
•
Verify that both pressure values in the prompt field match the manometer reading. If not,
adjust by turning the ComWheel. When the values of the pressure bar and the
manometer are equal, push the ComWheel to confirm the calibration. The message
‘Calibrated’ will be displayed on the NIBP digit field after a few seconds, which means that
the calibration succeeded, and the new calibration data is saved in EEPROM.
NOTE: When calibrating NIBP, always change the displayed pressure value slightly with the
ComWheel, even in cases where the value would be correct. For example, change the value
one step higher and then back one step lower. ‘Calibrated’ text should appear in the display.
This ensures that the calibration procedure is correctly registered and stored by the module.
•
To set the protection on:
Press NIBP module buttons Auto ON/OFF and Start Cancel simultaneously for 3
seconds. Select Protection ON and push the ComWheel. Then press the buttons again for
three seconds.
44
Document no. M1215098-002
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
•
Remove the module from the frame and plug it back again. Then perform “Calibration
check” (see the preceding page) to verify the new calibration.
3.4.2 Temperature calibration
NOTE: For the temperature calibration, separate, accurate test plugs (25 °C and 45 °C) are
needed. A test set of two plugs is available from GE Healthcare, order code 884515-HEL.
A Dual temperature adapter cable, order code 2016998-001 is also required for the
temperature calibration.
Calibrate the temperature, when the measured test values differ for more than ±0.1 °C, and
always after STP board replacement.
1.
Enter the STP service menu.
(Monitor Setup - Install/Service (password 16-4-34) - Service (password 26-23-8) Parameters).
2.
Enter Calibrations menu.
3.
Choose Protection OFF in protect mode.
4.
Select Calibrate T1/Calibrate T2.
5.
Insert calibration plug (25 °C) into T1/T2 connector.
6.
Push the ComWheel.
7.
Insert calibration plug (45 °C) into T1/T2 connector.
8.
Push the ComWheel.
9.
Choose Protection ON in protect mode.
3.4.3 Invasive pressure calibration
NOTE: Before starting invasive pressure calibration, disconnect all patient cables and discharge
the patient.
NOTE: For the Invasive pressure calibration a Dual InvBP adapter cable, order code
2005722-001, is needed.
Calibrate the invasive pressure when the pressure transducer (probe) is replaced with a
different type of transducer, and when the STP board is replaced.
1.
Enter the STP service menu.
(Monitor Setup - Install/Service (password 16-4-34) - Service (password 26-23-8) Parameters).
2.
Enter Calibrations menu.
3.
Connect a pressure transducer with a pressure manometer to the P1/P2 connector.
Choose Calibrate P1 or Calibrate P2. Leave the transducer to room air pressure.
4.
Push the ComWheel to start zeroing.
5.
Supply a pressure of 100 mmHg to 300 mmHg to the transducer. The recommended
pressure is 200 mmHg.
6.
Set the pressure on the display to match the pressure reading on the manometer and
push the ComWheel. A tolerance of ±1 mmHg is allowed.
7.
The message ‘Calibrated’ will be displayed on the display.
45
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
4
Troubleshooting
4.1 Troubleshooting charts
See also the “User’s Reference Manual” for more troubleshooting procedures.
4.1.1 NIBP
Problem
Cause
What to do
No NIBP value displayed
NIBP not selected on screen.
Check monitor setup.
NIBP menu fading
No E-PSM(P) module, module not
properly connected.
Plug in the module.
‘Artifacts’ message
Unsuccessful measurement due to
patient movement, shivering,
external artifact or weak signal.
Check the patient status.
‘Weak pulsation’ message
Weak or unstable oscillation pulses
due to:
Check patient condition and retry.
•
•
artifacts
Use proper size of cuff. Check
attachment.
•
improper cuff position or
attachment
•
•
too few pulses detected
•
obese patient
weak pulse pressure due to
arrhythmias
Check any leaks and retry.
weak or unusual blood
circulation
Call service
‘Error X’ message
NIBP hardware error.
X = error number.
See the description of the error message
code, the causes and the solutions listed
in the “NIBP error code explanation”
chapter.
‘Cuff loose’ message
1. Hose and/or cuff not connected. 1. Connect the hose and the cuff.
2. Hose and cuff connected.
Reasons:
46
Document no. M1215098-002
-
cuff loosely wrapped
-
Tighten the cuff.
-
leakage inside the shield, in the
Patient connector panel or
tubings connecting to the
module
-
Check the tubings inside the shield
and Patient connector panel, fix if
necessary.
-
leakage in cuff or hose
-
Replace cuff/hose.
-
leakage inside module
-
Check internal tubing and fix if
necessary.
-
pump does not work
-
Check pump connector; if OK,
replace the NIBP Pump Unit.
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
Problem
Cause
What to do
Cuff ID not working
1. Defective cuff ID holes in the
NIBP cuff hose
-
Replace NIBP cuff hose.
2. NIBP flex board connector
wrongly connected
-
Check that the NIBP flex board
connector is properly connected to
the STP input board: all pins have to
be connected.
3. Cuff ID switches defective
-
To check the switches, attach a NIBP
cuff hose without the cuff ID and
check that the message ‘Select
inflation limit’ appears. If not, replace
the Front Panel Unit.
4. NIBP ID switch cable (between
patient connector panel and the
module) broken or poorly
connected
‘Air leakage’ message
1. Hose or cuff leaking. Reasons:
1. Replace cuff
-
cuff damaged
-
Replace cuff.
-
cuff connector damaged
-
Replace cuff connector (if the fault is
in hose connector).
-
O-ring damaged or missing
-
Replace O-ring.
-
hose double connector damaged -
2. Hose and cuff OK. Reasons:
‘Unable to measure Sys’
message
Check the cable, fix if necessary.
Replace NIBP cuff hose.
2. Connect or replace tube
-
leakage in the tubes connecting the patient connector panel and
the module
Check the tubes.
-
leakage inside the module
-
Replace the whole tubing.
-
tube disconnected or damaged
-
Fix connections.
-
manifold leaking
-
Replace the manifold.
-
tubes or valve(s) damaged
-
Replace tubes/valve(s).
Systolic blood pressure probably
Automatic retrial with increased
higher than the inflation pressure or pressure.
artifacts.
47
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
Problem
Cause
‘Cuff occlusion’ message
1. Cuff and/or hose occluded.
Reason:
What to do
-
cuff tube kinked
-
Straighten tube.
-
tubes inside the shield kinked
-
Straighten tubes.
-
tubes inside module kinked
-
Straighten tubes.
-
occlusion inside/outside module
-
Remove occlusion.
2. Cuff, hose, and tubes OK.
Reason:
-
fault in pressure transducer
-
Replace the NIBP board.
-
fault in A/D converter
-
Replace the NIBP board.
-
faulty calibration
-
Check calibration.
‘Calibration switch on’
message
EEPROM protection has been
Enables setting the protection OFF in the
handled by pressing module buttons Calibration menu. Press the buttons
Auto ON/OFF and Start/Cancel again if you are not going to calibrate.
simultaneously for 3 seconds.
‘Calibration not protected’
message.
Calibration protection is set to OFF.
48
Document no. M1215098-002
Set the protection ON in the NIBP
Calibration menu.
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
4.1.2 NIBP error code explanation
Code
Problem
What to do
0
RAM failure; memory failure
Change the NIBP board.
1
ROM checksum error; memory failure
Change the NIBP board.
2
Pump current failure
Check short circuits. Change the NIBP board.
3
Safety CPU internal test failure or pressure
sensor reference voltage failure
Change the NIBP board.
4
EEPROM protection error
Press module buttons Auto ON/OFF and Start/
Cancel simultaneously for 3 seconds.
5
Calibration not protected
Protect calibration by selecting Protection ON in
the NIBP calibration menu.
6
Pressure sensors give different readings
Try to remeasure. If the problem persists,
recalibrate. If the problem still persists, change
the NIPB board.
7
Calibration failure
Reset the module and recalibrate. If this does not
help, change the NIBP board.
8
Exhaust Valve occlusion
Check and clean the tubing and air chamber. If
this does not help, change the NIBP board.
9
Measurement related error
Automatic recovery.
10
EEPROM checksum error; memory failure
Change the NIBP board.
11
Auto zero range exceeded
Calibrate the NIBP.
12
Communication break; temporal break down of
communication from monitor detected
Automatic recovery.
13
Illegal neonate cuff with identifying magnet
connected
Remove the cuff.
14
Not in use
Not in use
15
Safety CPU pressure calibration error
Recalibrate. If this does not help, change the
NIBP board.
16
Communication error between CPUs
Change the NIBP board.
17
Safety CPU has cut down power from
pneumatics due to repeating safety limit
violations
Reset the module. If the problem persists, change
the NIBP board.
49
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
4.1.3 Pulse oximetry (SpO2)
Problem
Cause
What to do
Message ‘NO PROBE’
No sensor connected to the module
SpO2 connector.
Check sensor connections.
Sensor faulty.
Change the sensor.
Flat cable connecting the SpO2
connector to the STP board loosen or
broken.
Check the Flat cable, replace if
necessary.
Unsuitable site.
Try another site.
Sensor faulty.
Try another sensor.
Sensor connection cable not
connected to sensor.
Connect the cable to sensor.
Sensor is slippery.
Wipe with 70% isopropyl alcohol and
allow drying.
Finger is too thin or thick.
Try other fingers, or other sensor types.
Poor perfusion.
Try another place.
Message ‘PROBE OFF’
though sensor properly
attached to the patient
Finger sensor falls off
Weak signal artifacts
Movement artifacts.
Shivering.
Message ‘NO PULSE’
Pulse search > 20 sec. and low SpO2 or Try other fingers.
low pulse rate.
Message ‘ARTIFACT’
Pulse modulation exceeds the present
scale.
Try another place or another sensor.
Message ‘CHECK PROBE’
DC value not in balance.
Try another sensor.
Message ‘POOR SIGNAL’
Poor perfusion.
Modulation (Red or Ired) < 0.25%
Check that the sensor is positioned
correctly to the patient.
Message ‘FAULTY PROBE’
Sensor is faulty.
Change the sensor.
No SpO2
No waveform selected on screen.
Check the selected SpO2 waveforms by
pressing Monitor Setup key and
selecting Screen 1 Setup - Waveform
Fields.
Wrong configuration setting.
Check the configuration settings from
the STP/Calibrations menu (Monitor
Setup - Install/Service - Service Parameters)
50
Document no. M1215098-002
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
4.1.4 Invasive blood pressure
Problem
Cause
What to do
Abnormally low pressure
Transducer wrongly positioned.
Check mid-heart level and reposition
transducer.
No pressure
Defective transducer.
Check transducer.
No pressure module plugged in.
Check the module.
No waveform selected on screen.
Check the selected pressure
waveforms by pressing Monitor
Setup key and selecting Screen 1
Setup - Waveform Fields.
Check that the pressure transducer is
open to the patient.
Wrong configuration setting
Check the configuration setting from
the STP/Calibrations menu (Monitor
Setup - Install/Service - Service Parameters).
Flat cable connecting the patient
connector panel to the module loosen
or broken.
Check the Flat cable, replace if
necessary.
‘Not zeroed’ message
Measurement on, channel not zeroed.
Zero the channel.
‘Zeroing failed’ message
Unsuccessful zeroing of P1 /P2
(number field).
Possibly due to pulsating pressure
waveform. Open the transducer to air
and zero the channel.
Offset is > 150 mmHg. Open the
transducer to air and zero the channel.
Defective transducer. Replace it and
zero the channel.
‘Calibration failed’ message Unsuccessful calibration of P1/P2
(number field), possibly due to a
pulsating waveform
Turn the transducer to
sphygmomanometer and try again
(zeroing takes place first).
Gain is beyond the limits (± 20% of the
default gain). Replace the transducer.
Out of range < 40 mmHg
Measurement pressure is beyond the
measurement range.
Check the transducer level. Zero the
channel.
Out of range > 320 mmHg
Measurement pressure is beyond the
measurement range.
Check the transducer level. Zero the
channel. The patient may also have
high pressure.
Zero adj. > 100 mmHg
Offset when zeroing is > 100 mmHg
(but < 150 mmHg) from the absolute
zero of the module (with default gain).
Check the transducer. The waveform
may hit the top and the numeric
display not shown.
Out of range
Measured pressure is beyond the
internal measurement range of the
module.
The waveform hits the top and the
numeric display not shown. Check the
transducer and its level. Zero the
channel.
51
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
4.2 Troubleshooting flowcharts
4.2.1 Troubleshooting for NIBP parameter
START
Insert new module and turn
power on.
Replace
the module.
Does fault still appear?
NO
NO
OK?
YES
Module ID on screen?
NO
Does another
module work in
same slot?
YES
Check and
replace
NIBP board.
NO
Fault not in original
module
Error message on
screen?
NO
NO
YES
See error code explanation in
service manual and fix it.
OK?
Key check in
Service Menu OK?
NO
Check keyboard
connector. If
OK, change
front panel.
YES
Pump check in
Service Menu OK?
NO
Check pump
connector.
If OK, change
pump.
Do they work?
YES
Check and replace
- STP Input Board
- NIBP flex board
- connectors
NO
Check tubes and
connectors.
Find leak and fix it.
Leak test in Service
Menu OK?
YES
Start NIBP
without hose
Cuff loose
NO
message appears
on screen?
NO
YES
Cuff ID OK but measurement
does not work
Figure 13
52
Document no. M1215098-002
Troubleshooting flowchart for NIBP parameter
PSM_module_troubles_flowch.vsd
YES
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
4.2.2 Troubleshooting for ESP parameters
Possibly fault in module with
ESTPR parameters.
Check module configuration in Service
menu (ESTPR/S/TP/Calibrations)
NO
Is it correct?
Select the correct
configuration
YES
Insert module and
turn power on
Does fault
still
appear?
NO
Fault not in
module
YES
Enter the
Service menu
NO
NO
Does another YES
Remove
module work in
NIBP board
same slot?
YES
Replace STP
board
NO
STP
module ID
on screen?
NO
Does another YES
module work in
same slot?
NO
Remove
ECG board
PSM_NESTPR_MESTPR_trouble
s_flowch.vsd
NIBP
module ID on
screen?
STP module ID
on screen?
YES
YES
ECG module ID
on screen?
Replace ECG
board
YES
Check front panel
key functions in
Service menu
Do
they work?
YES
NO
Check front panel unit,
ECG board, and STP board
to find culprit. Replace if
necessary.
Has ECG
measurement
failed?
NO
Has STP
board failed?
NO
Has invBP
measurement
failed?
NO
Has Temp
measurement
failed?
YES
YES
YES
YES
Replace
ECG board
Replace
STP board
Replace
STP board
Replace
STP board
Figure 14
NO
Has SpO 2
measurement
failed?
YES
Replace
STP board
Troubleshooting flowchart for ESP Parameters
53
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
5
Earlier revisions
Patient Side Modules E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 00)
54
Document no. M1215098-002
Appendix A Service check form, Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
APPENDIX A: Service check form,
Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
Customer
Module type
Service
S/N
Date
Service engineer
Measuring equipment / test gases used:
Equipment / tool / gas:
Visual inspection
Manufacturer:
OK
1. Internal parts
N.A.
Model/Type/Part
Number:
Fail
Serial Number /
ID:
OK
Calibration
Date:
N.A.
Fail
2. External parts
Notes
Functional inspection
3. NIBP pump filter
4. Module installation
5. Module recognition
Notes
ECG measurement
S/N
6. Module software (serial numbers)
ECG/RESP
STP
NIBP
A-1(4)
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
OK
N.A.
Fail
OK
7. Communication and
memories
8. Power frequency
9. Cable recognition
10. Lead detection
N.A.
Fail
11. Test with the patient
simulator
Notes
S/N
RESP measurement
OK
N.A.
OK
Fail
12. RESP measurement
recognition
N.A.
Fail
13. Test with patient
simulator
Notes
S/N
TEMP measurement
OK
N.A.
Fail
OK
14. Communication and
memories
15. Temperature probe
detection
16. Calibration check
17. Temp test
N.A.
Fail
N.A.
Fail
18. Module configuration
Notes
S/N
InvBP measurement
OK
N.A.
Fail
OK
19. Membrane keys
20. Cable and transducer
detection
21. Calibration
22. Test with patient
simulator
Notes
A-2(4)
Document no. M1215098-002
Appendix A Service check form, Patient Side Module, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
S/N
SpO2 measurement
OK
N.A.
Fail
23. SpO2 probe detection
OK
N.A.
Fail
N.A.
Fail
24. Test measurement
Notes
S/N
NIBP measurement
OK
N.A.
Fail
OK
25. Communication and
memories
26. Membrane keys
27. Pump and valves
28. Leak test
29. Calibration check
Measured B1
Measured B2
Allowed range
0 mmHg
±9 mmHg
100 mmHg
100 ±2 mmHg
200 mmHg
200 ±3 mmHg
260 mmHg
260 ±4 mmHg
30. Safety valve functions
Measured B1
Measured B2
Allowed range
270...330 mmHg
270...330 mmHg
130...165 mmHg
130...165 mmHg
OK
31. Cuff related messages
N.A.
Fail
OK
N.A.
Fail
32. Test measurement
33. NIBP hose detection
Notes
A-3(4)
Document no. M1215098-002
E-modules
All modules
34. Electrical safety check
36. Final cleaning
Notes
Notes
Used spare parts
Signature
A-4(4)
Document no. M1215098-002
OK
N.A.
Fail
OK
35. Functioning after
electrical safety check
N.A.
Fail
Datex-Ohmeda
S/5 Extension Module for FM, N-FC, N-FCREC,
N-FREC
Technical Reference Manual Slot
Conformity according to the Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning Medical Devices amended by 2007/47/EC
CAUTION: U.S. Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a licensed medical practitioner.
Outside the USA, check local laws for any restriction that may apply.
All specifications subject to change without notice.
Document number M1187338-003
February 3, 2010
GE Healthcare Finland Oy
Kuortaneenkatu 2
FI-00510 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: +358 10 39411
Fax: +358 9 1463310
www.gehealthcare.com
Copyright © 2010 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Table of contents
Table of contents
Introduction
1
1
Specifications
2
1.1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
4
1.2
1.3
1.4
2
Functional description
2.1
2.2
2.3
3
General specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.1 Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.2 Functional alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CO2 measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1 Typical performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.2 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.3 Normal conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.4 Conditions exceeding normal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Respiration Rate (RR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.1 Typical performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service procedures
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
5
Measurement principle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1.1 CO2 measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Main components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2.1 Gas sampling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.2.2 MiniC measuring unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.2.3 CPU board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2.4 Recorder board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Connectors and signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.3.1 Module bus connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
11
General service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.1.1 MiniC measuring unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.1.2 Recorder unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.2.1 Recommended tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.2.2 Recommended parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.2.3 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
S/5 N-FCREC disassembly and reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.3.1 Instructions after replacing MiniC unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.3.2 Before disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Adjustments and calibrations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.4.1 Calibrating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.4.2 Gas sampling system adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.4.3 Flow rate measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.4.4 Flow rate adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.4.5 Gas calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
i
Document no. M1187338-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
4
Troubleshooting
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
5
27
Troubleshooting chart for recorder unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Troubleshooting chart for CO2 measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.2.1 CO2 measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Gas sampling system troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.3.1 Sampling system leak test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
MiniC unit troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Earlier revisions
Appendix A:
Service check form, S/5 Extension Module for FM, N-FC,
N-FCREC, N-FREC
ii
Document no. M1187338-003
31
A-1
List of figures
Table of figures
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
Figure 4
Figure 5
Figure 6
Figure 7
Figure 8
Figure 9
F-FCREC side and front views................................................................................................................................................. 1
Absorbance of CO2 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5
MiniC block diagram ................................................................................................................................................................... 6
Gas tubing layout......................................................................................................................................................................... 8
MiniC measuring unit.................................................................................................................................................................. 8
Recorder board block diagram.............................................................................................................................................. 9
Module bus flex board .............................................................................................................................................................10
Attaching regulator to the calibration can.....................................................................................................................23
Connecting sampling line to the gas valve and feeding gas.................................................................................24
iii
Document no. M1187338-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
iv
Document no. M1187338-003
S/5 Extension Module for FM, N-FC, N-FCREC, N-FREC
Introduction
This Technical Reference Manual Slot provides information for the maintenance and service of
the Datex-Ohmeda S/5 Extension Module for FM, N-FC, N-FCREC and N-FREC. The Extension
Modules for FM are designed for use with the S/5 FM Monitor and FM Light. Later in this manual
the module can be called w/o the system name Datex-Ohmeda S/5.
Please also refer to the Part I sections of the manual for information regarding system specific
information e.g. related documentation, conventions used, symbols on equipment, safety
precautions, system description, system installation, interfacing, functional check and planned
maintenance.
N-FREC and N-FCREC provide real time printing of waveform and numerical data, and trend
data.
N-FCREC and N-FC provide CO2 airway and respiratory measurements.
WARNING
The Extension Modules for FM provide airway and respiratory / CO2
measurements intended for patients weighing over 5kg (11lb).
NOTE: Printings on thermal paper may be destroyed when exposed to light, heat, alcohol etc.
Take a photocopy for archive.
Figure 1
F-FCREC side and front views
Parameters
Module
CO2
N-FC
X
N-FCREC
X
N-FREC
Recorder
X
X
Compatibility
NOTE: The Extension Module for FM, N-FC is designed for use with L-FICU03(A) or later software.
NOTE: The Extension Modules for FM, N-FCREC and N-FREC are designed for use with
L-FICU04(A) or later software.
NOTE: The Extension Modules for FM are compatible with S/5 FM and FM Light monitors only.
1
Document no. M1187338-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
1
Specifications
1.1 General specifications
N-FCREC
Module size, W × D × H
Module weight
Power consumption
90 × 169 × 191 mm, 3.54 × 6.65 × 7.51 in
1.0 kg/2.2 lb.
2.7 W standby, 11.5 W printing
N-FREC
Module size, W × D × H
Module weight
Power consumption
90 × 169 × 191 mm, 3.54 × 6.65 × 7.51 in
0.8 kg/1.7 lb.
1.2 W standby, 10 W printing
N-FC
Module size, W × D × H
Module weight
Power consumption
46 × 169 × 191 mm, 1.81 × 6.65 × 7.51 in
0.5 kg/1.1 lb.
1.5 W typical
1.1.1 Environmental specifications
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
Atmospheric pressure
Relative humidity
Protection against electrical shock
+10...+40 °C (+50 to 104 °F)
-20...+60 °C (-4 to +140 °F)
670...1060 hPa
(500...800 mmHg)
(670...1060 mbar)
10...90% non-condensing
Type BF
1.1.2 Functional alarms
Funtional alarms for
−
Blocked sample line
−
D-Fend replacement
−
D-Fend check
1.2 CO2 measurement
1.2.1 Typical performance
EtCO2
End-tidal CO2 concentration
FiCO2
Inspired CO2 concentration
Measurement range
Accuracy
CO2 concentration 0 to 15 vol%
0 to 20 vol% (0 to 20 kPa, 0 to 150 mmHg)
CO2 concentration 15 to 20 vol%
±(0.2 vol% +2% of reading)
±(0.7 vol% +2% of reading)
Measurement rise time
< 300 ms with nominal flow
Adjustable low and high limits for EtCO2 and FiCO2.
2
Document no. M1187338-003
S/5 Extension Module for FM, N-FC, N-FCREC, N-FREC
1.2.2 Technical specifications
Airway humidity
Sampling rate
Sampling delay
Total system response time
0...100%, condensing
150 ±25ml/min (sampling line 2 to 3 m, normal conditions)
2.1 seconds typical with a 3-m sampling line
2.4 seconds typical with a 3-m sampling line, including sampling
delay and rise time (typically 3.7 seconds with a 6-m sampling
line).
Automatic compensation for barometric pressure, CO2-NO2 and CO2-O2 collision broadening effect
compensation selectable from menu.
Warm-up time
1 min for operation with CO2, 30 min for full specification
Autozeroing interval
4, 15, 30 and 60 minutes after start-up, then every 60 minutes.
1.2.3 Normal conditions
Accuracy specifications apply in normal conditions (after 30 minutes warm-up period):
Ambient temperature
18...28 °C, within ±5°C of calibration
Ambient pressure
500...800mmHg, ±50mmHg of cal.
Ambient humidity
20...80% RH, ±20% RH of cal.
Automatic compensation for barometric pressure.
Non-disturbing gases are those with a maximum effect on the CO2 reading <0.2 vol%. The
effect is valid for specific concentrations shown in parentheses of the non-disturbing gas:
−
Ethanol C2H5OH (<0.3%)
−
Acetone (<0.1%)
−
Methane CH4 (0.2%)
−
Nitrogen N2
−
Water vapor
−
Dichlorofluromethane (<1%)
−
Tetrafluoroethane (<1%)
Disturbing gases and their effect on the CO2 reading at 5.0 vol% CO2 are shown below. Errors
listed reflect the effect of specific concentrations (shown in parentheses) of an individual
disturbing gas and should be combined when estimating the effect of gas mixtures:
−
Halotane (4%) increases < 0.3 vol%
−
Isoflurane (5%) increases < 0.4 vol%
−
Enflurane (5%) increases < 0.4 vol%
−
Desflurane (24%) increases < 1.2 vol%
−
Sevoflurane (6%) increases < 0.4 vol%
−
Helium (50%) decreases < 0.3 vol%
−
If O2 compensation is not activated: O2 (40 … 95%) decreases < 0.3 vol%
−
If O2 compensation is activated: O2 (40 … 95%) error < 0.15 vol%
−
If N2O compensation is not activated: N2O (40%) increases < 0.4 vol%,
N2O (40 to 80%) increases < 0.8 vol%
−
If N2O compensation is activated: N2O (40 to 80%) error < 0.3 vol%
3
Document no. M1187338-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
1.2.4 Conditions exceeding normal
Accuracy specifications under the following conditions nop:
n Ambient temperature
10...40 °C, within ±5 °C of calibration
Ambient pressure
500...800 mmHg, ±50 mmHg of calibration
Ambient humidity
10...98% RH, ±20% RH of calibration
o During warm-up 1 to 10 minutes, under normal conditions
p During warm-up 10 to 30 minutes, under normal conditions
Accuracy under different conditions (see above)
Conditions n and p
Condition o
CO2 (0 … 15 vol%)
±(0.3 vol% + 4% of reading)
(at 5 vol% error ±0.5 vol%)
±(0.4 vol% + 7% of reading)
(at 5 vol% error ±0.75 vol%)
CO2 (15 … 20 vol%)
±(0.8 vol% + 4% of reading)
(at 5 vol% error ±0.5 vol%)
±(0.9 vol% + 7% of reading)
(at 5 vol% error ±0.75 vol%)
1.3 Respiration Rate (RR)
Measurement range
Breath detection
4 to 80 breaths /min
1% change in CO2 level
±1/min in the range 4 to 20 l/min
±5% in the range 20 to 80 l/min
Resolution
1/min
Adjustable low and high limits for respiration rate; alarm for apnea.
Accuracy
1.4 Recorder
1.4.1 Typical performance
Principle
Print resolution
Vertical
Horizontal
Paper width
Print speed
Waveform printout
Numerical printout
8 dots/mm (200 dots/inch)
32 dots/mm (800 dots/inch) at a speed of 25 mm/s and slower
50 mm, printing width 48 mm
1, 6.25, 12.5, 25 mm/s
selectable 1, 2, or 3 waveforms
HR, NIPBP, P1, P2, T1, T2, Tblood, Et/FiCO2, RR
Tabular Trend printout
HR, SpO2, P1, NIBP, EtCO2
4
Document no. M1187338-003
Thermal array
S/5 Extension Module for FM, N-FC, N-FCREC, N-FREC
2
Functional description
2.1 Measurement principle
2.1.1 CO2 measurement
MiniC is a side stream gas analyzer, measuring real time concentrations of CO2. It is a non
dispersive infrared analyzer, measuring absorption of the gas sample using an optical narrow
band filter.
The infrared radiation detector is thermopile.
Concentration of CO2 is calculated from absorption measured at 4.2 to 4.3 µm.
Figure 2
Absorbance of CO2
2.2 Main components
The miniC unit in N-FC and N-FCREC modules consists of:
−
Gas sampling system
−
MiniC measuring unit
−
CPU board
The recorder unit in N-FREC and N-FCREC consists of:
−
Recorder board
−
Thermal printer
5
Document no. M1187338-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
2.2.1 Gas sampling system
The sampling system draws a gas sample to the analyzer at a fixed rate.
The gas sampling system samples the measured air to the module, and removes water and
impurities from it. A sampling line is connected to the water trap. The pump draws gas through
the sampling line to the gas measuring unit. After the measurement, the gas is exhausted from
the sample gas out connector.
The sample flow is nominally 150 ml/min.
Figure 3
MiniC block diagram
Mini D-fendTM
The sample is drawn through the sampling line. The gas then enters the module through the
water trap, where it is divided into two flows, a main flow and a side flow. The main flow goes
into the analyzer. This flow is separated from the patient side by a hydrophobic filter. The side
flow creates a slight subatmospheric pressure within the Mini D-fend water trap which causes
fluid removed by the hydrophobic filter to collect in the bottle.
Zero valve
The main flow passes through a magnetic valve before proceeding to the analyzer. This valve is
activated to establish the zero point for the MiniC measuring unit. When the valve is activated,
room air is drawn through a filter into the internal system and the gas sensor.
6
Document no. M1187338-003
S/5 Extension Module for FM, N-FC, N-FCREC, N-FREC
NafionTM tube 1)
A Nafion tube is used between the water trap and the zero valve to balance the sample gas
humidity with that of ambient air. The tube prevents errors caused by the effect of water vapor
on gas partial pressure when humid gases are measured after calibration with dry gases.
Gas analyzers
After the zero valve and Nafion tube, the gas passes through the miniC measuring unit.
Sample flow differential pressure transducer
The sample flow differential pressure transducer measures pressure drop across a restrictor
and calculates the sample flow from the pressure difference.
Working pressure transducer
The working pressure transducer measures differential pressure between the tubing and
ambient air near the miniC measuring unit.
Atmospheric pressure transducer
The atmospheric pressure transducer measures real-time atmospheric pressure. The following
messages are based on the obtained pressure values: ‘sample line blocked’, ‘check D-fend’,
‘replace D-fend’ and ‘check sample gas outlet’.
Sampling pump and damping chamber
The gas sampling pump is a membrane pump run by a DC-motor. Sample flow is measured
with a differential pressure transducer across a known restriction. The motor is automatically
controlled to maintain a constant flow even when the D-fend water trap ages and starts to get
occluded. It also enables the use of sample tubes with varying lengths and diameters.
NOTE: In no occasion is the flow reversed towards the patient.
1
1)
Nafion is a trademark of Perma Pure Inc.
7
Document no. M1187338-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Side flow
Mini
D-fend
Main flow
Filter
Sample line
Room air
Zero
valve
MiniC
Diff.
Pressure
Sensor
Abs.
Pressure
Sensor
Pump
Gas out
Figure 4
minic_fem_gastubing.vsd
Diff.
Pressure
Sensor
Gas tubing layout
2.2.2 MiniC measuring unit
The miniC measuring unit is a non-dispersive infrared analyzer measuring absorption of the
gas sample at 4.2 to 4.3 µm infrared wavelength, which is selected using an optical narrow
band filter. The IR lamp is a filament surrounded by thermal isolation. There is a hole in the
isolation, passing the radiation to a conical measuring chamber with 3 mm length. From the
sample chamber, the radiation goes into a thermopile detector with an optical filter in front of
it.
The temperature sensor measures the miniC measuring unit's temperature and it is used for
temperature compensation.
The miniC measuring unit includes a miniC flexible board, which connects the thermopile signal
and the temperature sensor signal to the CPU board.
Figure 5
8
Document no. M1187338-003
MiniC measuring unit
S/5 Extension Module for FM, N-FC, N-FCREC, N-FREC
2.2.3 CPU board
The CPU board contains a processor, memories and all the analog signal processing needed. A
MiniC measuring unit is attached to the board with a flexible PCB. Also supply voltage and an
RS485 serial channel are connected to the CPU board using another flexible PCB.
Analog signals (CO2, temperature, absolute and differential pressures and lamp current signals)
are fed to the 16-bit A/D converter. The processor controls the A/D converter and calculates
the CO2 percentage and respiration rate from this data.
The processor controls sample flow by adjusting the pump voltage based on the differential
pressure signal. The processor also controls the current of the IR source and keeps it constant.
Calibration data is stored on the EEPROM.
2.2.4 Recorder board
The function of the recorder board is to establish an interface between the recorder unit and
main CPU board in the monitor. The recorder unit related side panel key is connected to the
recorder unit via the recorder board. The recorder unit and the recorder board are connected
together with a special connector. The REC board controls the recorder unit communication
and power.
The REC board is grounded via the recorder unit. If the recorder unit is not installed, the REC
board does not function.
+15V_RE
+15V_REC
C
N
NV
Memo
V
Memory
ry
Dat
Data
a
Figure 6
RS48
RS485
Driv
5
Driver
er
CP
CPU
U
REC Board
Reset
Reset
Communicati
Communication
on
CT
CTS
S
Record
Recorder
Uni
er
Unit
t
n-frec_block_brd_diag.vsd
MODULE BUS
Pow
Power
Suppl
er
Supply
+15
y
+15 V
V
RE
REC
Ke
C
Key
y
Recorder board block diagram
External Communication
Communication with the main CPU board is established via RS485.
Supply voltage The recorder unit supply voltage, +15V_REC, is provided by the recorder board.
9
Document no. M1187338-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Module Bus Flex board
Module Bus Flex board connects the CPU board of the miniC unit and the recorder board to
the module bus.
Figure 7
Module bus flex board
2.3 Connectors and signals
2.3.1 Module bus connector
5 pin female connector
10
Document no. M1187338-003
Pin No.
Signal
1
GND
2
Vmod 13.8 - 16 V
3
Data +
4
Data -
5
Shield
S/5 Extension Module for FM, N-FC, N-FCREC, N-FREC
3
Service procedures
3.1 General service information
The field service of the Extension Modules for FM is limited to replacing faulty circuit boards or
mechanical parts. The circuit boards should be returned to GE Healthcare for repair.
GE Healthcare is always available for service advice. Please provide the unit serial number, full
type designation and a detailed fault description.
WARNING
CAUTION
Only trained personnel with appropriate equipment should perform the
tests and repairs outlined in this section. Unauthorized service may void
warranty of the unit.
The module electronics can only be repaired and calibrated at the factory.
3.1.1 MiniC measuring unit
WARNING
WARNING
The miniC measuring unit can only be repaired and calibrated at the
factory. Attempts to repair/calibrate the unit elsewhere will adversely
affect operation of the unit. In case of failure, the complete miniC unit
should be sent to GE Healthcare for factory exchange.
Handle the water trap and its contents as you would any body fluid.
Infectious hazard may be present.
Serviceable parts
•
•
•
•
•
Mini D-fend
Mini D-fend O-rings
Nafion tube
Air filter
Pump
NOTE: After any component replacement, see chapter “Adjustments and calibrations”.
Calibration interval six months. Preventive maintenance once a year including the change of
Nafion tube and the O-rings of water separator, pump check and calibration, leak test and
absolute pressure sensor check.
3.1.2 Recorder unit
Serviceable or exchangeable parts
•
•
Recorder board
Thermal plotter
3.2 Service check
These instructions include complete procedures for a service check. The service should be
performed after any service repair. Additionally, the service check procedures can also be used
for determining possible failures.
The procedures should be performed in ascending order.
11
Document no. M1187338-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
The instructions include a check form (“APPENDIX A:”) which should be filled in when performing
the procedures.
The symbol
"
in the instructions means that the check form should be signed after
performing the procedure.
3.2.1 Recommended tools
Tool
Order No.
Notes
Screwdriver
Pozi-drive, Torx T10
Ambient pressure manometer
Amb. Press. can be checked
from local meteorological
station
Flowmeter
TSI model 4140 recommended
Flow cassette 50/1.1
873812-HEL
Calibration gas
755580* (gas)
Regulator
755534-HEL
Contains 5 CO2 and air
E-PSM / E-PSMP
Patient simulator
3.2.2 Recommended parts
Recorder paper
74205-HEL
Detach the module box cover by removing the five screws from the locking side of the
module. Be careful with the flex cable, when opening the cover. Remove the grey plastic
shield over the miniC unit.
3.2.3 Inspection
General
1.
Check internal parts
•
•
•
•
•
•
all screws are tightened properly
all cables are connected properly
tubes are not pinched and there are no sharp bends on them
all tubes are connected properly
EMC covers are attached properly
there are no loose objects inside the module
N-F(C)REC:
Open the paper compartment hatch and take out the paper roll, if installed.
Remove any paper chaff from the paper compartment.
Clean the thermal printhead and the small glass window in front of the static brush with a
cotton swab dipped in isopropyl alcohol. Avoid contact with the rubber paper roller.
12
Document no. M1187338-003
S/5 Extension Module for FM, N-FC, N-FCREC, N-FREC
NOTE: Be careful to limit the application of alcohol to the thermal printhead and the window.
Leave the paper compartment empty and close the hatch.
"
2.
Check external parts
•
•
all connectors are intact and attached properly
the module box and the locking system are intact
"
Reattach the module and check that the locking system moves properly.
CO2 measurement
3.
Check Mini D-Fend
Detach the Mini D-fend. Check the condition of the rubber O-rings on the metal Mini Dfend connectors, located in the module front cover.
If necessary, detach the connectors by first disconnecting the tubes, then removing the
locking rings from the back of the front cover.
"
Replace the Mini D-fend and sampling line with new ones.
NOTE: Use only Datex-Ohmeda sampling lines in order to ensure proper functioning.
Connect the Extension Module, N-FC or N-FCREC to the monitor.
Turn on the monitor.
Configure the monitor screen so that the CO2 curve is shown, for example as follows:
Monitor Setup - Screen 1 Setup - Waveform fields Field 6 - CO2
Digit Fields
Lower Field 1 - Gases
4.
Module software
Wait until the message ‘Calibrating gas sensor’ disappears from the screen, then enter
the service menu.
Monitor Setup - Install/Service (password 16-4-34) - Service (password 26-23-8).
Write down the information regarding the ExtensionModule software.
5.
Module bus communication
Enter the service menu General: Parameters - Gas Unit - General
Check that the Timeouts, Bad checksums and Bad c-s by mod values are not increasing
faster than by 5 per second.
13
Document no. M1187338-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
If one of the values is increasing faster, it indicates a failure in module bus
communication.
"
6.
Flow measurement offset
Enter the service menu Gases:
Gas Unit - Gases
Check that the flow measurement offset, i.e. the shown sample Zero value is within ±10
ml/min.
"
7.
Ambient pressure
Check that the shown Ambient value corresponds with the current ambient pressure (±20
mmHg).
"
8.
Zero valve check
Feed calibration gas and check that the gas readings in the service menu correspond
with the values on the gas bottle sticker. Keep feeding gas, then activate the zero valve
from the menu. The CO2 reading should drop back to near 0%. Set back the Zero valve to
state MEAS.
"
9.
Nafion tube
Replace the Nafion tube, if necessary.
NOTE: The Nafion tube should be replaced annually.
"
10.
Leak test
Perform the sampling system leak test.
Connect a flow cassette with high flow resistance value (50/1.1) to the end of the
sampling line and start following the Amb-Work value in the service menu. When the
value exceeds 130 mmHg, connect the other port of the flow cassette to the sample gas
out connector and switch off the pump.
Wait until the pressure inside the sampling system is stabilized, then observe the shown
Amb-Work value. The value, i.e. the pressure inside the sampling system should not drop
more than 6 mmHg in 20 seconds.
If the pressure drops more, first check the connections and repeat the test.
"
14
Document no. M1187338-003
S/5 Extension Module for FM, N-FC, N-FCREC, N-FREC
11.
Check the flow rates
Wait until the Sample Flow value returns close to 150 ml/min.
Connect a flow meter to the 3 meter sampling line and check that the flow (the flow meter
reading) is within the following range:
Sampling flow (ml/min)
135...165
If necessary, readjust the sampling flow:
Select Sample gain adj from the menu.
To increase the sampling flow, turn the ComWheel counterclockwise. To decrease the
flow, turn the ComWheel clockwise.
A change of 0.050 in the Gain value changes the flow approximately 7.5 ml/min.
After you have changed the gain, wait until the Sample Flow value on the screen returns
near to the original, then check the flow meter reading again.
"
12.
Working pressure
Check that the Amb-Work value in the service menu is within the following range:
Amb-Work (mmHg)
20...50
"
13.
Gas calibration
Airway Gas - Gas Calibration
NOTE: The calibration should not be performed before 30 minutes warm-up time.
Use calibration gas 755580 (5% CO2, about 20% O2) for calibrating the module with CO2
measurement.
"
14.
Occlusion detection
Block the tip of the sampling line with your finger and check that the message ‘Sample
line blocked’ appears on the monitor screen within 60 seconds.
"
15.
Check D-fend
Detach the mini D-fend and check that the message ‘Check D-fend’ appears on the
monitor screen within 30 seconds.
"
16. Apnea detection
Reattach the mini D-fend. Simulate at least 5 breaths by feeding calibration gas into the
sampling line. Check that the shown gas information is correct.
15
Document no. M1187338-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Check that the monitor shows the message ‘Apnea’ within 30 seconds after you have
stopped feeding the gas.
"
Recorder
17.
Paper compartment cleaning
Open the paper compartment hatch and take out the paper roll, if installed.
Remove any paper chaff from the compartment.
Clean the thermal printhead and the small glass window in front of the static brush with a
cotton swab dipped in isopropyl alcohol. Avoid contact with the rubber paper roller.
NOTE: Be careful to limit the application of alcohol to the thermal printhead and the window.
Leave the paper compartment empty and close the hatch.
"
Configure the monitor screen so that all required parameters are shown, for example:
Monitor Setup - Screen 1 Setup - Waveform Fields -Field 1 - ECG1
Field 2 - ECG2
Field 3 - P1
Field 4 - P2
Field 5 - PLETH
Field 6 - OFF
Plug in the Hemodynamic Module. Connect a patient simulator to the module and check
that all connected parameters are shown on the screen.
Preset recording settings:
Record/Print - Record Waveforms - Waveform 1 - ECG1
Waveform 2 - P1
Waveform 3 - P2
Delay - Off
Paper Speed - 6.25 Mm/S
Length --> 30 S
Record Trends -
Graphic Trend 1 - Hr
Graphic Trend 2 - P1
Monitor Setup - Install/Service (password 16-4-34) - Trends & Snapshot - Default
Trend - Graph.
Pt.Data&Trends - Trends - Time Scale - 2 h
18.
Cover state recognition
Open the paper compartment cover. Check that the message ‘Recorder: Cover open’
appears on the screen.
"
19.
Paper recognition
Close the paper compartment cover. Check that the previous message changes to
'Recorder: Out of paper’.
16
Document no. M1187338-003
S/5 Extension Module for FM, N-FC, N-FCREC, N-FREC
Install a paper roll and close the cover. Check that the message ‘Recorder: Cover open’
disappears from the screen.
"
20.
Quality of recording
Press the Start/ Stop key again and check that the quality of the recordings is
acceptable.
"
21.
Recording speed
Press the RECORD WAVE key again and this time wait until the recording stops. Check
that the length of the recorded waveform scale is 18.7 cm (±1.5 cm).
Change the paper speed setting to 1 mm/s:
Record/Print - Record Waveforms - Paper Speed - 1 mm/s
Press the RECORD WAVE key and wait until the recording stops. Check that the length
of the scale is now 3.0 cm (±0.5 cm).
"
General
22.
Electrical safety check
Perform an electrical safety check and a leakage current test.
"
23.
Functioning after electrical safety check
Check that the module functions normally after performing the electrical safety check.
"
24.
Final cleaning
Turn off the monitor, disconnect and clean the module.
"
•
Fill in all necessary documents.
17
Document no. M1187338-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
3.3 S/5 N-FCREC disassembly and reassembly
CAUTION
When reassembling the module, make sure that the tubes and cables are not
pinched between the boards and the cover.
To reassemble the module, reverse the order of the disassembly steps.
3.3.1 Instructions after replacing MiniC unit
After replacing the MiniC unit:
•
•
•
perform the sampling system leak test
perform the occlusion test
perform the gas calibration
3.3.2 Before disassembly
WARNING
Wear a grounded, antistatic wristband when handling PC boards.
Electrostatic discharge may damage components on the board.
Disconnect the Extension Module from the monitor.
Tools needed
-
screwdrivers, TORX; T8, T10, T15
-
crosshead screwdriver; M15
-
flat blade screwdriver
-
pinchers
-
antistatic wristband
Disassemble the Extension Module
1. Remove the Mini D-fend.
2. Open the recorder unit paper cover and remove
the paper roll, if installed.
18
Document no. M1187338-003
S/5 Extension Module for FM, N-FC, N-FCREC, N-FREC
3. Unscrew the two pozidrive screws inside the
recorder unit completely (the screws cannot be
removed) and remove the recorder unit.
4. Remove the five screws (T8) on the side where the
device plate is located.
5. Place the N-F(C)(REC) on a table the device plate
side down.
6. Remove the two screws (T8) near the module bus
connector.
7. Remove the module cover carefully.
8. Remove the EMC-cover and CO2 unit insulator
plate.
19
Document no. M1187338-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
NOTE: The finger of the insulator plate secures the
interconnection flex connector. While reassembling
the insulator plate ensure that the finger supports the
connector correctly.
9. Disconnect the Nafion and silicon tubes from the
mini D-fend connectors.
NOTE: While reassembling the nafion tube ensure the
correct routing for both modules. If the nafion tube is
not correctly routed it may get bent or jammed when
reassembling the cover. Bent or pinched tube can
get permanently blocked. The block may appear later
when the tube warms up.
Correct nafion tube routing in N-FCREC module, arrow
pointing at the mini D-fend connectors.
Correct nafion tube routing in N-FC module, arrow
pointing at the mini D-fend connectors.
10. Disconnect the gas out tube from the pump unit
and remove the front panel unit.
20
Document no. M1187338-003
S/5 Extension Module for FM, N-FC, N-FCREC, N-FREC
11. Remove the CO2 unit module bus flex cable from
the REC board.
NOTE: Be careful with the insulation plate covering the
cable connector on the REC board.
12. Lift the CO2 unit carefully up and remove the unit
from the module cover.
13. Remove the screw (T8) holding the module bus flex
cable to recorder unit metal plate and module
cover.
14. Lift the REC board carefully up and disconnect the
two module bus flex cables from the REC board.
Remove the REC board with the recorder unit
metal plate from the module cover.
15. Remove the four pozidrive screws holding the REC
board to the recorder unit metal plate.
21
Document no. M1187338-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
16. Use a flat blade screwdriver to unlock the module
bus connector insulator cover. Put the screwdriver
in the hole and move the blade backwards (away
from the module bus flex cable) until the insulator
cover unlocks.
17. By assisting with a screwdriver pull the module bus
connector through the hole in the module cover.
18. Flip the module cover over and remove the two (T6)
screws holding the lock unit to the frame. While
pulling the tab push the lockers with a screwdriver
to remove the lock unit.
22
Document no. M1187338-003
S/5 Extension Module for FM, N-FC, N-FCREC, N-FREC
3.4 Adjustments and calibrations
3.4.1 Calibrating
The airway module should be calibrated once every six months or whenever there are
indications of errors in the gas readings.
Calibrate the gas measurement with the Datex-Ohmeda calibration gas. Do not use any other
calibration gases.
−
Use the regulator 755534-HEL.
−
Use gas 755580 only and set the FiO2 level in the CO2 setup menu to 21-40% Airway Gas
- CO2 setup..O2 concentration to 20%.
Use only recommended calibration gases to guarantee a successful calibration.
During gas calibration, % units are always used for CO2 regardless of selected measuring units.
NOTE: Ensure that the calibration gas and regulator are functioning properly before calibration.
Perform the annual maintenance on the regulator as required.
Figure 8
Attaching regulator to the calibration can
1.
Attach the regulator to the gas container.
2.
Attach a new sampling line to the water trap. Connect the loose end of the sampling line
to the regulator on the gas container.
23
Document no. M1187338-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Figure 9
Connecting sampling line to the gas valve and feeding gas
3.
For maximum accuracy, let the monitor warm up for 30 minutes. The menu item Gas
calibration remains gray as long as the message ‘Calibrating gas sensor’ is displayed.
4.
Press the Airway Gas key and select Gas calibration.
5.
Wait until the ‘Zero ok’ and then the ‘Feed gas’ messages appear after each gas on the
screen.
6.
Open the regulator and feed calibration gas until the message ‘Adjust’ appears, then
close the valve.
7.
Check that the displayed gas value matches the value on the calibration gas container.
Airway
Gas
NOTE: Adjust the O2 percentage according to the calibration gas (for 755580 the right O2 value
is 20%).
NOTE: If an error occurs during calibration or if no gas is fed, the text ‘Calibr. error’ appears.
Push the ComWheel to perform a new calibration.
If adjustments are required:
•
Turn the ComWheel to highlight the first gas to be adjusted and then push the ComWheel.
24
Document no. M1187338-003
S/5 Extension Module for FM, N-FC, N-FCREC, N-FREC
•
Turn the ComWheel until the displayed value matches the desired value in the gas bottle
and push it again.
If the message ‘Zero error’ is displayed, press the Normal Screen key and repeat the
calibration procedure.
The time of the last calibration is shown at the bottom of the menu page.
3.4.2 Gas sampling system adjustment
For flow rate measurements, a flow meter with a low flow resistance and the capability to
measure low flow rates is required. A sampling line of normal length has to be connected to the
monitor as it has a considerable effect on the flow.
3.4.3 Flow rate measurement
If any flow rates are not correct, first replace the Mini D-Fend water trap, then recheck the
flows.
The sampling flow rate is measured by a flow meter at the sampling line. The flow rate should
be between 135 and 165 ml/min. The flow rate is adjusted in the Gases service menu with
Sample gain adj.
3.4.4 Flow rate adjustment
NOTE: Before adjusting the sampling flow, make sure there is no leakage in the sampling
system.
Refer to chapter 3.2 Service check, step 13. Gas calibration.
Wait until the Sample Flow value is back to near 150 ml/min.
Connect a flow meter to the 3 meter sampling line and check that the flow (the flow meter
reading) is within the following range:
Sampling flow (ml/min)
135...165
If necessary, readjust the sampling flow:
Select Sample gain adj from the menu.
To increase the sampling flow, turn the ComWheel counterclockwise.
To decrease the flow, turn the ComWheel clockwise.
25
Document no. M1187338-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
A change of 0.050 in the Gain value changes the flow approximately 7.5 ml/min.
After you have changed the gain, wait until the Sample Flow value on the screen returns near
to the original, then check the flow meter reading again.
3.4.5 Gas calibration
Gas calibration is performed in the Airway Gas menu.
Calibration gas regulator flow check
Interval: every 12 months
Regulator flow specification:
REF 755583-HEL & 755534-HEL: 260 – 410 ml/min at 1-10 bar cylinder pressure
REF 755530-HEL: 260 – 410ml/min at 5-7psi cylinder pressure
Tools needed: calibration gas can, regulator, piece of silicon hose and flow meter. GE
Healthcare recommends use of TSI 4140 Flow Meter.
Insert the calibration gas regulator on the gas cylinder. Connect a silicon hose between the
regulator and the flow meter. Block the regulator overflow port and open the regulator. Check
the flow rate from the flow meter and verify that the flow is within the specification.
26
Document no. M1187338-003
S/5 Extension Module for FM, N-FC, N-FCREC, N-FREC
4
Troubleshooting
4.1 Troubleshooting chart for recorder unit
Problem
Cause
What to do
Module not responding to front panel Membrane switch cable loose or
key, but operates through Recorder broken.
menu.
Check the cable. Replace the
front panel if necessary.
Recorder will not start.
No error messages shown.
Recorder: Module not properly
inserted.
Re-insert the module properly.
Recorder: Flex-strip cable broken.
Check the cable. Replace if
necessary.
Recorder board faulty.
Replace the recorder board.
Recorder unit faulty.
Replace the recorder unit.
Recorder works but nothing appears Active side of the paper downwards. Turn the paper roll over.
on the paper.
To test which side is active:
Place the paper on a hard
surface and draw a line with a
fingernail - a dark line will
appear on the active (thermal)
side.
Recorder unit faulty.
Replace the recorder unit.
4.2 Troubleshooting chart for CO2 measurement
Problem
Cause/What to do
No response to breathing
Sampling line or water trap blocked or loose, or improperly attached.
Water trap container full.
See the gas sampling system troubleshooting.
‘SENSOR INOP.’ message
The temperature is too low or high, check the temperature in the service
menu. Supply voltage is too low or high, IR source current or voltage is
too low or high, check current in the service menu.
Pump is not working properly, check sample flow and pump voltage in
the service menu.
Ambient pressure too low or high, check the ambient pressure in the
service menu.
Zero valve not working properly, check the functionality by switching
zero valve on and off in the service menu.
‘ZEROING ERROR’ message
Gas zeroing failed. Condensation or residual gases are affecting the zero
measurement. Allow the module to run drawing room air for half an hour
and calibrate again.
‘CHECK D-FEND’ message
Amb – Work pressure difference too small.
Probably water trap or the sampling line is not attached properly. Gas
zero valve failure. Pump failure or gas outlet blockage.
27
Document no. M1187338-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Problem
Cause/What to do
‘REPLACE D-FEND’ message
Amb – Work pressure difference too big.
Indicates residue build-up on the water trap membrane. This decreases
air flow. Replace the D-fend.
‘SAMPLE LINE BLOCKED’ message Amb – Work pressure difference too big.
Sampling line or water trap is occluded. Water trap container is full. If
occlusion persists, check internal tubing for blockages.
No response to any gas
Check Sample Gas Out.
Amb - Work pressure low, flow too small and pump voltage too high.
Sampling line, water trap, or internal tubing is blocked or loose, or
improperly attached. Gas out connector or tubing is blocked.
Zero valve malfunction. Pump failure or pump is worn. Supply voltage
missing. Serial communication error.
Sudden increase in gas display
Water trap malfunction. Check all internal tubing and the interior of the
water trap for occlusions or leaks. Replace water trap. Check flow rates.
Abnormally high (or abnormally
low response to CO2
or sudden occlusion warning
Pressure transducer failure. Check the Ambient and Amb – Work
pressures in Gases service menu.
Strong drift in all gases
Leak in sampling line or internal tubing (especially in conjunction with too
low readings).
4.2.1 CO2 measurement
Problem
Cause
What to do
Action
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
sudden decrease in circulation
•
•
check all connections
•
•
•
•
hypoventilation
•
•
change D-fend
•
incorrect scaling
•
change scale
too low ETCO2 value
too high ETCO2
waveform clipped
28
Document no. M1187338-003
pulmonary embolism
check calibration
hyperventilation
very large dead-space
large shunting
leak in sampling system
calibration error
high by-pass flow from ventilator
increased metabolism
check calibration
D-fend contaminated
calibration error
S/5 Extension Module for FM, N-FC, N-FCREC, N-FREC
Problem
Cause
What to do
no response to breathing
•
•
•
apnea
•
check all connections
•
sample gas outlet blocked
•
check that outlet is open
•
abnormally high ETCO2 (permissive
hypercapnia)
•
•
•
CO2 sensor contaminated
let the module run without a
sampling line until the CO2
sensor has dried out
•
change D-fend
•
unit is mmHg or kPa and ETCO2 is close
to arterial PCO2
•
change to “wet gas” by using
install/service menu
•
“dry gas” as default
ETCO2 over scale >20%
Shown until 32%,
specified range 0...20%
ETCO2>PaCO2
(disconnection)
sampling line or water trap loose or
blocked (air leak)
D-fend malfunction
4.3 Gas sampling system troubleshooting
The faults which can occur in the sampling system are: leaks or blockages in the tubing, failure
of the sampling pump or the magnetic valves, or diminishing of the flow rates because of dirt
accumulating in the internal tubing.
The following checks should help in localizing the fault. Whenever suspecting the sampling
system and always after having done any work on the sampling system, check and if
necessary adjust the flow rate.
CAUTION
The special internal sample tube is mechanically fragile. Sharp bends will cause
leaks.
NOTE: D-fend water trap should be replaced, when the ‘REPLACE D-FEND’ message appears
during the monitor startup.
NOTE: If any liquid has entered the miniC measuring unit due to water trap filter failure, leave
the module running without a sampling line for several hours and check the functions after it
has dried out.
4.3.1 Sampling system leak test
1.
Connect a flow cassette with a high flow resistance value (50/1.1) to the end of the
sampling line and start following the ‘Amb-Work’ value in the service menu. When the
value exceeds 130 mmHg, connect the other port of the flow cassette to the sample gas
out connector and switch off the pump.
2.
Wait until the pressure inside the sampling system is stabilized, then observe the shown
Amb-Work value. The value, i.e. the pressure inside the sampling system, should not drop
more than 6 mmHg in 20 seconds.
3.
If the pressure drops more, first ensure the connections you have made and repeat the
test.
29
Document no. M1187338-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
4.4 MiniC unit troubleshooting
WARNING
The miniC measuring unit can only be repaired and calibrated at the
factory. Attempts to repair/calibrate the unit elsewhere will adversely
affect operation of the unit. In case of failure, the complete miniC unit
should be sent to GE Healthcare for factory exchange.
4.5 Error messages
Message
Explanation
Occlusion or Sample Line Blocked
The sample tube inside or outside the monitor is blocked or water
trap is occluded. If occlusion persists, measured gas values
disappear.
Continuous occlusion. Check
sample line and D-fend.
Occlusion over 40 seconds.
Check D-fend
- The water trap is not connected
- There is a leak in the sampling line inside the module. If air leak
persists, measured gas values disappear.
Check sample gas out.
(Air leak detected.) Check water
trap and sample gas out-flow.
Press normal screen to continue.
Air leak over 40 seconds.
Replace D-fend (replace water
trap)
Indicates residue build-up on the water trap membrane. This
decreases air flow.
Gas calibration is not available
during first 5 minutes/during
occlusion/during air leak
Entering calibration is not allowed during 5 minutes after power up
and during occlusion or air leak.
Gas out blocked
- Gas out connector on the front panel, or the exhaust line
connected to it, is blocked.
- If the sample gas is returned to the patient circuit, the filter in the
return kit may be occluded.
- Make sure the sample gas outlet is connected to an open
scavenging system only where gas is removed in room pressure.
Recalibration
Time out, fluctuating gases, gain adjusted “over”.
Zero error
Unsuccessful zeroing.
Unstable, Calibr error
Unsuccessful calibration.
Menu messages during
calibration:
Zero error
Unsuccessful zeroing.
Adjust
Calibration gas accepted and monitor is ready for adjusting the gas
values to match the calibration gas concentration.
Unstable
Unsuccessful calibration.
30
Document no. M1187338-003
S/5 Extension Module for FM, N-FC, N-FCREC, N-FREC
5
Earlier revisions
There are no earlier revisions of the S/5TM Extension Module for FM, N-FC, N-FCREC, N-FREC.
31
Document no. M1187338-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
For your notes:
32
Document no. M1187338-003
Appendix A Service check form, S/5 Extension Module for FM, N-FC, N-FCREC, N-FREC
APPENDIX A: Service check form,
S/5 Extension Module for FM, N-FC, N-FCREC,
N-FREC
Customer
Service
Module type
S/N
Service engineer
Date
Measuring equipment / test gases used:
Equipment / tool / gas:
Manufacturer:
OK = Test OK
General
OK
Model/Type/Part
Number:
N.A. = Test not applicable
N.A.
Serial Number /
ID:
Fail = Test failed
Fail
1. Check internal parts
Calibration
Date:
OK
N.A.
Fail
OK
N.A.
Fail
2. Check external parts
CO2 measurement
OK
N.A.
Fail
3. Check Mini D-Fend
4. Module software
GAS
5. Module bus
communication
±10 ml/min
6. Flow measurement offset
7. Ambient pressure
8. Zero valve check
9. Nafion tube
10. Leak test
<6 mmHg/20 sec
1(2)
Document no. M1187338-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
General
OK
N.A.
Fail
OK
N.A.
Fail
11. Check the flow rates
135...165 ml/min
Sampling flow
12. Working pressure
Amb-Work
20...50 mmHg
13. Gas calibration
14. Occlusion detection
15. Check D-fend
16. Apnea detection
Recorder
OK
N.A.
Fail
17. Paper compartment
cleaning
18. Cover state recognition
19. Paper recognition
20. Quality of recording
OK
N.A.
Fail
OK
N.A.
Fail
21. Recording speed
General
22. Electrical safety check
24. Final cleaning
Notes
Used Spare Parts
Signature
2(2)
Document no. M1187338-003
OK
N.A.
Fail
23. Functioning after
electrical safety check
Datex-Ohmeda
Remote Controller
S/5™ Remote Controller, K-REMCO (Rev. 01)
S/5™ Remote Controller, K-CREMCO (Rev. 00)
Technical Reference Manual Slot
Conformity according to the Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning Medical Devices amended by 2007/47/EC
CAUTION: U.S. Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a licensed medical practitioner.
Outside the USA, check local laws for any restriction that may apply.
All specifications subject to change without notice.
Document number M1187342-004
February 3, 2010
GE Healthcare Finland Oy
Kuortaneenkatu 2
FI-00510 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: +358 10 39411
Fax: +358 9 1463310
www.gehealthcare.com
Copyright © 2010 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Table of contents
Table of contents
Introduction
1
1
2
Specifications
1.1
2
3
Functional description
3
2.1
3
3
3
3
Remote Controller, K-REMCO/ K-CREMCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1 K-REMCO/ K-CREMCO PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.2 External communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.3 ComWheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service procedures
4
3.1
3.2
4
4
4
4
5
7
7
7
7
3.3
4
Remote Controller, K-REMCO, K-CREMCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
General service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1 Recommended tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2 Visual inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3 Functional inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disassembly and reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1 Before disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2 Tools needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3 To disassemble Remote Controller K-REMCO / K-CREMCO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting
4.1
9
K-REMCO, K-CREMCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Appendix A:
Service check form, Remote Controllers K-REMCO (Rev. 01)
and K-CREMCO (Rev. 00)
A-1
i
Document no. M1187342-004
Datex-Ohmeda E-Modules
ii
Document no. M1187342-004
Remote Controller
Introduction
This Technical Reference Manual slot provides information for the maintenance and service of
the Datex-Ohmeda S/5 Remote Controllers, K-REMCO and K-CREMCO. The Remote Controllers
are designed for use with the Datex-Ohmeda modular monitors. Later in this manual the
remote controllers may be referred to without S/5 for simplicity.
The service menu is described in a separate “Service Menu“ slot and the spare part lists in the
“Spare Parts” slot .
The Remote Controller, K-REMCO/K-CREMCO, brings the Command Bar/ monitor keyboard
functions near to the user and allows access to the same menus as the Command Bar/
monitor keyboard.
•
•
Remote Controller, K-REMCO for Anesthesia Monitor and Critical Care Monitor
Remote Controller, K-CREMCO for Compact Monitors, S/5 FM and FM Light.
Figure 1
K-REMCO and K-CREMCO
Monitor software compatibility
K-REMCO and K-CREMCO require monitor software version 97 or later.
1
Document no. M1187342-004
Datex-Ohmeda E-Modules
1
Specifications
1.1 Remote Controller, K-REMCO, K-CREMCO
Dimensions (without cable)
Weight (incl. cable)
Cable length
Input voltage
Power consumption
Communication protocol
150 × 60 × 50 mm
0.5 kg
6m
5V
180 mW
RS-232
NOTE: Power supply from the monitor only.
2
Document no. M1187342-004
Remote Controller
2
Functional description
2.1 Remote Controller, K-REMCO/ K-CREMCO
The Remote Controller consists of 12 direct function keys and the ComWheel.
2.1.1 K-REMCO/ K-CREMCO PCBs
The K-REMCO/ K-CREMCO has two PCBs located inside the Remote Controller. One board has
only the push button switches of the keys. The other board reads the status of the keys and the
ComWheel and forwards the information to the CPU board.
2.1.2 External communication
K-REMCO Rev. 00-01
Two signals, TXD and RXD in RS232 format are in use. No handshaking is used. Serial
communication speed is 19.2 kbps. The 26-pin subminiature D-connector of the Remote
Controller is connected to the Display Controller Board, B-DISP.
K-REMCO Rev. 00 with optional Remote Controller - Compact Monitor cable
or K-CREMCO Rev. 00
Two signals, TXD and RXD in RS232 format are in use. No handshaking is used. Serial
communication speed is 19.2 kbps.
In Compact Monitors, the DIN 5 connector is connected to the keyboard connector X9.
In S/5 FM and FM Light, the DIN 5 connector is connected to Multi IO adapter X7.
2.1.3 ComWheel
The ComWheel is used for menu selection.
3
Document no. M1187342-004
Datex-Ohmeda E-Modules
3
Service procedures
3.1 General service information
The field service of the remote controllers is limited to replacing faulty circuit boards or
mechanical parts. The circuit boards should be returned to GE Healthcare for repair.
GE Healthcare is always available for service advice. Please provide the unit serial number, full
type designation, and a detailed fault description.
WARNING
Only trained personnel with appropriate equipment should perform the
tests and repairs outlined in this section. Unauthorized service may void the
warranty of the unit.
3.2 Service check
These instructions include complete procedures for a service check. The service check is
mandatory after any service repair. However, the service check procedures can also be used
for determining possible failures.
The procedures should be performed in ascending order.
The instructions include a check form (“APPENDIX A:”) which may be used when performing the
procedures.
The symbol
"
in the instructions indicates that the check form contains space to record the
results of the particular procedure.
3.2.1 Recommended tools
Tool
Order No.
Notes
Screwdriver
3.2.2 Visual inspection
Turn the monitor to STBY.
Disconnect the remote controller cable from the monitor.
Detach the remote controller upper cover and the keypad cover by removing the screws
(7 pcs) from the bottom.
1.
Internal parts
Check that:
•
•
•
•
cables are connected properly
the remote controller cable is fastened to the bottom cover with screws
the keypad switches are intact
the software EPROM under the keypad is attached properly
"
4
Document no. M1187342-004
Remote Controller
2.
External parts
Check that:
•
•
•
the upper and bottom covers are intact
the keypad cover is intact
the ComWheel cover is intact and attached properly
"
Reassemble the remote controller.
3.
Cable
Check the remote controller cable:
•
•
•
•
the cable is intact
the cable connector is intact
the connector pins are clean, straight and at about the same height
the locking screws inside the connector case are intact
"
3.2.3 Functional inspection
Reconnect the cable to the monitor and turn the monitor ON.
4.
Command board software
Enter the service menu:
Menu (on the remote controller keypad) - Monitor Setup - Install/Service (password
16-4-34) - Service (password 26-23-8)
Take down the information regarding the remote controller software.
"
Select the menu KEYBOARD:
Service - Keyboard
5.
Remote controller keys
Press the keys one by one. Check that each key generates a sound from the loudspeaker.
"
6.
ComWheel
Turn the ComWheel clockwise and counterclockwise and check that each step generates
a sound and the corresponding values at the bottom of the menu increase.
Select DUMMY PRESS. Push the ComWheel and check that the push generates a sound
and the corresponding value in the menu increases.
"
5
Document no. M1187342-004
Datex-Ohmeda E-Modules
7.
Electrical safety check
Perform an electrical safety check and a leakage current test.
"
8.
Functioning after electrical safety check
Check that the remote controller functions normally after the electrical safety check.
"
9.
Final cleaning
Clean the remote controller and the cable.
"
•
Fill in all necessary documents.
6
Document no. M1187342-004
Remote Controller
3.3 Disassembly and reassembly
3.3.1 Before disassembly
WARNING
Wear a grounded, antistatic wristband when handling PC boards.
Electrostatic discharge may damage components on the board.
Handle all PC boards by their edges.
3.3.2 Tools needed
-
screwdriver
-
flat blade screwdriver
-
antistatic wristband
3.3.3 To disassemble Remote Controller K-REMCO / K-CREMCO
To disassemble the Remote Controller (see Figure 2):
1.
Disconnect the K-REMCO/ K-CREMCO cable from the monitor.
2.
Pull out the knob of the ComWheel.
3.
Open the nut on the shaft of the ComWheel.
4.
Open the three cross head screws on the bottom of the K-REMCO/ K-CREMCO.
5.
Remove the top cover.
6.
Open the four screws on the bottom of the K-REMCO/ K-CREMCO.
7.
Remove the keyboard cover.
8.
Disconnect the K-REMCO/ K-CREMCO cable and the wire set from the Comwheel.
9.
Remove the PCBs.
For more information on the spare parts, see the “Spare parts” slot.
In reassembly, remember to put the reinforcing cord of the cable around the screw on the
metal bridge before tightening the screw.
7
Document no. M1187342-004
Datex-Ohmeda E-Modules
Figure 2
K-REMCO, K-CREMCO disassembly and reassembly
To reassemble the module, reverse the order of the disassembly steps.
In reassembly, remember to put the reinforcing cord of the cable around the screw on the
metal bridge before tightening the screw.
CAUTION
When reassembling the remote controller make sure that the cables are
reconnected properly.
Always perform the “Service check” after reassembling the remote controller.
8
Document no. M1187342-004
Remote Controller
4
Troubleshooting
4.1 K-REMCO, K-CREMCO
See Keyboard Service Menu in the “Service Menu“ slot and perform tests available. If any of the
tests fail, see explanation below.
Problem
Cause
What to do
ComWheel not working
ComWheel leads broken or
connector loose. ComWheel
faulty.
Check the items. Replace the
ComWheel if necessary.
Membrane key not
working
Switch cable loose or broken.
Check the items. Replace them if
Keyboard cable loose or broken. necessary.
Cable connector pin failure.
RS232 communication failure
on CPU board.
9
Document no. M1187342-004
Datex-Ohmeda E-Modules
For your notes:
10
Document no. M1187342-004
Appendix A, Service check form, Remote Controllers K-REMCO (Rev. 01) and K-CREMCO (Rev. 00)
APPENDIX A: Service check form,
Remote Controllers K-REMCO (Rev. 01) and
K-CREMCO (Rev. 00)
Customer
Keyboard type
Service
S/N
Date
Service engineer
OK = Test OK
Visual inspection
OK
1. Internal parts
N.A. = Test not applicable
N.A.
Fail = Test failed
Fail
OK
N.A.
Fail
2. External parts
3. Cable
Notes
Functional inspection
4. Command board
software
KB
5. Remote controller keys
6. ComWheel
7. Electrical safety check
8. Functioning after
electrical safety check
9. Final cleaning
Notes
Used spare parts
Signature
1(2)
Document no. M1187342-004
Datex-Ohmeda E-Modules
For your notes:
2(2)
Document no. M1187342-004
Datex-Ohmeda
Device Interfacing Solution
Technical Reference Manual Slot
Conformity according to the Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning Medical Devices amended by 2007/47/EC
CAUTION: U.S. Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a licensed medical practitioner.
Outside the USA, check local laws for any restriction that may apply.
All specifications subject to change without notice.
Document number M1187344-003
3 February, 2010
GE Healthcare Finland Oy
Kuortaneenkatu 2
FI-00510 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: +358 10 39411
Fax: +358 9 1463310
www.gehealthcare.com
Copyright © 2010 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Table of contents
Table of contents
1
Specifications
2
1.1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2
Functional description
4
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
4
4
6
7
7
7
2.5
3
3.3
3.4
8
General service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Service check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.2.1 Recommended tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.2.2 Recommended parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.2.3 Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.2.4 Functional inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Disassembly and reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.3.1 Before disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.3.2 Tools needed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
To disassemble the module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Troubleshooting
4.1
4.2
5
Main components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIS module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connectors and signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.1 Male bus cable connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interfaced devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service procedures
3.1
3.2
4
Environmental specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.1 Protection against ingress of liquids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.1.1 Green LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
4.1.2 Yellow LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Quick functional check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Earlier revisions
Appendix A:
14
Service check form, Device Interfacing Solution,
N-DISxxx (Rev. 01)
A-1
i
Document no. M1187344-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Table of figures
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
Figure 4
Figure 5
An example of interfacing external devices with Device Interfacing Solution................................................ 1
Implementation of Device Interfacing Solution ............................................................................................................. 4
DIS module working principle diagram ............................................................................................................................. 5
Connection cables and LED indicators .............................................................................................................................. 6
LED indicators ..............................................................................................................................................................................12
ii
Document no. M1187344-003
Device Interfacing Solution
Introduction
This “Technical Reference Manual” slot provides information for the maintenance and service
of the Datex-Ohmeda S/5 Device Interfacing Solution, N-DISxxx. Later in this manual modules
may be referred to without S/5 for simplicity.
Please also refer to the “Installation Guide” accompanying each module.
The service menu is described in a separate “Service Menu“ slot and the spare part lists in the
“Spare Parts” slot.
The purpose of the Device Interfacing Solution is to produce a data connection between an
external bedside device and a Datex-Ohmeda modular monitor.
Up to 4 devices can be connected simultaneously via device specific N-DISxxx modules. No
Device Interfacing Solution is called N-DISxxx, but the xxx are replaced with a device specific
ending such as N-DISQVUE and N-DISOPT.
NOTE: Only revision 01 or later is compatible with the S/5 FM.
NOTE: Not compatible with L-FICU05L.
1
3
2
2
4
Figure 1
An example of interfacing external devices with Device Interfacing
Solution
(1)
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM (with software L-FICU04(A) or later)
(2)
DIS module (max. 4pcs)
(3)
Baxter Vigilance monitor
(4)
Opti CCA blood gas analyzer
1
Document No. M1187344-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
1
Specifications
1.1 Environmental specification
Operating temperature
Storage and transport temperature
Relative humidity
Atmospheric pressure
+10 to +40°C (50 to 104°F)
-20 to +60°C (-4 to 140°F)
10...90% non condensing (in airway 0 to 100% condensing)
670...1060 hPa
(670...1060 mbar/500...800 mmHg)
1.1.1 Protection against ingress of liquids
According to IEC/EN 60592 class IPX 1.
The DIS module must always be used in vertical position to prevent water from entering the
module.
1.2 Technical specifications
1.2.1 General
Max 4 DIS modules.
NOTE: Only revision 01 or later is compatible with the S/5 FM.
Module
Size (W × D × H)
Weight
60 × 27 × 85 mm/2.4 × 1.1 × 3.4 in
0.1 kg/0.2 lb.
Bus cables
8-pin Hirose HR12/HR212 connector
Material
Length/Weight
black PVC
1 m/47 g (39 in/3.3 ft./0.104 lb.)
2 m/85 g (79 in/6.6 ft./0.187 lb.)
6 m/220 g (236 in/19.7 ft./0.485 lb.)
Device cables
Depends on device.
Material
Length
Weight
elastollan
0.5...1 m (19...39 in/1.6...3.3 ft.)
40...70 g (0.088...0.154 lbs.)
1.3 Electrical specification
There is no isolation in the DIS module. The interfaced device, DIS module and the monitor must
be situated in the same patient environment (as defined in IEC 60601-1-1).
WARNING
Connecting electrical equipment together or using the same extension cord
for more than one device may cause their leakage currents to exceed the
limits specified in relevant safety standards. Always make sure that the
entire combination complies with the international safety standard IEC
60601-1-1 for medical electrical systems and with the requirements of local
authorities.
2
Document no. Document No. M1187344-003
Device Interfacing Solution
1.4 Maximum power consumption
450 mW (30 mA @ 15 V) 900mW peak.
1.5 Module communication
Bus communication speed is 500 kbps. RS422 implementation.
Device communication speed depends on the interfaced external device. RS232
implementation.
3
Document No. M1187344-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
2
Functional description
The S/5TM Device Interfacing Solution provides a seamless link between external patient care
devices and the Datex-Ohmeda S/5 Monitoring system. You can interface simultaneously up to
four external devices: monitors, blood gas analyzers, etc.
The Device Interfacing Solution is designed for use with the S/5 FM Monitors with software
L-FICU04(A) or later.
WARNING
The manufacturer guarantees a reliable functioning of the devices with
tested software versions only. Always refer to the Installation guide
accompanying the DIS module and verify the compatibility before use.
2.1 Main components
The implementation of Device Interfacing Solution can be divided into five parts:
•
•
•
•
•
Device specific software
Device specific module
Device specific cable
Bus cables
Software in Datex-Ohmeda Monitor
Datex-Ohmeda Monitor
DIS
Module
Device #1
DIS
Module
DIS Module Bus
External
serial
format
Device #2
Figure 2
Implementation of Device Interfacing Solution
2.2 DIS module
A DIS module receives data from an external device, converts the data to a suitable format for
the monitor and then sends the data to the monitor. The main board contains the power supply
with a current limiter, microcontroller, reset circuits, memory and serial communication
buffers. The board communicates with the Datex-Ohmeda Monitor through the DIS bus.
A DIS module consists of:
•
•
Power supply with current limiter and reset circuit parts
Microcontroller H8, internal and external RAM, non volatile memory, etc.
4
Document no. Document No. M1187344-003
Device Interfacing Solution
Programming connection
Device communication connection and RS232 driver
Bus communication connection and RS422 driver
LEDs that indicate the status of the communication
Device specific software
to programming device
Programming
+5V
to external device
RS232
buffers
Controller H8
Flash
RAM
SRAM
EEPROM
LEDs
Power
Current limit
Reset
RS422
buffers
Green
Yellow
DIS_module_wrkng_principle
•
•
•
•
•
DIS Bus
Figure 3
DIS module working principle diagram
5
Document No. M1187344-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
2.3 Connections
Connect the device specific cable to the external device and the bus cable to the DatexOhmeda Monitor’s DIS connector or to another DIS module.
Figure 4
(1)
label specifying the external device
(2)
LED indicators
(3)
black bus cable from another
interfacing module, if needed
(4)
grey device specific cable to the
communication port of the external
device
(5)
black bus cable to the monitor’s DIS
connector (or to another interfacing
module)
Connection cables and LED indicators
6
Document no. Document No. M1187344-003
Device Interfacing Solution
2.4 Connectors and signals
2.4.1 Male bus cable connector
2
5
1
4
7
3
6
8
Pin No.
Signal
Color
1
Data from UPI +
brown
2
Data from UPI -
red
3
VDD 9 V to 18 V (max 1 A)
orange
4
GND
yellow
5
VCC 7 V to 8 V (max 1 A)
blue
6
GND
grey
7
Data to UPI +
white
8
Data to UPI -
black
2.5 Interfaced devices
See the following table of DIS modules and devices that you can interface with the Device
Interfacing Solution.
For specific information on parameters transferred from the interfaced device to the DatexOhmeda Monitor and the applicable software versions of the device, refer to the Installation
guide accompanying.
Device Monitors
N-DISOXIM3
Oximetrix 3a
N-DISQVUE
QVue /Q2a
N-DISVIGIL
Baxter-Vigilanceb
a
b
Trademark of Hospira Inc. (previously trademark of Abbott Laboratories)
Trademark of Edwards Lifesciences Corporation
Device Blood gas analyzers
N-DISOPT
a
Opti CCAa
Trademark of Osmetech plc
7
Document No. M1187344-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
3
Service procedures
3.1 General service information
The field service of the Device Interfacing Solution is limited to replacing faulty cables or
mechanical parts. The circuit boards should be returned to GE Healthcare for repair.
GE Healthcare is always available for service advice. Please provide the unit serial number, full
type designation, and a detailed fault description.
WARNING
Only trained personnel with appropriate equipment should perform the
tests and repairs outlined in this section. Unauthorized service may void the
warranty of the unit.
3.2 Service check
These instructions include complete procedures for a service check. The service check is
mandatory after any service repair. However, the service check procedures can also be used
for determining possible failures.
The procedures should be performed in ascending order.
The instructions include a check form (“APPENDIX A:”) which may be used when performing the
procedures.
The symbol
"
in the instructions indicates that the check form contains space to record the
results of the particular procedure.
3.2.1 Recommended tools
Tool
Order No.
Notes
Screwdrivers
3.2.2 Recommended parts
No recommended parts.
3.2.3 Visual inspection
Disconnect the DIS module from the DIS bus and from the interfaced external device.
1.
Internal check
•
•
•
•
Disassemble the DIS module.
Make sure that there are no loose parts inside the DIS module.
Check that the screws holding the PC board are tightened properly.
Check that the cables are attached properly and the connectors are intact.
"
8
Document no. Document No. M1187344-003
Device Interfacing Solution
2.
External check
•
•
•
•
•
Check that the DIS module case and label are clean and intact.
Reassemble the DIS module.
Check that the screws for the DIS module case are secured properly.
Check that the bus cable connector is intact.
Check that the DIS bus and device specific cables are intact.
"
3.2.4 Functional inspection
3.
DIS module interface status
Connect the DIS module to the DIS bus and to the external device that is specified in the
DIS module label. Turn on the interfaced external device.
Check that no error messages are displayed on the monitor screen.
Check via the Interfacing menu that the connected DIS module status is correct:
Monitor Setup - Interfacing - Status Page
Check that the waveforms and numeric data are transferred to the monitor according to
the configuration.
"
4.
Recognition of interface
Disconnect the DIS bus cable and check that the ‘[device name] module removed’
message appears on the monitor screen. Reconnect the cable.
Turn off the external device (if possible) and check that the ‘[device name] disconnected
from module’ message appears on the screen. Turn the external device back on again.
"
5.
DIS module service menu
Enter the service menu:
Monitor Setup – Install/Service (password 16-4-34) –
Service (password 26-23-8) –
Parameters – DIS Interfacing
Check that the menu displays submenus for all connected DIS modules.
Enter the corresponding DIS module service menu and check that the displayed
information corresponds to the information on the DIS module labels.
Check that the DIS bus voltage is between 13.80...16.00 V.
Check that the DIS module time-out and checksum error values do not increase more
than by 5 per second.
Check that the status of each DIS module memory indicates OK.
"
9
Document No. M1187344-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
6.
Electrical safety check
Perform the electrical safety test and leakage current test.
"
7.
Functioning after electrical safety check
Check that the DIS module functions normally after the tests.
"
8.
Final cleaning
Clean the DIS module, bus cable and device specific cable with a suitable detergent.
"
•
Fill up all the necessary documents.
10
Document no. Document No. M1187344-003
Device Interfacing Solution
3.3 Disassembly and reassembly
3.3.1 Before disassembly
WARNING
Wear a grounded, antistatic wristband when handling PC boards.
Electrostatic discharge may damage components on the board.
Handle all PC boards by their edges.
3.3.2 Tools needed
3.4
-
screwdriver
-
flat blade screwdriver
-
antistatic wristband
To disassemble the module
To disassemble the N-DISxxx module (see the exploded view of the module in the “S/5 FM
Spare parts” slot):
1.
Remove the two screws from the back of the module.
2.
Loosen the two strain-relief threads and after that disconnect the cables from the
connectors.
To remove the Module Front Cover from the module, release the snaps that hold the front
cover to the front chassis.
To reassemble the module, reverse the order of the disassembly steps.
CAUTION
When reassembling the module, make sure to reconnect all cables properly.
Always perform the “Service check” after reassembling the module.
11
Document No. M1187344-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
4
Troubleshooting
4.1 LED indicators
Green LED
Figure 5
Yellow LED
LED indicators
4.1.1 Green LED
The green LED indicates that the communication between the monitor and DIS module and
the communication between the DIS module and external device is working properly. When all
cables are connected and the connected devices are on, the green LED should be lit
continuously.
4.1.2 Yellow LED
The yellow LED alerts the user. The yellow LED is lit when any of the following conditions
becomes true:
1.
The DIS module is connected to the DIS bus, but the external device is not connected.
2.
The external device is in power off state.
3.
The external device is not selected from the interfacing menu as an active source of data.
NOTE: The meaning of the yellow LED varies with some external devices. See the “Installation
Guide” delivered with the DIS module.
12
Document no. Document No. M1187344-003
Device Interfacing Solution
4.2 Quick functional check
You have two ways for checking the function of the Device Interfacing Solution:
•
Press the Monitor Setup key, select Interfacing and open the Status Page menu. The
status page shows you the current communication status of the interfacing modules
connected to the bus (1...4 pcs).
NOTE: The status message ‘Connected’ appears on the monitor screen after you have
connected the external device to the DIS module and turned it on, if the monitor and DIS
module have already been initialized.
•
Check the LED indicators on the DIS module (the green LED indicates the physical
connections, the yellow LED software selections):
GREEN
YELLOW
INDICATION
lit
dark
Physical connections between the monitor, DIS module
and external device are in order and the device has been
selected in the menu.
dark
lit
There is something wrong with the physical connections
between the monitor, interfacing module and external
device. The external device has not been selected in the
menu.
lit
lit
Physical connections between the monitor, DIS module
and external device are in order, but the external device
has not been selected in the menu (see the “User’s
Reference Manual” of the monitor).
dark
dark
The DIS module is not connected to the monitor.
13
Document No. M1187344-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
5
Earlier revisions
This manual supports the previous version of N-DISxx.
14
Document no. Document No. M1187344-003
Appendix A, Service check form, Device Interfacing Solution, N-DISxxx (Rev. 01)
APPENDIX A: Service check form,
Device Interfacing Solution, N-DISxxx (Rev. 01)
Customer
Module type
Service
S/N
Date
Service engineer
OK = Test OK
Visual inspection
1. Internal check
OK
N.A. = Test not applicable
N.A.
Fail = Test failed
Fail
OK
N.A.
Fail
2. External check
Notes
Functional inspection
3. DIS module interface
status
4. Recognition of interface
5. DIS module service
menu
6. Electrical safety check
7. Functioning after
electrical safety check
8. Final cleaning
Notes
Used spare parts
Signature
A-1(2)
Document no. M1187344-003
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
For your notes:
A-2(2)
Document no. M1187344-003
Datex-Ohmeda
S/5 FM
Spare Parts
Conformity according to the Council Directive 93/42/EEC concerning Medical Devices amended by 2007/47/EC
CAUTION: U.S. Federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a licensed medical practitioner.
Outside the USA, check local laws for any restriction that may apply.
All specifications subject to change without notice.
Document number M1187346-007
30 January, 2012
GE Healthcare Finland Oy
Kuortaneenkatu 2
FI-00510 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: +358 10 39411
Fax: +358 9 1463310
www.gehealthcare.com
Copyright 2010, 2012 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Table of contents
Table of contents
1
S/5 FM, monitor
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
2
3
Front panel labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
S/5 FM, service software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
S/5 FM, service option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Upgrades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
S/5 FM, back cover unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
S/5 FM, front cover unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
S/5 FM, AC/DC unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Frame for S/5 FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Patient Side Modules
2.1
2.2
13
Patient Side Modules, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Patient Side Modules, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.2.1 Front panel labeling, E-PSM(P) (Rev. 00 and 01). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.2.2 Spare parts for PSM mounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Extension Modules for FM
3.1
3.2
3.3
1
18
Extension Modules for FM, N-FCREC, N-FREC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Front panel labeling, N-FC, N-FCREC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Extension Module for FM, N-FC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4
Remote controller, K-CREMCO, rev. 00, 01
21
5
Device Interfacing Solution, N-DISxxx (rev.01)
23
i
Document no. M1187346-007
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
ii
Document no. M1187346-007
Spare Parts
1
S/5 FM, monitor
The following S/5 FM parts will be available as field replaceable spare parts.
1.1 Front panel labeling
Front panel labeling, S/5 FM, monitor
Item
Description
Order Code
1
Horizontal Panel Sticker, F-FM-CS
M1064524
1
Horizontal Panel Sticker, F-FM-DA
M1022586
1
Horizontal Panel Sticker, F-FM-DE
M1022575
1
Horizontal Panel Sticker, F-FM-EN
M1002328
1
Horizontal Panel Sticker, F-FM-ES
M1022578
1
Horizontal Panel Sticker, F-FM-FI
M1002582
1
Horizontal Panel Sticker, F-FM-FR
M1002576
1
Horizontal Panel Sticker, F-FM-HU
M1042462
1
Horizontal Panel Sticker, F-FM-IT
M1022580
1
Horizontal Panel Sticker, F-FM-NL
M1022577
1
Horizontal Panel Sticker, F-FM-NO
M1022584
Replaced by
1
Document no. M1187346-007
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Item
Description
Order Code
1
Horizontal Panel Sticker, F-FM-PL
M1022589
1
Horizontal Panel Sticker, F-FM-PT
M1022581
1
Horizontal Panel Sticker, F-FM-SV
M1022583
2
Vertical Panel Sticker, F-FM - CS
M1064527
2
Vertical Panel Sticker, F-FM - DA
M1023027
2
Vertical Panel Sticker, F-FM - DE
M1022991
2
Vertical Panel Sticker, F-FM - EN
M1002324
2
Vertical Panel Sticker, F-FM - ES
M1023004
2
Vertical Panel Sticker, F-FM - FI
M1023015
2
Vertical Panel Sticker, F-FM - FR
M1022997
2
Vertical Panel Sticker, F-FM - HU
M1042466
2
Vertical Panel Sticker, F-FM - IT
M1023008
2
Vertical Panel Sticker, F-FM - NL
M1023001
2
Vertical Panel Sticker, F-FM - NO
M1023024
2
Vertical Panel Sticker, F-FM - PL
M1023033
2
Vertical Panel Sticker, F-FM - PT
M1023011
2
Vertical Panel Sticker, F-FM - SV
M1023019
3
Battery Caution Sticker, F-FM
M1140504
3
Battery Caution Sticker, F-FM - CS
M1065250
M1140504
3
Battery Caution Sticker, F-FM - DA
M1029195
M1140504
3
Battery Caution Sticker, F-FM - DE
M1029196
M1140504
3
Battery Caution Sticker, F-FM - EN
M1029197
M1140504
3
Battery Caution Sticker, F-FM - ES
M1029198
M1140504
3
Battery Caution Sticker, F-FM - FI
M1029200
M1140504
3
Battery Caution Sticker, F-FM - FR
M1029201
M1140504
3
Battery Caution Sticker, F-FM - HU
M1042369
M1140504
3
Battery Caution Sticker, F-FM - IT
M1029202
M1140504
3
Battery Caution Sticker, F-FM - NL
M1029203
M1140504
3
Battery Caution Sticker, F-FM - NO
M1029205
M1140504
3
Battery Caution Sticker, F-FM - PL
M1029206
M1140504
3
Battery Caution Sticker, F-FM - PT
M1029207
M1140504
3
Battery Caution Sticker, F-FM - SV
M1029208
M1140504
3
Battery Caution Sticker, F-FM - ZH
M1065259
M1140504
2
Document no. M1187346-007
Replaced by
Spare Parts
1.2 S/5 FM, service software
F-FM(W)-00
Item
Description
Order Code
Critical Care Software License for S/5 FM, L-FICU04S
L-FICU04S
Critical Care Software License for S/5 FM w/ Extended
Arrhythmia Analysis, L-FICU04AS
L-FICU04AS
F-FM-01
NOTE: L-FICU06(A)S Service software can be used only together with FM CPU board M1186848. When
ordering the service software, the FM CPU board is delivered at the same time. The service software will be
loaded on the board at factory.
NOTE: This CPU and Service Software package is for monitors without Wireless Network Option.
Description
Order Code
Note
M1184250
SW pre-loaded on
the CPU board
Critical Care Service Software License for S/5 FM, L-FICU06S and
CPU board
S/5 FM Service SW, L-FICU06S, Group A + CPU
Languages in Group A: Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese,
Spanish, Swedish
S/5 FM Service SW, L-FICU06S, Group B + CPU
M1184264
SW pre-loaded on
the CPU board
Languages in Group B: Czech, English, Polish, Hungarian
Critical Care Service Software License w/ Extended Arrhythmia Analysis for
S/5 FM, L-FICU06AS and CPU board
S/5 FM Service SW w/EAA, L-FICU06AS, Group A + CPU
M1184268
SW pre-loaded on
the CPU board
Languages in Group A: Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese,
Spanish, Swedish
S/5 FM Service SW w/EAA, L-FICU06AS, Group B + CPU
M1184285
SW pre-loaded on
the CPU board
Languages in Group B: Czech, English, Polish, Hungarian
3
Document no. M1187346-007
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
F-FMW-01
NOTE: L-FICU06(A)S Service software can be used only together with FM CPU board M1186848. When
ordering the service software, the FM CPU board is delivered at the same time. The service software will be
loaded on the board at factory.
NOTE: This CPU and Service Software package is for monitors with Wireless Network Option installed.
(WLAN card and antennas are not included)
NOTE: WLAN Option and Virtual ID will be loaded on the board at factory.
Description
Order Code
Note
Critical Care Service Software License for S/5 FM, L-FICU06S and CPU board with
WLAN Option
S/5 FM Service Software, L-FICU06S, Group A + CPU + WLAN
M1184279
SW pre-loaded on
the CPU board
Languages in Group A: Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese,
Spanish, Swedish
SS/5 FM Service Software, L-FICU06S, Group B + CPU + WLAN
M1184280
SW pre-loaded on
the CPU board
Languages in Group B: Czech, English, Polish, Hungarian
Critical Care Service Software License w/ Extended Arrhythmia Analysis for
S/5 FM, L-FICU06AS and CPU board with WLAN Option
S/5 FM Service Software w/EAA, L-FICU06AS, Group A + CPU + WLAN M1184281
SW pre-loaded on
the CPU board
Languages in Group A: Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese,
Spanish, Swedish
S/5 FM Service Software w/EAA, L-FICU06AS, Group B + CPU + WLAN M1184282
Languages in Group B: Czech, English, Polish, Hungarian
4
Document no. M1187346-007
SW pre-loaded on
the CPU board
Spare Parts
1.3 S/5 FM, service option
NOTE: For F-FM-00 only.
Item
Description
Order Code
Wireless Network Service Option for S/5 FM
N-FMWS
1.4 Upgrades
For F-FM-00
Item
Description
Order Code
Wireless Network Upgrade for S/5 FM
U-FMW
S/5 ICU Upgrade SW License for S/5 FM, L-FICU04S
U-FICU04S
S/5 ICU Upgrade SW License for S/5 FM, w/Arr, L-FICU04AS U-FICU04AS
For F-FM-01
NOTE: SWDL Tool is needed when installing U-FMW-01
Item
Description
Order Code
Wireless Network Upgrade for FM-01, U-FMW-01
M1186854
5
Document no. M1187346-007
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
1.5 S/5 FM, back cover unit
Back cover unit
Item
Description
Order Code
1
Front Cover, F-FM
M1007245
2
Display Filter, F-FM
M1009577
3
Dust Seal, F-FM
M1009506
4
Battery Cover, F-FM
M1008598
5
Top Cover Unit, F-FM
M1017874
6
Top Cover, F-FM
M1007250
7
Back Cover, F-FM
M1005721
8
Equipment Potential Plug, F-FM
M1009625
9
Fuse T2A, 250V, 5X20mm, F-FM
511393
6
Document no. M1187346-007
Spare Parts
Item
Description
Order Code
10
Multi-IO Adapter Lock, F-FM
M1020477
11
Module Guide, F-FM
M1007251
12
Module Connector Shell, F-FM
M1008905
13
Module Connector Rear, F-FM
M1008907
14
MemCard Door Spring, F-FM
M1009892
15
MemCard Door Axle, F-FM
M1009894
16
MemCard Door, F-FM
M1007252
17
Module Guide Unit, F-FM
M1011791
18
Multi-IO adapter
M1020847
20
Screw PTDG 3.5x18, TORX
M1013392
21
Screw PT 3.5x16, TORX
M1013390
22
Screw PTDG 4x6, TORX
M1013393
23
Washer
63615
24
Screw PT 3.5x7.5, TORX/T8
M1013389
7
Document no. M1187346-007
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
1.6 S/5 FM, front cover unit
Front cover unit
Item
Description
Order Code
1
Alarm Indicator Board, F-FM
M1011439
2
Indicator Ribbon Cable, F-FM
M1010843
3
Alarm Light Board, F-FM
M1011418
4
Front Cover, F-FM
M1011320
5
Vertical Membrane Key pad, F-FM
M1002474
6
Horizontal Membrane Key pad, F-FM
M1002473
7
ComWheel
898794
8
Foot Pad, F-FM
M1009556
9
User Interface Board, F-FM
M1011413
10
ComWheel EMC Spring, F-FM
M1009883
11
Power Indicator Board, F-FM
M1011462
12
PCB Fastening Part, F-FM
M1008663
13
Screw PT 3.5x7.5, TORX/T8
M1013389
14
Opto-encoder, rotary switch, push button, 3-inch flat cable M1007539
8
Document no. M1187346-007
Spare Parts
1.7 S/5 FM, AC/DC unit
AC/DC unit
Item
Description
Order Code
1
AC/DC Output Cable, F-FM
M1009794
2+3
Battery Brake Unit, F-FM
M1011346
2
Battery Brake Spring, F-FM
M1009880
3
Battery Brake, F-FM
M1008898
4
Power Supply Frame Insulator, F-FM
M1013451
5
AC/DC Input Cable, F-FM
M1009793
6
AC/DC Protective Earth Cable, F-FM
M1009792
7
Power Inlet Board, F-FM
M1011344
8
Network Connector Board Unit, F-FM
M1011329
9
Document no. M1187346-007
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Item
Description
Order Code
9
Filter Board, F-FM
M1011361
10
Power Supply Frame, F-FM
M1005731
11
Screw PTDG 3x6, TORX11
M1013391
12
Nut M4
M1018448
13
AC/DC unit, F-FM
M1009074
10
Document no. M1187346-007
Spare Parts
1.8 Frame for S/5 FM
Frame for S/5 FM
Item
Description
Order Code
1
DC/DC Board, F-FM
M1007651
2
Network Cable, F-FM
M1009788
3
DISPL-ACC, Dual Lamp CCFL Inverter, F-FM-00
M1007567
3
LCD backlight inverter for FM, F-FM-01
M1181212-S
4
Inverter Insulator Plate, F-FM
M1009889
5
Inverter Cable, F-FM
M1009787
6
CPU Board, F-FM-00
M1008748**
6
CPU Board, F-FM-01
M1186848*
Battery for SRAM/Timekeeper
197230-HEL-S
DISPL-LCD, Color 262144, F-FM-00
M1007543***
Backlight for LCD-display M1007543
M1034568
7
10.4 inch LCD display for FM, F-FM-01
M1181228-S
8
Handle Guide Unit, F-FM
M1017686
7
11
Document no. M1187346-007
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Item
Description
Order Code
9
Handle, F-FM
M1007253
10
Display Connection Board, F-FM
M1010659
14
Loudspeaker Unit, F-FM
M1010921
15
Inner Frame and Module Bus Cable Unit, FRU
M1230405
- Inner Frame
- Module Bus Connector Cable Unit
- Sync Connector Unit
16
Flex PCB Support, F-FM
M1008903
17
Interconnection Board, F-FM
M1009286
18
Loudspeaker Support, F-FM
M1008896
19
Heatsink, F-FM
8004369
20
Spring, F-FM
8004370
21
EMC Shield, F-FM
M1013800
22
Screw for Handle Guide, F-FM
M1013724
23
Power Supply Insulator Plate, F-FM
M1009887
24
DC/DC EMC Spring, F-FM
M1009604
25
Ferrite Support, F-FM
M1008900
26
Power Inlet Bracket, F-FM
M1009602
29
Handle Guide, F-FM
M1007254
30
Net Connector Bracket, F-FM
M1009622
31
Net Connector Insulator, F-FM
M1009885
32
Screw, PTDG 3x6, TORX
M1013391
*NOTE: Note that the CPU spare part can be ordered with or without software pre-loaded.
In case the CPU is needed with software pre-loaded, order only the correct service software
license. See chapter 1.2. S/5 FM, service software.
**NOTE: CPU Board, F-FM-01 is also compatible with F-FM-00 version. However, CPU Board,
F-FM-01 is only compatible with FICU06(A) software.
***NOTE: 10.4 inch LCD display for FM, F-FM-01 (M1181228-S) is also compatible with
F-FM-00 version. However, if M1181228-S is ordered for F-FM-00 also LCD backlight inverter
(M1181212-S) and Inner Frame (M1005729) need to be ordered to ensure compatibility.
12
Document no. M1187346-007
Spare Parts
2
Patient Side Modules
2.1 Patient Side Modules, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 01)
FRU Description
Parts Included
Order No.
E-PSM(P)-01, NIBP Board, FRU
2) NIPB Board
M1221544
E-PSM(P)-01, STP Board, FRU
4) STP Board
M1221543
E-PSM(P)-01, Module Bus Connector Board, FRU
7) Module Bus Connector
6) Module Bus Insulator
M1221542
E-PSM(P)-01, ECG Board, FRU
8) ECG Board
M1221541
E-PSM(P), NIPB Pump, FRU
9) NIPB Pump, screws and washers
M1221540
E-PSM(P)-01, NIPB Manifold Unit, FRU
15) NIPB Manifold Unit
14) Filter
13) Filter Cover
M1221539
E-PSM(P), Plastic Parts, FRU
1) Cover
3) STP NIPB Insulator
5) ECG STP Insulator
6) Module Bus Insulator
M1221538
E-PSM(P), Frame, FRU
10) Frame
M1221537
E-PSM(P), Screws and Washers, FRU
All screws and washers
M1221482
13
Document no. M1187346-007
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
FRU Description
Parts Included
Order No.
E-PSM(P), Air Filter, FRU
14) Filter
13) Filter Cover
M1221481
E-PSM(P), Lock Unit, FRU
11) Lock Unit and screws
M1221394
E-PSM-01, Front Panel Unit - DE, FRU
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - DE
18) Front Panel Stickers: DE
M1213585
E-PSM-01, Front Panel Unit - EN, NL, IT, FRU
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - EN, NL, IT
18) Front Panel Stickers: EN, NL, IT
M1213586
E-PSM-01, Front Panel Unit - ES, FRU
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - ES
18) Front Panel Stickers: ES
M1213587
E-PSM-01, Front Panel Unit - CS, DA, FI, NO, PL, SV, FRU
16) Front Panel Unit
M1213588
17) Front Mask - CS, DA, FI, NO, PL, SV
18) Front Panel Stickers: CS, DA, FI,
NO, PL, SV
E-PSM-01, Front Panel Unit - FR, PT, FRU
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - FR, PT
18) Front Panel Stickers: FR, PT
M1213589
E-PSM-01, Front Panel Unit - HU, FRU
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - HU
18) Front Panel Stickers: HU
M1213590
E-PSMP-01, Front Panel Unit - DE, FRU
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - DE
18) Front Panel Stickers: DE
M1213591
E-PSMP-01, Front Panel Unit - EN, NL, IT, FRU
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - EN, NL, IT
18) Front Panel Stickers: EN, NL, IT
M1213592
E-PSMP-01, Front Panel Unit - ES, FRU
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - ES
18) Front Panel Stickers: ES
M1213593
E-PSMP-01, Front Panel Unit - CS, DA, FI, NO, PL, FRU
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - CS, DA, FI, NO, PL
18) Front Panel Stickers: CS, DA, FI,
NO, PL
M1213594
E-PSMP-01, Front Panel Unit - FR, PT, FRU
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - FR, PT
18) Front Panel Stickers: FR, PT
M1213595
E-PSMP-01, Front Panel Unit - HU, FRU
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - HU
18) Front Panel Stickers: HU
M1213596
E-PSMP-01, Front Panel Unit - SV, FRU
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - SV
18) Front Panel Stickers: SV
M1213597
14
Document no. M1187346-007
Spare Parts
2.2 Patient Side Modules, E-PSM, E-PSMP (Rev. 00)
FRU / Item Description
Parts Included
Order No.
NIBP Board, E-PSM(P)
2) NIPB Board
M1007747
STP-CO Board, E-PSM(P)
4) STP Board
M1018406
Module Flex Board Unit, E-PSM(P)
7) Module Bus Connector
M1012191
ECG Board, E-PSM(P)
8) ECG Board
M1007722
E-PSM(P), NIPB Pump, FRU
9) NIPB Pump, screws and washers
M1221540
NIBP Manifold Unit, E-PSM(P)
15) NIPB Manifold Unit
M1020158
E-PSM(P), Plastic Parts, FRU
1) Cover
3) STP NIPB Insulator
5) ECG STP Insulator
6) Module Bus Insulator
M1221538
E-PSM(P), Frame, FRU
10) Frame
M1221537
E-PSM(P), Screws and Washers, FRU
All screws and washers
M1221482
E-PSM(P), Air Filter, FRU
14) Filter
13) Filter Cover
M1221481
E-PSM(P), Lock Unit, FRU
11) Lock Unit and screws
M1221394
Front Panel Unit, E-PSM - DE
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - DE
M1027533
15
Document no. M1187346-007
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
FRU / Item Description
Parts Included
Order No.
Front Panel Unit, E-PSM - EN, NL, IT
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - EN, NL, IT
M1027530
Front Panel Unit, E-PSM - ES
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - ES
M1027534
Front Panel Unit, E-PSM - FI, DA, NO, PL, SV, CS
16) Front Panel Unit
M1027531
17) Front Mask - CS, DA, FI, NO, PL, SV
Front Panel Unit, E-PSM - FR, PT
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - FR, PT
M1027532
Front Panel Unit, E-PSM - HU
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - HU
M1050791
Front Panel Unit, E-PSMP - DE
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - DE
M1027524
Front Panel Unit, E-PSMP - EN, NL, IT
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - EN, NL, IT
M1027528
Front Panel Unit, E-PSMP - ES
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - ES
M1027529
Front Panel Unit, E-PSMP - FI, DA, NO, PL, CS
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - CS, DA, FI, NO, PL
M1027523
Front Panel Unit, E-PSMP - FR, PT
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - FR, PT
M1027525
Front Panel Unit, E-PSMP - HU
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - HU
M1050790
Front Panel Unit, E-PSMP - SV
16) Front Panel Unit
17) Front Mask - SV
M1027526
2.2.1 Front panel labeling, E-PSM(P) (Rev. 00 and 01)
Item
Description
Order No.
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSM - CS
M1063619
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSM - DA
M1023749
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSM - DE
M1023740
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSM - EN
M1023739
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSM - ES
M1023743
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSM - FI
M1023746
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSM - FR
M1023741
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSM - HU
M1042359
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSM - IT
M1023744
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSM - NL
M1023742
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSM - NO
M1023748
16
Document no. M1187346-007
Spare Parts
Item
Description
Order No.
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSM - PL
M1023750
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSM - PT
M1023745
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSM - SV
M1023747
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSMP - CS
M1063611
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSMP - DA
M1021379
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSMP - DE
M1021348
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSMP - EN
M1020271
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSMP - ES
M1021358
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSMP - FI
M1021369
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSMP - FR
M1021352
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSMP - HU
M1042356
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSMP - IT
M1021362
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSMP - NL
M1021355
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSMP - NO
M1021375
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSMP - PL
M1021386
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSMP - PT
M1021366
Front Panel Sticker, E-PSMP - SV
M1021372
2.2.2 Spare parts for PSM mounts
Item
Description
Order No.
Pole Mount for PSM, long
M1051023-S
Frame Mount for PSM
M1051021-S
Pole Mount for PSM, short
M1049197-S
17
Document no. M1187346-007
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
3
Extension Modules for FM
3.1 Extension Modules for FM, N-FCREC, N-FREC
Figure 1
Exploded view of N-FCREC module
Extension Module for FM, N-FCREC, N-FREC
The following N-F(C)(REC) parts will be available as field replaceable spare parts:
Item
Description
Order Code
1
REC Board, N-F(C)REC
M1009960
2
Interconnection flex
M1009962
3
Nafion Tubing
733382
18
Document no. M1187346-007
Spare Parts
Item
Description
Order Code
4
Air Filter, N-FC(REC)
M1011471
5
MiniC Unit, N-FC(REC)
M1013204
6
Module cover, right, N-F(C)REC
M1006806
7
Module cover, left, N-F(C)REC
M1006808
8
Module Bus Flex Board Unit, N-F(C)(REC)
M1015109
9
Tubing Unit for miniC, N-FC(REC)
M1013717
10
Pump Unit for miniC, N-FC(REC)
M1013716
11
Front Panel Unit, N-FREC
M1007843
11
Front Panel Unit, N-FCREC
M1015148
13
Mini D-fend O-ring
656565
14
Recorder Unit, N-F(C)REC
M1007853
15
Lock Unit, N-F(C)(REC)
M1011862
16
Insulation plate
M1006816
Screws
17
PT2.2x6, TORX
M1010189
18
PT3x16, TORX
M1000523
19
M3x6, POZIDRIVE
61721
20
PT3x8, TORX
628727
Screw for plastic, PT3.5x7.5mm, pan head, torx /T8
M1013389
3.2 Front panel labeling, N-FC, N-FCREC
Item
Description
Order Code
12
Gas Exhaust Sticker, N-FC(REC)
M1013819
12
Gas Exhaust Sticker, N-FC(REC) - US
M1025438
19
Document no. M1187346-007
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
3.3 Extension Module for FM, N-FC
N-FC
Item
Description
Order Code
1
Module cover, left, N-FC
M1010206
2
Module Bus Flex Board Unit, N-FC
M1027713
3
Nafion Tubing
733382
4
Air Filter, N-FC(REC)
M1011471
5
Tubing Unit for miniC, N-FC(REC)
M1013717
6
miniC Unit, N-FC(REC)
M1013204
7
Module cover, right, N-FC
M1010204
8
Pump Unit for miniC, N-FC(REC)
M1013716
9
Lock Unit, N-F(C)(REC)
M1011862
10
Mini D-fend O-ring
656565
11
Front Panel Unit, N-FC
M1026296
12
Screw PT2.2x6, TORX
M1010189
13
Screw PT3x12, TORX
628729
14
Screw for plastic, PT3.5x7.5mm, pan head, torx /T8
M1013389
20
Document no. M1187346-007
Spare Parts
4
Remote controller, K-CREMCO, rev. 00, 01
Figure 2
Exploded view of the Remote Controller
Item
Description
Order No.
1
CPU board, K-REMCO
890368
2
Keyboard PCB, K-REMCO
890371
3
Connecting plate
891427
4
Rotary wheel
891036
5
ComWheel (green); K-REMCO; S/5
898940
6
Bottom (Munsell N9); K-REMCO; S/5
898938
7
Cover (Munsell N9); K-REMCO; S/5
898939
8
K-REMCO - CM cable
891965
9
Bridge for cable
893235
Replaced by
21
Document no. M1187346-007
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Item
Description
Order No.
10
Printing of the keyboard, CS; K-REMCO
M1063588
10
Front Panel sticker, DA; K-REMCO (rev.00), (rev.01; S/5)
892203
10
Front Panel sticker, DE; K-REMCO (rev.00), (rev.01; S/5)
892312
10
Front Panel sticker, EN; K-REMCO (rev.00), (rev.01; S/5)
891425
10
Front Panel sticker, ES; K-REMCO
892315
10
Front Panel sticker, FI; K-REMCO (rev.00), (rev.01; S/5)
892317
10
Front Panel sticker, FR; K-REMCO (rev.00), (rev.01; S/5)
892313
10
Front Panel sticker, IT; K-REMCO (rev.00), (rev.01; S/5)
892316
10
Front Panel sticker, NL; K-REMCO (rev.00), (rev.01; S/5)
892314
10
Front Panel sticker, NO; K-REMCO (rev.00), (rev.01; S/5)
893553
10
Front Panel sticker, PT; K-REMCO (rev.01); S/5
895233
10
Front Panel sticker; SV; K-REMCO (rev.00), (rev.01; S/5)
892318
10
PANEL, Printing of the keyboard, K-REMCO, HU
M1060080
11
Front panel framework
891426
12
Slotted recess screw M2.5x22
61218
13
Cross recess PT-screw M2.5x16
628719
14
Cross cylinder-head screw M3x6
61721
15
Shake proof washer m3.2
63611
16
Cable binder
546454
22
Document no. M1187346-007
Replaced by
Spare Parts
5
Device Interfacing Solution, N-DISxxx (rev.01)
Figure 3
Exploded view of the Device Interfacing module
Item
Description
Order No.
1
Screw for the DIS module case
617210
2
DIS module case, rear
896930
3
Screw for the PC board, MFX M2.5X5 STZN
61209
4
Screw, STZN M3x6 TUFFLOCK
617120
5
SCREW, machine screw, M2.5x10mm, DIN7985, ISO7045, Pozidrive, pan head,
steel, zinc coated
61715
6
Strain relief, N-DIS
897443
7
Bus cable, 1 m
900501
7
Bus cable, 2 m
900502
7
Bus cable, 6 m
900503
Device specific cables:
8
Cable for Abbot Oximetrix 3
N-DISOXIM3
M1034676
8
Cable for Abbot Q-Vue/Q2
N-DISQVUE
897230
23
Document no. M1187346-007
Datex-Ohmeda S/5 FM
Item
Description
Order No.
8
Cable for AVL Opticca
N-DISOPT
M1034675
8
Cable for Baxter Vigilance
N-DISVIGIL
8002841
DIS module case with labeling:
9
Front cover for Abbot Oximetrix 3
N-DISOXIM3
M1057869
9
Front cover for Abbot Q-Vue/Q2
N-DISQVUE
M1057870
9
Front cover for AVL Opticca
N-DISOPT
M1057867
9
Front cover for Baxter Vigilance
N-DISVIGIL
M1057872
24
Document no. M1187346-007
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising